Manual Panasonic DC-G91 (page 341 of 346) (English)

699381

341

Zoom out

Zoom in

1/346

Please read these instructions carefully before using this product,

and save this manual for future use.

Operating Instructions

for advanced features

Digital Camera

Model No. DC-G90

DC-G91

DVQP1898ZA

F0519MH0

until

2017/12/31

Message Display P325

Troubleshooting P328

Finding the information you need P2

Contents P4

Contents by Function P10

Menu Guide P192









Finding the information you need

In this “Operating Instructions for advanced features”, you can find the information you

need from the following pages.

By clicking a page number, you can jump to the linked page and quickly find the

information.

Search from “Contents”

Click this icon to jump to “Contents”.

Search from the list of function names P10

Search from the list of buttons and dials P16

Search from the list of screens and icons P318

Search from “Message Display” P325

Search from “Menu Guide”

Click this icon to jump to “Menu Guide”.

P192

Search from “Troubleshooting” P328

Click this icon to jump to “Finding the information you need”.

Click this icon to return to the previously displayed page.









How to use this manual

∫ About the symbols in the text

• Click a cross reference in the text to jump to the corresponding page.

• Description in these operating instructions is based on the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060).

About the indication of the applicable mode

Applicable modes:

The icons indicate the modes available for a function.

• Black icons: Applicable modes

• Grey icons: Unavailable modes

and will differ depending on the Recording Modes registered under custom

settings.

: Indicates that the menu can be set by pressing [MENU/SET] button.

: Indicates that the Wi-Fi setting can be made by pressing [Wi-Fi] button.

: Tips for skilful use and points for recording.

: Conditions in which a particular function cannot be used.

Steps for setting a menu item are described as follows.

Example: In the [Rec] menu, change [Quality] from [

A] to [›]

> [Rec] > [Quality] > [›]

Wi-Fi

Contents

Finding the information you need..............................................................................2

How to use this manual.............................................................................................3

Contents by Function ..............................................................................................10

1. Before Use

Care of the camera .................................................................................................13

Standard Accessories .............................................................................................15

Names and Functions of Components....................................................................16

About the Lens........................................................................................................19

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Attaching the Shoulder Strap ..................................................................................20

Charging the Battery ...............................................................................................21

• Charge the battery using the battery charger .................................................21

• Battery Insertion .............................................................................................22

• Charge the battery using the camera .............................................................24

• Number of pictures and recordable time ........................................................27

Inserting the Card (Optional)...................................................................................30

Card Information .....................................................................................................32

• Formatting the card (initialisation) ..................................................................33

• Number of Recordable Pictures, Recordable Time ........................................33

Attaching a Lens .....................................................................................................35

Changing the Monitor Position................................................................................38

Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time) .........................................39

Basic Operations.....................................................................................................41

• How to Hold the Camera ................................................................................41

• Using the Viewfinder.......................................................................................42

• Shutter button (Taking pictures) .....................................................................43

• Motion picture button (Recording motion pictures).........................................44

• Mode dial (Selecting a Recording Mode) .......................................................44

• Front Dial/Rear Dial........................................................................................45

• Control Dial.....................................................................................................47

• Cursor buttons/[MENU/SET] button ...............................................................48

• [DISP.] button (switching the information display) ..........................................48

• Touch screen (Touch operations) ...................................................................52

• Taking Pictures Using the Touch Function .....................................................53

Setting menu items .................................................................................................55

Quick Menu .............................................................................................................58

• Customising the Quick Menu settings ............................................................59

Fn Buttons...............................................................................................................60

Entering Text ...........................................................................................................64

Contents

3. Recording Modes

Easy Recording (Intelligent Auto Mode)..................................................................65

• [Intelligent Auto] menu....................................................................................68

• Taking pictures with customised colour, defocus control,

and brightness settings ..................................................................................69

Programme AE Mode .............................................................................................71

Taking Pictures by Specifying the Aperture/Shutter Speed.....................................72

• Aperture-Priority AE Mode .............................................................................73

• Shutter-Priority AE Mode................................................................................73

• Manual Exposure Mode .................................................................................74

• Bulb recording ................................................................................................75

• Live View Composite Recording.....................................................................76

• Preview Mode.................................................................................................78

• One Push AE..................................................................................................79

Custom Mode..........................................................................................................80

• Registering custom settings ...........................................................................80

• Using Custom Mode.......................................................................................81

Scene Guide Mode .................................................................................................82

• [Panorama Shot] ............................................................................................85

Creative Control Mode ............................................................................................87

• Types of image effects....................................................................................88

4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings

Using AF .................................................................................................................93

• Setting the Focus Mode (AFS/AFF/AFC) .......................................................95

• [AF Sensitivity(Photo)]....................................................................................96

Selecting the AF Mode............................................................................................97

• AF area movement operation.......................................................................102

• Specifying the AF area position with the Touch Pad ....................................105

• Adjusting focus and brightness for the touched position ..............................106

Record Using MF ..................................................................................................107

Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock) .........................................................110

Exposure Compensation....................................................................................... 111

Setting the ISO Sensitivity ....................................................................................113

Setting the White Balance (WB)............................................................................115

• Finely adjusting the White Balance ..............................................................117

Contents

5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings

Select a Drive Mode..............................................................................................118

Taking Pictures using Burst Mode.........................................................................119

4K Photo Recording..............................................................................................122

• Notes on the 4K Photo function....................................................................125

Selecting pictures from 4K burst file......................................................................128

• Operations during selecting pictures ............................................................129

Post Focus Recording...........................................................................................133

• Selecting the Focus Position for the Picture to Save ...................................135

• Focus Stacking .............................................................................................136

Taking Pictures with Time Lapse Shot/

Stop Motion Animation ..........................................................................................138

• [Time Lapse Shot] ........................................................................................138

• Recording with Stop Motion Animation.........................................................140

• Motion pictures using Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation ..................142

Recording Using the Self-timer .............................................................................143

Bracket Recording ................................................................................................144

• Exposure Bracket .........................................................................................145

• Aperture Bracket ..........................................................................................146

• Focus Bracket ..............................................................................................146

• White Balance Bracket .................................................................................147

6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

Image Stabiliser.....................................................................................................148

• Image Stabiliser Settings ..............................................................................150

• Setting the focal length of a lens ..................................................................151

Taking Pictures with the Zoom ..............................................................................153

• Optical zoom ................................................................................................153

• Raising the telescopic effect.........................................................................154

• Zooming using touch operations (Touch zoom) ...........................................158

Using a Flash ........................................................................................................159

Setting Flash Functions ........................................................................................161

• [Firing Mode]/[Manual Flash Adjust.]............................................................161

• [Flash Mode].................................................................................................162

• [Flash Synchro] ............................................................................................164

• Adjusting the Flash Output ...........................................................................165

• [Auto Exposure Comp.] ................................................................................165

Recording Using a Wireless Flash........................................................................166

• Using other settings for wireless flash recording ..........................................168

Contents

7. Recording Motion Pictures

Recording Motion Picture......................................................................................169

• [Rec Format]/[Rec Quality] ...........................................................................171

• [Continuous AF]............................................................................................172

• [AF Custom Setting(Video)]..........................................................................173

• Log recording (V-Log L)................................................................................174

• Recording still pictures while recording motion pictures...............................175

• [Snap Movie] ................................................................................................176

• Displaying/Setting the Sound Recording Level ............................................179

Creative Video Mode.............................................................................................180

• [High Speed Video].......................................................................................181

• [4K Live Cropping]........................................................................................182

8. Playing Back and Editing Images

Playing Back Pictures ...........................................................................................184

Playing Back Motion Pictures................................................................................185

• Extracting a Picture ......................................................................................186

Switching the Display Mode..................................................................................187

• Enlarged Display ..........................................................................................187

• Thumbnail Screen ........................................................................................187

• Calendar Playback .......................................................................................188

Group Images .......................................................................................................189

Deleting Images ....................................................................................................191

9. Menu Guide

Menus that are only available for particular Recording Modes .............................192

[Rec] menu............................................................................................................193

[Motion Picture] menu ...........................................................................................210

[Custom] menu......................................................................................................213

[Setup] menu.........................................................................................................228

[My Menu] menu ...................................................................................................238

[Playback] menu ...................................................................................................239

Contents

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

What you can do with the Wi-Fi

/Bluetooth

function ...........................................256

Wi-Fi function/Bluetooth function ..........................................................................257

Connecting to a smartphone .................................................................................259

• Installing “Panasonic Image App” ................................................................259

• Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection)..................................260

• Connecting to a Smartphone (Wi-Fi connection) .........................................262

• Changing the Wi-Fi connection method .......................................................264

• Terminating the Wi-Fi connection .................................................................265

Operating the Camera with a Smartphone............................................................266

• Camera power operations ............................................................................266

• Remote shooting ..........................................................................................267

• [Shutter Remote Control]..............................................................................268

• Playing back/saving recorded images and sending them

to social media sites.....................................................................................270

• Transferring recorded images automatically ................................................271

• Recording location information .....................................................................273

• Automatically setting the clock .....................................................................274

• Editing motion pictures recorded with Snap Movie ......................................275

Displaying pictures on a TV ..................................................................................276

Sending images from the camera .........................................................................277

Sending images to a smartphone .........................................................................280

Printing Wirelessly.................................................................................................281

Sending images to AV device ...............................................................................282

Sending images to PC ..........................................................................................283

Using Web services ..............................................................................................285

• When sending images to web service..........................................................285

• When sending images to [Cloud Sync. Service] ..........................................288

• “LUMIX CLUB” .............................................................................................289

Wi-Fi connections .................................................................................................292

• [Via Network] ................................................................................................293

• [Direct] ..........................................................................................................295

• Connect to Wi-Fi Using Previously Saved Settings......................................296

[Wi-Fi Setup] Menu ...............................................................................................298

Contents

11. Connecting to other devices

Watching/Saving 4K Motion Pictures on an External Device................................300

• Watching motion pictures in 4K ....................................................................300

• Storing 4K motion pictures ...........................................................................300

Playing Back Pictures on a TV Screen .................................................................301

• Recording while monitoring camera images ................................................302

• Using VIERA Link (HDMI) ............................................................................303

Importing images to a PC .....................................................................................304

• Downloading software ..................................................................................305

• Copying images to a PC...............................................................................307

Storing on a Recorder ...........................................................................................309

Printing the Pictures..............................................................................................310

• Adding date and text to pictures...................................................................312

12. Others

Optional accessories.............................................................................................313

Monitor Display/Viewfinder Display.......................................................................318

Message Display...................................................................................................325

Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................328

Cautions for Use ...................................................................................................337

Contents by Function

Recording

Recording Mode ..............................P44

[Preview]..........................................P78

Bulb recording .................................P75

[Live View Composite] ..................... P76

[Panorama Shot] .............................P85

[Time Lapse Shot] .........................P138

[Stop Motion Animation] ................P140

Bracket Recording .........................P144

[Silent Mode] .................................P206

[Multi Exp.].....................................P209

4K photo

4K Photo Recording ...................... P122

Post Focus Recording ................... P133

Focus (AF/MF)

AF....................................................P93

[Focus Mode]...................................P95

[AF Sensitivity(Photo)].................... P96

[AF Mode]........................................ P97

Adjusting the AF area position ......P102

MF .................................................P107

[AF/AE Lock] .................................P110

Drive

[Drive Mode] .................................. P118

[Burst] ............................................P119

[Self Timer] ....................................P143

Picture Quality and Colour Tone

[White Balance]..............................P115

[Picture Size]..................................P194

[Quality]..........................................P195

[Photo Style] ..................................P196

[Filter Settings]...............................P199

[Color Space] .................................P200

[Highlight Shadow].........................P201

[i.Dynamic] .....................................P202

[i.Resolution]..................................P203

[Long Shtr NR] ...............................P204

[Shading Comp.] ............................P205

[Diffraction Compensation] ............P205

[HDR] .............................................P208

Exposure

[Touch AE] .......................................P54

[One Push AE] .................................P79

[AF/AE Lock]..................................P110

Exposure Compensation ...............P111

[Sensitivity].....................................P113

Exposure Bracket ..........................P145

[Metering Mode].............................P201

Stabiliser

Dual I.S. .........................................P148

5-Axis Hybrid Image Stabiliser.......P149

Flash

[Flash Mode] ..................................P162

[Flash Synchro]..............................P164

[Flash Adjust.] ................................

P165

Wir

eless flash settings ...................P166

Recording

Contents by Function

Motion Picture

[Rec Format]/[Rec Quality] ............ P171

Recording still pictures while

recording motion pictures .............. P175

[Snap Movie] .................................P176

Creative Video Mode

[High Speed Video] .......................P181

[4K Live Cropping].........................P182

Audio

[Sound Rec Level Adj.]..................P179

[Sound Rec Level Limiter] .............P179

[Wind Cut]......................................P317

[Wind Noise Canceller]..................P211

[Lens Noise Cut]............................P211

Monitoring

HDMI output during recording........P302

[Sound Output]...............................P212

Screen settings

[Sound Rec Level Disp.] ................P179

[Monochrome Live View] ...............P219

[Center Marker]..............................P221

[Zebra Pattern]...............................P222

Advanced recording

Log recording (V-Log L).................P174

Basic settings

[Format] ...........................................P33

[Clock Set] .......................................P39

Adjusting the Viewfinder Dioptre ..... P42

[Q.MENU] ........................................ P58

[Beep] ............................................P230

[Economy] .....................................P231

[Reset] (initialisation) ..................... P236

[Sensor Cleaning].......................... P237

Customisation

Fn buttons........................................P60

Custom Mode ..................................P80

[Custom] menu ..............................P213

Motion Picture

Setup/Custom

Contents by Function

Playback

Picture playback ............................P184

Motion picture playback.................P185

Playback Zoom..............................P187

Thumbnail Screen .........................P187

Delete ............................................ P191

[Auto Review] ................................ P219

[Slide Show] .................................. P240

[Rotate]/[Rotate Disp.] ...........P253, 254

Edit

[4K PHOTO Bulk Saving]...............P128

Post Focus.....................................P133

Focus Stacking ..............................P136

[Title Edit].......................................P243

[RAW Processing]..........................P244

[Light Composition] ........................P247

[Sequence Composition]................P248

[Clear Retouch]..............................P249

[Text Stamp] ..................................P250

[Resize]..........................................P251

[Cropping] ......................................P252

Image settings

[Protect] .........................................P242

[Rating] ..........................................P242

Image App

“Image App” ..................................P259

[Remote Wakeup]......................... P266

Remote recording.......................... P267

[Auto Transfer].............................. P271

In combination with other devices

Playing back pictures on a TV .......P276

Printing images ..............................P281

Sending images to an AV device

......P282

Sending images to a PC ................P283

Sending images to a web service

.....P285

Using [Cloud Sync. Service] ..........P288

“PHOTOfunSTUDIO” ....................P305

“SILKYPIX Developer Studio” ....... P306

Transferring images to a PC .........P307

Playing Back Pictures on a

TV Screen .....................................P301

[VIERA Link] .................................. P303

Recorder

Dubbing .........................................P309

Printer

PictBridge ......................................P310

Playback

Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

Connections with other devices

1. Before Use

Care of the camera

∫ Firmware of Your Camera/Lens

Firmware updates may be provided in order to improve camera capabilities or to add

functionality. For smoother recording, we recommend updating the firmware of the

camera/lens to the latest version.

• For the latest information on the firmware or to download/update the firmware, visit the

following support website:

https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/

(English only)

• To check the firmware version of the camera/lens, attach the lens to the camera.

∫ Handling of the Camera

Do not subject the camera to strong vibration, impacts, or pressure.

These may cause a malfunction or damage.

– Do not drop or knock against hard surfaces.

– Do not push hard on the lens section or monitor.

If sand, dust, or liquid gets on the monitor, wipe it off with a dry soft cloth.

– If the monitor is closed when such liquids are present, malfunction may result.

– Touch operations may be incorrectly recognised.

Do not place a hand inside the camera mount.

This may cause a failure or damage because the sensor is a precision device.

If you shake the camera while turning the camera off, a sensor may operate or a

rattling sound may be heard. This is caused by the image stabiliser mechanism in

the body. It is not a malfunction.

∫ Splash Resistant

Splash Resistant is a term used to describe an extra level of protection this camera

offers against exposure to a minimal amount of moisture, water or dust. Splash

Resistant does not guarantee that damage will not occur if this camera is subjected

to direct contact with water.

In order to minimise the possibility of damage please be sure the following

precautions are taken:

– Splash Resistant works in conjunction with the lenses that were specifically designed to

support this feature.

– Securely close the doors, socket caps, contact points cover, flash, etc.

– When the lens or cap is removed or a door is open, do not allow sand, dust, and moisture to

enter inside.

– If liquid gets on the camera, wipe it off with a dry soft cloth.

1. Before Use

∫ Condensation (When the Lens, the Viewfinder or Monitor is Fogged Up)

• Condensation occurs when there are temperature or humidity differences. Be careful because

condensation can lead to stains or mould on the lens, viewfinder, and monitor or cause a

failure.

• If condensation occurs, turn off the camera and leave it for approx. 2 hours. The fog will

disappear naturally when the temperature of the camera becomes close to the ambient

temperature.

∫ Be Sure to Perform Trial Recording in Advance

Perform trial recording in advance of an important event (wedding, etc.) to check that

recording can be performed normally.

∫ No Compensation Regarding Recording

Please note that compensation cannot be provided in the event that recording could not be

performed due to a problem with the camera or a card.

∫ Be Careful with Regard to Copyrights

Under copyright law, you may not use the images and audio you have recorded for other

than personal enjoyment without the permission of the copyright holder.

Be careful because there are cases where restrictions apply to recording even for the

purpose of personal enjoyment.

∫ Also Read “Cautions for Use” (P337)

1. Before Use

Standard Accessories

Check that all the accessories are supplied before using the camera.

• The accessories and their shape will differ depending on the country or area where the camera

was purchased.

For details on the accessories, refer to “Basic Operating Instructions”.

• Digital Camera Body is indicated as camera body in the text.

• Battery Pack is indicated as battery pack or battery in the text.

• Battery Charger is indicated as battery charger or charger in the text.

• Interchangeable Lens is indicated as lens in the text.

• SD Memory Card, SDHC Memory Card and SDXC Memory Card are indicated as card in the

text.

• The card is optional.

1. Before Use

Names and Functions of Components

∫ Camera body

ヤラモンヨユ

27 2631

1614

3421

756

282930

[ ] (White Balance) button (P115)

[ ] (ISO sensitivity) button (P113)

[ ] (Exposure Compensation) button (P 111)

Shoulder strap eyelet (P20)

Camera ON/OFF switch (P39)

[ ] (Focus distance reference mark) (P109)

Charging lamp (P24)/

WIRELESS connection lamp (P257)

Dial operation switch button (P46)/

Fn button (Fn1) (P60)

Rear dial (P45)

Shutter button (P43)

Front dial (P45)

Self-timer indicator (P143)/

AF Assist Lamp (P215)

Motion picture button (P169)

Mode dial (P44)

Flash (P159)

Hot shoe (Hot shoe cover) (P313)

• Keep the hot shoe cover out of reach of

children to prevent swallowing.

Stereo microphone (P179)

• Be careful not to cover the microphone with

your finger. Doing so may make sound difficult

to record.

[‰] (Flash open lever) (P159)

• The flash opens, and recording with the flash

becomes possible.

Dioptre adjustment dial (P42)

[MIC] socket (P316)

Drive mode dial (P118)

Headphone socket (P212)

[REMOTE] socket (P315)

[USB/CHARGE] socket (P24, 307, 309, 310)

[HDMI] socket (P301)

Lens release button (P36)

Lens lock pin

Mount

Contact points

Sensor

Lens fitting mark (P35)

1. Before Use

• Fn buttons ([Fn4] to [Fn8]) are touch

icons.

Touch the [ ] tab on the recording screen to

display them.

34 35

51 4748

50 49

Touch screen (P52)/monitor (P318)

[LVF] button (P42)/[Fn3] button (P60)

Viewfinder (P42, 338)

Eye sensor (P42)

Eye cup

[(] (Playback) button (P184)

Speaker (P230)

[AF/AE LOCK] button (P110)

Focus mode lever (P93, 95, 107)

Control dial (P47)

Cursor buttons (P48)/

3 Fn button (Fn9) (P60)

1 Fn button (Fn10) (P60)

4 Fn button (Fn11) (P60)

2 [ ] (AF Mode) button (P93)

[MENU/SET] button (P48, 55)

Card door (P30)

[Q.MENU] button (P58)/[Fn2] button (P60)/

[ ] (Delete) button (P191)/

[ ] (Cancel) button (P57)

[DISP.] button (P48)

Battery door (P22)

DC coupler cover (P317)

• When using an AC adaptor, ensure that the

Panasonic DC coupler (optional) and AC

adaptor (optional) are used.

Release lever (P22)

Cover for the battery grip connector (P314)

• Keep the cover for the battery grip connector

out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.

Tripod mount (P342)

• It may not be possible to attach and securely

fasten a tripod with a screw length of 5.5 mm

(0.22 inch) or more to the camera. Doing so

may also damage the camera.

1. Before Use

∫ Lens

H-FS12060 H-FSA14140

H-FS1442A

32561

7 64 5

231 4

Lens surface

Focus ring (P107)

Zoom ring (P153)

Lens fitting mark (P35)

Contact points

Lens mount rubber (P339)

O.I.S. switch (P148)

1. Before Use

About the Lens

This unit can use the dedicated lenses compatible with

the Micro Four Thirds

System lens mount specification

(Micro Four Thirds mount).

You can also use a lens of any of the following

standards by attaching a mount adaptor.

∫ About the lens and functions

Depending on the lens used, certain functions, such as AF, Image Stabiliser, and zoom

functions, may be disabled or operate differently.

Lens Mount adaptor

Four Thirds™ mount specification

lens

Mount Adaptor (DMW-MA1: optional)

Leica M Mount interchangeable lens M Mount Adaptor (DMW-MA2M: optional)

Leica R Mount interchangeable lens R Mount Adaptor (DMW-MA3R: optional)

• Refer to catalogues/websites for most current information regarding supported lenses.

https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/

(This Site is English only.)

• The focal lengths marked on a Micro Four Thirds lens are equivalent to twice those of a

35 mm film camera. (The focal lengths will be equivalent to those of a 100 mm lens in 35 mm

terms when a 50 mm lens is used.)

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Attaching the Shoulder Strap

We recommend attaching the shoulder strap when using the camera to prevent it

from dropping.

Pass the shoulder strap through the

shoulder strap eyelet on the camera body.

A: Shoulder strap eyelet

Pass the end of the shoulder strap

through the ring in the direction of the

arrow and then pass it through the

stopper.

Pass the end of the shoulder strap

through the hole on the other side of the

stopper.

Pull the shoulder strap and

then check that it will not

come out.

• Perform steps 1 to 4 and then

attach the other side of the

shoulder strap.

• Use the shoulder strap around your shoulder.

– Do not wrap the strap around your neck. It may result in injury or accident.

– Do not leave the shoulder strap where an infant can reach it.

It may result in an accident by mistakenly wrapping around the neck.



2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Charging the Battery

You can charge the battery either using the supplied charger, or in the camera body.

If you turn on the camera, you can also power it from a power outlet.

• Use the supplied charger and AC adaptor.

• The indicated charging time is for when the battery has been discharged completely.

The charging time may vary depending on how the battery has been used.

The charging time for the battery in hot/cold environments or a battery that has not been used

for a long time may be longer than normal.

1 Connect the charger (supplied) and the AC adaptor (supplied) with the USB

connection cable (supplied).

• Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the plug.

(It may result in malfunction by the deforming of the terminal if it is plugged in obliquely or

in wrong direction.)

2 Insert the AC adaptor (supplied) into the power outlet.

3 Insert the battery E in the correct direction.

• The [CHARGE] indicator F lights up and charging begins.

• The battery is not charged when the camera is shipped. Charge the battery before use.

Charge the battery using the battery charger

Charging time Approx. 175 min

• Use the products supplied with the camera for charging.

• Use the charger indoors.

A Charger (supplied)

B USB connection cable (supplied)

C AC adaptor (supplied)

D To power outlet













2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

∫ [CHARGE] indicator

• When the [CHARGE] indicator flashes

– The battery temperature is too high or too low. It is recommended to charge the battery again

in an ambient temperature of between 10 oC and 30 oC (50 oF and 86 oF).

– The terminals of the charger or the battery are dirty. In this case, wipe them with a dry cloth.

• Check that this unit is turned off.

1 Open the battery door.

• Slide the release lever in the direction of the

arrow (to the OPEN side).

• Always use genuine Panasonic batteries.

• If you use other batteries, we cannot

guarantee the quality of this product.

2 Insert the battery.

• Insert the terminal end of the battery and

push until a locking sound is heard.

• Check that the lever A is holding the battery

in place.

3 Close the battery door.

• Close the battery door, and slide the battery

door release lever to the [LOCK] position.

• Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one.

• Do not use any other AC adaptors except the supplied one.

• The AC adaptor (supplied) and USB connection cable (supplied) are for this camera only.

Do not use them with other devices.

On: Charging.

Off: Charging has completed.

(After charging is complete, disconnect the AC adaptor (supplied) from

the power outlet and remove the battery.)

Battery Insertion

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

∫ Removing the Battery

Push the lever A in the direction of the arrow to remove.

• Confirm that there is no foreign matter adhered on the inner side (rubber seal) of the battery

door.

• Remove the battery after use.

(The battery will be exhausted if left for a long period of time after being charged.)

• The battery becomes warm after using it and during and after charging. The camera

also becomes warm during use. This is not a malfunction.

• Turn the camera off and wait for the “LUMIX” display on the monitor to clear before removing

the battery.

(Otherwise, this unit may no longer operate normally and the card itself may be damaged or

the recorded pictures may be lost.)

• Be careful when removing the battery as the battery will jump out.

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

• Using the camera body and the supplied AC adaptor. The camera is turned off.

• The indicated charging time is for when the battery has been discharged completely.

The charging time may vary depending on how the battery has been used.

The charging time for the battery in hot/cold environments or a battery that has not been used

for a long time may be longer than normal.

1 Turn off the camera.

2 Insert the battery into the camera.

3 Connect the camera [USB/CHARGE] socket and the AC adaptor (supplied) with

the USB connection cable (supplied).

4 Insert the AC adaptor (supplied) into the power outlet.

Charge the battery using the camera

Charging time Approx. 180 min

• Use the products supplied with the camera for charging.

• The battery inserted in the Battery Grip (optional) cannot be charged.

A Connect the USB connection cable (supplied) to the [USB/CHARGE] socket.

• Place the camera in an upright position, and find the terminal at the top.

• Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the plug.

(It may result in malfunction by the deforming of the terminal if it is plugged in obliquely or

in wrong direction.)

Do not connect devices to incorrect terminals. Doing so may cause malfunction.

B Charging lamp

C AC adaptor (supplied)

D USB connection cable (supplied)

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

∫ About the charging lamp

• When the charging lamp flashes

– Reconnect the USB connection cable (supplied) in a location where the ambient temperature

(and the temperature of battery) is in a 10 oC to 30 oC (50 oF to 86 oF) range, and try charging

again.

– If the USB device (PC etc.) is not capable of supplying sufficient power, charging is not

possible.

If you connect the camera to a power outlet (AC adaptor (supplied)) or the USB device

(PC etc.) while the camera is turned on, power can be supplied via the USB connection

cable (supplied).

• Insert the battery into this unit.

• [ ] is displayed on the recording screen while power is being supplied.

• The camera consumes a small amount of power even after it is turned off by setting the

camera on/off switch to [OFF]. When leaving the product unused for a long time, disconnect

the AC adaptor (supplied) from the power outlet for power saving.

• You can also charge the battery by connecting a USB device (PC, etc.) and the camera with

the USB connection cable (supplied). In that case, charging may take a while.

• Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one.

• Do not use any other AC adaptors except the supplied one.

• The AC adaptor (supplied) and USB connection cable (supplied) are for this camera only.

Do not use them with other devices.

Lit red: Charging.

Off: Charging has completed.

(When charging is complete, disconnect

the camera from the power outlet or

computer.)

About the power supply

• In certain situations where the camera is used, such as during recording, the battery

may drain. The camera will turn off when the battery power runs out.

• Before connecting or disconnecting the AC adaptor (supplied), turn the camera off.

• Power may not be supplied depending on the power supply capacity of the USB device (PC

etc.).

• If the ambient temperature is high or power is supplied continuously, after [ ] is displayed,

the supply of power may stop. Wait until the camera cools down.

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

∫ Battery level indication

• The battery level indicated on the screen is approximate. The exact level varies depending on

the environment and the operating conditions.

Notifications regarding charging/power supply

75% or higher

50% to 74%

25% to 49%

24% or below

Low battery

• Recharge the battery or replace it with a fully charged

battery.

Blinking red

• It has been found that counterfeit battery packs which look very similar to the genuine

product are made available for purchase in some markets. Some of these battery packs

are not adequately protected with internal protection to meet the requirements of

appropriate safety standards. There is a possibility that these battery packs may lead to

fire or explosion. Please be advised that we are not liable for any accident or failure

occurring as a result of use of a counterfeit battery pack. To ensure that safe products

are used, we recommend that a genuine Panasonic battery pack is used.

• Do not leave any metal items (such as clips) near the contact areas of the power plug.

Otherwise, a fire and/or electric shocks may be caused by short-circuiting or the resulting heat

generated.

• Do not use a USB extension cable.

• Do not use the AC adaptor (supplied) and the USB connection cable (supplied) for other

devices. Doing so may cause malfunction.

• The AC adaptor is in the standby condition when the mains plug is connected. The primary

circuit is always “live” as long as the mains plug is connected to an electrical outlet.

• The battery can be recharged even when it still has some charge left, but it is not

recommended that the battery charge be frequently topped up while the battery is fully

charged. (Since characteristic swelling may occur.)

• If there is a power outage or other problem with the electrical outlet, then charging may not

complete successfully.

Reconnect the power plug.

• Do not connect to keyboards or printer USB ports, or to USB hubs.

• If the connected PC enters sleep status, then charging/power supply may stop.

AFSAFS

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Listed below are the numbers of pictures that can be taken and the time lengths available

for recording when the supplied battery is being used.

• The numbers of recordable pictures listed here are based on the CIPA (Camera & Imaging

Products Association) standard.

• When a Panasonic SDHC memory card is used.

• The values listed are approximate.

∫ Recording still pictures (when using the Monitor)

∫ Recording still pictures (when using the Viewfinder)

The numbers in parentheses indicate the values that result when [Time] in [Power Save

LVF Shooting] is set to [1SEC] and the [Power Save LVF Shooting] function works as

intended.

Number of pictures and recordable time

When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used

Number of recordable pictures Approx. 290 pictures

When the interchangeable lens (H-FSA14140) is used

Number of recordable pictures Approx. 290 pictures

When the interchangeable lens (H-FS1442A) is used

Number of recordable pictures Approx. 290 pictures

When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used

Number of recordable pictures Approx. 290 pictures (Approx. 1000 pictures)

When the interchangeable lens (H-FSA14140) is used

Number of recordable pictures Approx. 290 pictures (Approx. 1000 pictures)

When the interchangeable lens (H-FS1442A) is used

Number of recordable pictures Approx. 290 pictures (Approx. 1000 pictures)

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

∫ Recording motion pictures (when using the monitor)

[AVCHD] (Recording with picture quality set to [FHD/17M/50i])

[MP4] (Recording with picture quality set to [FHD/28M/50p])

[MP4] (Recording with picture quality set to [4K/100M/25p])

• Actual recordable time is the time available for recording when repeating actions such as

turning this unit on and off, starting/stopping recording, etc.

When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used

Recordable time Approx. 110 min

Actual recordable time Approx. 55 min

When the interchangeable lens (H-FSA14140) is used

Recordable time Approx. 100 min

Actual recordable time Approx. 50 min

When the interchangeable lens (H-FS1442A) is used

Recordable time Approx. 100 min

Actual recordable time Approx. 50 min

When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used

Recordable time Approx. 100 min

Actual recordable time Approx. 50 min

When the interchangeable lens (H-FSA14140) is used

Recordable time Approx. 100 min

Actual recordable time Approx. 50 min

When the interchangeable lens (H-FS1442A) is used

Recordable time Approx. 100 min

Actual recordable time Approx. 50 min

When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used

Recordable time Approx. 90 min

Actual recordable time Approx. 45 min

When the interchangeable lens (H-FSA14140) is used

Recordable time Approx. 90 min

Actual recordable time Approx. 45 min

When the interchangeable lens (H-FS1442A) is used

Recordable time Approx. 90 min

Actual recordable time Approx. 45 min

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

∫ Playback (when using the monitor)

When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used

Playback time Approx. 230 min

When the interchangeable lens (H-FSA14140) is used

Playback time Approx. 230 min

When the interchangeable lens (H-FS1442A) is used

Playback time Approx. 230 min

• The operating times and number of recordable pictures will differ according to the

environment and the operating conditions.

For example, in the following cases, the operating times shorten and the number of

recordable pictures is reduced.

– In low-temperature environments, such as on ski slopes.

– When flash is used repeatedly.

• When the operating time of the camera becomes extremely short even immediately after

charging, the life of the battery has expired. Buy a new battery.

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Inserting the Card (Optional)

• Check that this unit is turned off.

Slide the card door to open it.

Insert the card firmly all the way in until a

clicking sound is heard.

• Check the orientation of the card.

A: Do not touch the connection terminals of the card.

Close the card door and slide it firmly in the

direction of the arrow until a clicking sound

is heard.

∫ To re move

Insert until a clicking sound is heard and then pull it

straight out.

• Turn the camera off and wait for the “LUMIX” display on the monitor to clear before removing

the card. (Otherwise, this unit may no longer operate normally and the card itself may be

damaged or the recorded pictures may be lost.)

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

∫ Card access indicators

Access indication

The access indication displays red when pictures are being recorded on

the card.

• Do not perform the operations below while the card is being accessed (while image data

is being written or read or deletion or formatting is in progress, for example).

These operations may damage the card or recorded data or cause the camera to stop

functioning correctly.

– Turning off the camera

– Removing the battery or card, or disconnect the AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler

(optional)

– Exposing the camera to vibration, impact or static electricity

• If operation fails due to vibration, impact or static electricity, perform the operation

again.

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Card Information

The following cards which conform to the SD standard can be used with this unit.

(These cards are indicated as card in the text.)

∫ Recording of motion pictures/4K photos and speed class ratings

Use a card that meets the following ratings of the SD Speed Class or UHS Speed Class.

• SD Speed Class and UHS Speed Class are the speed standards regarding continuous writing.

To check the class, see the labelled side, etc. of the card.

• Please confirm the latest information on the following website.

https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/

(This Site is English only.)

SD Memory Card

(512 MB to 2 GB)

• This unit is compatible with UHS-

I/UHS-II UHS Speed Class

3 standard SDHC/SDXC memory cards.

• Operation of the cards on the left has been confirmed with

Panasonic’s cards.

SDHC Memory Card

(4 GB to 32 GB)

SDXC Memory Card

(48 GB to 128 GB)

[Rec Format] [Rec Quality] Speed class Label example

[AVCHD] All

Class 4 or higher

[MP4]

FHD/HD

4K UHS Speed Class 3

High Speed Video/4K Photo/

Post Focus function

UHS Speed Class 3

• If you set the Write-Protect switch A to “LOCK”, you may not be able to write,

delete or format the data or display it by recording date.

• The data on the card may be damaged or lost due to electromagnetic waves,

static electricity or breakdown of the camera or the card. We recommend storing

important data on a PC etc.

• Keep the memory card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.



2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Format the card before recording a picture with this unit.

Since data cannot be recovered after formatting, make sure to back up necessary

data in advance.

• The values listed are approximate.

∫ Number of recordable pictures

• Aspect ratio [4:3], Quality [A]

• Aspect ratio [4:3], Quality [ ]

∫ Available recording time (when recording motion pictures)

• “h” is an abbreviation for hour, “m” for minute and “s” for second.

• The recordable time is the total time of all the motion pictures which have been recorded.

• [AVCHD]

Formatting the card (initialisation)

> [Setup] > [Format]

• Use a battery with sufficient battery power or the AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler

(optional) when formatting.

• Do not turn off the camera or perform other operations during formatting.

• If the card has been formatted on a PC or other equipment, format it on the camera again.

Number of Recordable Pictures, Recordable Time

[Picture Size]

Card capacity

16 GB 32 GB 64 GB 128 GB

L (20M) 1450 2910 5810 11510

M (10M) 2630 5280 10510 20810

S (5M) 4600 9220 17640 34940

[Picture Size]

Card capacity

16 GB 32 GB 64 GB 128 GB

L (20M) 450 900 1810 3590

M (10M) 520 1050 2110 4180

S (5M) 570 1150 2290 4550

[Rec Quality]

Card capacity

16 GB 32 GB 64 GB 128 GB

[FHD/28M/50p]

1h10m 2h30m 5h00m 9h55m

[FHD/17M/50i]

2h00m 4h05m 8h15m 16h25m

[FHD/24M/25p]

[FHD/24M/24p]

1h25m 2h55m 5h50m 11h35m

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

• [MP4]

[Rec Quality]

Card capacity

16 GB 32 GB 64 GB 128 GB

[4K/100M/30p]

[4K/100M/25p]

[4K/100M/24p]

20m00s 41m00s 1h25m 2h45m

[FHD/28M/60p]

[FHD/28M/50p]

1h10m 2h25m 5h00m 9h55m

[FHD/20M/30p]

[FHD/20M/25p]

1h35m 3h15m 6h40m 13h15m

[HD/10M/30p]

[HD/10M/25p]

3h05m 6h20m 12h45m 25h20m

• Depending on the recording conditions and the type of card, the number of recordable

pictures and available recording time vary.

• [9999i] is displayed on the recording screen if there are 10000 or more recordable pictures

remaining.

• When the recording format is [AVCHD]:

Files exceeding 4 GB in size will be split up and saved as smaller files. (You can continue

recording without interruption.)

• When the recording format is [MP4] (with the size for [Rec Quality] set to [FHD]/[HD]):

Files will be split up and saved and played back as smaller files if the continuous recording

time exceeds 30 minutes or the file size exceeds 4 GB. (You can continue recording without

interruption.)

• When the recording format is [MP4] (with the size for [Rec Quality] set to [4K]):

Files will be split up and saved and played back as smaller files in the following cases.

(You can continue recording without interruption.)

When using an SDHC memory card:

If the file size exceeds 4 GB

When using an SDXC memory card:

If the continuous recording time exceeds 3 hours and 4 minutes or the file size exceeds

96 GB

• The maximum available continuous recording time is displayed on the screen.

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Attaching a Lens

• Check that the camera is turned off.

• Change lenses where there is not a lot of dirt or dust. Refer to P338 when dirt or dust gets on

the lens.

Turn the lens rear cap A and the body cap B in the direction of the

arrow to detach them.

Align the lens fitting marks C and then rotate the lens in the direction

of the arrow until it clicks.

• Do not press the lens release button D when you attach a lens.

• Do not try to attach the lens when holding it at an angle to the camera body as the lens

mount may get scratched.





2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

∫ Removing a Lens

• Attach the lens cap.

While pressing on the lens release button A, rotate the

lens toward the arrow until it stops and then remove.

• When the lens is removed from the camera, dust and other particles may accumulate on or

enter the camera or lens.

Be sure to attach the body cap and the lens rear cap.

∫ Attaching a Lens Hood

When recording into strong backlight, irregular reflection may occur within the lens. The

lens hood reduces the inclusion of unwanted light in the recorded images and lowers the

drop in contrast. The lens hood cuts off excess lighting and improves the picture quality.

To attach the lens hood (flower shape) that came with the interchangeable lenses

(H-FS12060/H-FSA14140/H-FS1442A)

Hold the lens hood by placing your fingers as shown in

the figure.

• Do not hold the lens hood in such a way that it will be

bent.

1 Align the mark A ( ) on the lens hood with the

mark on the tip of the lens.

2 Rotate the lens hood in the direction of the

arrow until it clicks and then align the mark B

( ) on the lens hood with the mark on the tip

of the lens.

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

∫ Removing the lens hood (H-FS12060)

Turn the lens hood in the direction of the arrow to detach

it.

Temporarily Storing the Lens Hood

Example: H-FS12060

1 Remove the lens hood.

2 Align the mark C ( ) on the lens hood with the mark on the tip of the lens.

3 Turn the lens hood in the direction of the arrow until it clicks into place.

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Changing the Monitor Position

At the time when this camera is purchased, the monitor is stowed in the camera body.

Bring out the monitor as shown below.

1 Open the monitor. (It opens up to 180o.)

2 It can be rotated 180o forward.

3 Return the monitor to its original position.

• When rotating the monitor, be careful not to apply too much force. Doing so may cause

damage.

∫ Free angle shooting

The monitor can be rotated to suit your needs. This is convenient as it allows you to take

pictures from various angles by adjusting the monitor.

Taking pictures at a high angle Taking pictures at a low angle

• When not using the monitor it is recommended that you close it with the screen facing inward

to prevent dirt and scratches.

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the

First Time)

• The clock is not set when the camera is shipped.

Turn the camera on.

• If the language select screen is not displayed, proceed

to step

Press [MENU/SET].

Press 3/4 to select the language, and press

[MENU/SET].

Press [MENU/SET].

Press 2/1 to select the items (year, month,

day, hour, minute), and press 3/4 to set.

A: Time at the home area

B: Time at the travel destination

To set the display order and the time display

format.

• To display the setting screen of the order/time, select

[Style] and then press [MENU/SET].

Press [MENU/SET] to set.

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

When [The clock setting has been completed.] is displayed, press

[MENU/SET].

When [Please set the home area] is displayed, press [MENU/SET].

Press 2/1 to select the home area, and then

press [MENU/SET].

∫ Re-adjusting the clock

• The clock can be reset as shown in steps 5 and 6 on P39.

> [Setup] > [Clock Set]

• The clock setting is maintained for 3 months using the built-in clock battery even

without the battery.

(Leave the charged battery in the unit for 24 hours to charge the built-in battery.)

• To place the correct date on pictures, set the clock before recording.

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Basic Operations

Hold the camera gently with both hands, keep your arms still at your side and stand

with your feet slightly apart.

• Do not cover the flash A, AF Assist lamp B, microphone C, or speaker D with your

fingers or other objects.

• Make sure your footing is stable and there is no danger of colliding with another person or

object in the vicinity while taking pictures.

∫ Detects orientation of camera (Direction Detection Function)

This function detects the vertical orientation when you record

with the camera vertically orientated.

When you play back the recording, the recording is

automatically displayed in vertical orientation.

(Only available when [Rotate Disp.] is set to [ON].)

• When the camera is held vertically and tilted significantly up or down to record, the Direction

Detection Function may not work correctly.

• Motion pictures, 4K burst files, and images recorded with the Post Focus function cannot be

displayed vertically.

How to Hold the Camera









2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Rotate the dioptre adjustment dial until you can see the

characters displayed in the viewfinder clearly.

Press [LVF].

A [LVF] button

B Eye sensor

∫ Notes on automatic viewfinder/monitor switching

Bring your eye or an object near the viewfinder to automatically switch to the viewfinder

display using the eye sensor.

Using the Viewfinder

Adjusting the Viewfinder Dioptre

Switching the Monitor/Viewfinder

Automatic viewfinder/

monitor switching

Viewfinder display Monitor display

• To reduce the battery consumption, set [Power Save LVF Shooting] in [Economy] (P231).

• Eye sensor might not work properly depending on the shape of your eyeglasses, the way you

hold the camera, or bright light shining around the eyepiece.

• Automatic viewfinder/monitor switching does not work during motion picture playback and

slide shows.

• The eye sensor does not work depending on the angle of the monitor.

• If [Eye Sensor AF] in the [Custom] ([Focus / Release Shutter]) menu is set to [ON], the camera

automatically adjusts the focus as the eye sensor is activated. The camera does not beep

when focus is achieved with [Eye Sensor AF].

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

The shutter button works in two steps.

Press the shutter button halfway to focus.

• Aperture value and shutter speed are displayed.

(It will flash in red if the correct exposure is not achieved, except

when set to flash.)

• Once the subject is in focus, the focus indication is displayed.

(When the subject is not in focus, the indication flashes.)

A Shutter speed

B Aperture value

C Focus indication

Press the shutter button fully (push it in further), and

take the picture.

Shutter button (Taking pictures)

• Make sure that the camera does not move at the moment the shutter button is pressed.

• Pictures cannot be taken until focus is achieved when [Focus/Release Priority] is set to

[FOCUS].

• Even during menu operation or image playback, if you press the shutter button halfway, you

can instantly set the camera ready for recording.





2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Start recording by pressing the motion picture button.

• Release the motion picture button right after you press it.

Stop the recording by pressing the motion picture

button again.

Rotate the mode dial and select the recording mode.

• Be sure to align the mode dial with the desired mode by

rotating it slowly.

Motion picture button (Recording motion pictures)

Mode dial (Selecting a Recording Mode)

Intelligent Auto Mode (P65)

Intelligent Auto Plus Mode (P66)

Programme AE Mode (P71)

Aperture-Priority AE Mode (P73)

Shutter-Priority AE Mode (P73)

Manual Exposure Mode (P74)

Creative Video Mode (P180)

Custom Mode (P80)

Scene Guide Mode (P82)

Creative Control Mode (P87)

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Rotating: Selects an item or numeric value.

• These operating instructions describe operations of the front dial/rear dial as follows:

Allows you to set the aperture, shutter speed, and other settings when in / / /

modes.

∫ Setting the functions to be assigned to the dials in the ISO sensitivity settings

screen

Front Dial/Rear Dial

e.g.: When rotating the front dial to the left

or right

e.g.: When rotating the rear dial to the left

or right

Mode dial Front dial Rear Dial

Programme Shift Programme Shift

Aperture value Aperture value

Shutter speed Shutter speed

Aperture value Shutter speed

> [Custom] > [Operation] > [ISO Displayed Setting] >

[Front/Rear Dials]

[/][Sensitivity]/[Sensitivity]

[/][ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting]/[Sensitivity]

[OFF/ ] [OFF]/[Sensitivity]

[/][Sensitivity]/[ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting]

[ /OFF] [Sensitivity]/[OFF]

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

∫ Setting the functions to be assigned to 3/4 and dials in the exposure

compensation screen

Temporarily changing the items assigned to the front/rear dials

([Dial Operation Switch])

1 Set a Fn button to [Dial Operation Switch]. (P60)

• This function is set in the Fn button (Fn1) at the time of purchase.

2 Press the Fn button.

• A guide will be displayed showing the items temporarily

assigned to the front/rear dials.

• If no operations are performed, the guide will disappear in

a few seconds.

3 Rotate the front/rear dials while the guide is

displayed.

4 Press [MENU/SET] and set.

• You can also complete this step by performing either of the operations below:

– Press the shutter button halfway

– Press the Fn button

> [Custom] > [Operation] > [Exposure Comp. Disp. Setting]

[Cursor Buttons (Up/Down)]

[] [Exposure Bracket]

[OFF] [OFF]

[Front/Rear Dials]

[/] [Exposure Comp.]/[Exposure Comp.]

[/][Flash Adjust.]/[Exposure Comp.]

[OFF/ ] [OFF]/[Exposure Comp.]

[/ ][Exposure Comp.]/[Flash Adjust.]

[ /OFF] [Exposure Comp.]/[OFF]

• You can set the following settings in [Dial Set.] of the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu. (P48)

– Operation methods of the front/rear dials

– Operation method of the control dial

– Items to be assigned temporarily to the front/rear dials in [Dial Operation Switch]

989898

ISOISOISOISO

WBWBWBWB

WBWBWB

WBWBWBWBWBWBWB

AWBc

AWBw

AWB

ISOISOISOISO

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Rotating: Selects an item or numeric value.

• This is expressed as follows in this document:

– When rotating the control dial to the left or right:

∫ Setting the operation methods of the dial

Control Dial

> [Custom] > [Operation] > [Dial Set.]

[Assign Dial (F/SS)]

Sets the operations to be assigned to the dials in Manual

Exposure Mode.

[F SS]:

Assigns the aperture value to the front dial, and the shutter

speed to the rear dial.

[SS F]:

Assigns the shutter speed to the front dial, and the aperture

value to the rear dial.

[Rotation (F/SS)]

Changes the rotation direction of the dials for adjusting the

aperture value and shutter speed.

[]/[]

[Control Dial Assignment]

Sets the function to be assigned to the control dial in the

recording screen.

[] ([Headphone Volume])/

[/] ([Exposure / Aperture])

¢1

[] ([Exposure Comp.])/[] ([Sensitivity])/

[] ([Focus Frame Size])

¢2

¢1 This assigns exposure compensation operation. It adjusts

the aperture value in Manual Exposure Mode.

¢2 This assigns the following operations:

– When the AF Mode is [š], [ ], [ ] or [Ø]:

Changing the AF area size

– When the AF Mode is [ ] or the Focus Mode is MF:

Changing the assist screen magnification

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Pressing the cursor button:

Selection of items or setting of values etc., is performed.

• These operating instructions expresses the up, down, left, and

right of the cursor button as 3/4/2/1.

Pressing [MENU/SET]:

Confirmation of setting contents, etc., is performed.

• Displays the menu during recording and playback.

Press [DISP.].

• The display information is switched.

[Exposure Comp.]

Assigns exposure compensation operation to the front/rear

dial. (Except in Manual Exposure Mode)

[] (Front Dial)/[ ] (Rear Dial)/[OFF]

[Dial Operation Switch

Setup]

Sets the items to be assigned temporarily to the front/rear dials

when you press the Fn button to which [Dial Operation Switch]

is assigned.

[] ([Front Dial Operation])/[ ] ([Rear Dial Operation])

• Items that can be set are as follows.

– [Photo Style]

– [Filter Effect]

– [Aspect Ratio]

–[4K PHOTO]

– [Highlight Shadow]

– [i.Dynamic]

– [i.Resolution]

– [Flash Mode]

– [Flash Adjust.]

– [Sensitivity]

– [White Balance]

– [AF Mode]

• [Highlight Shadow] uses the two dials.

Cursor buttons/[MENU/SET] button

[DISP.] button (switching the information display)

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

You can switch the viewfinder/monitor display method.

• [ ] Viewfinder style (viewfinder display shown as example)

• [ ] Monitor style (monitor display shown as example)

¢ It is displayed when [Monitor Info. Disp.] in the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display]) is set to [ON].

You can touch the desired item and change its setting directly.

In Recording Mode

> [Custom] > [Monitor / Display] > [LVF/Monitor Disp. Set] >

[LVF Disp. Set]/[Monitor Disp. Set]

[] (viewfinder style)

Scales down images slightly so that you can better review the

composition of the images.

[] (monitor style)

Scales images to fill the entire screen so that you can see their

details.

With information

Without

information

With information

(tilt sensor

display)

Without

information (tilt

sensor display)

With information

Without

information

With information

(tilt sensor

display)

Without

information (tilt

sensor display)

Turned off

On-monitor

recording

information

AFS

4:3

AFS

4:3

989898

AFSAFS

4:3

989898

AFSAFS

4:3

AWB

0 0

ISO

AUTO

OFF

4:3

AFS

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

∫ About the tilt sensor display

With the tilt sensor displayed, it is easy to correct the tilt of the camera etc.

• When the camera is tilted very little or not at all, the level gauge will turn green.

• With [Fn Button Set] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu, you can assign [LVF/Monitor Disp.

Style] to a Fn button.

Each time you press the assigned Fn button, the display style of the monitor or viewfinder

([ ]/[ ]), whichever is currently in use, will change.

• If no operation is performed, the information on the screen will gradually become darker after

approximately 10 seconds has passed, and will no longer be displayed after approximately

1 minute has passed.

Pressing the [DISP.] button or touching the monitor will make the display reappear.

This operation is to prevent screen burn-in and is not a malfunction.

A Horizontal direction: Correcting tilt to the left

B Vertical direction: Correcting downward tilt

• Even after correcting the tilt, there may still be an error of approximately n1°.

• When tilted significantly upwards or downwards to record, the tilt sensor display may not be

displayed correctly, and the Direction Detection Function may not work correctly.



2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

¢1 If approximately 10 seconds elapses without an operation being performed, the display will

disappear.

Press [DISP.] or touch the monitor to make the display reappear.

This operation is to prevent screen burn-in and is not a malfunction.

¢2 Press 3/4 to switch between the following display modes:

– Detailed information display

– Histogram display

– Photo style, Highlight shadow display

– White balance display

– Lens information display

¢3 This is displayed if [Highlight] in the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display]) menu is set to [ON].

In Playback Mode

With

information

¢1

Detailed

information

display

¢2

Without

information

(Highlight

display)

¢1, 3

Without

information

¢1

AWBAWB

1/98981/98

4:3

3.5

RGB

1/5

AFS

200

4:3

100-0001

AWB

ISOISO

10:00 1.DEC.2019

F3.5

STD.

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

∫ Touch

To touch and release the touch screen.

∫ Drag

A movement without releasing the touch screen.

∫ Pinch (enlarge/reduce)

On the touch screen, spread (pinch out) two fingers to

zoom in and narrow (pinch in) them to zoom out.

Touch screen (Touch operations)

• Touch the screen with the clean and dry finger.

• If you use a commercially available monitor protection sheet, please follow the instructions

that accompany the sheet.

(Some monitor protection sheets may impair visibility or operability.)

Not available in these cases:

• The touch screen may not function normally in the following cases.

– When touched by a gloved hand

– When the touch screen is wet

Fn5Fn5Fn5

Fn4Fn4Fn4

Fn6Fn6Fn6

Fn8Fn8Fn8

Fn7Fn7Fn7

AABBB

2.0X2.0X2.0X2.0X

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Applicable modes:

¢ When [Touch AF] in [Touch Settings] of the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu is set to

[AF+AE], the focus and brightness are optimised for the touched position. (P106)

Taking Pictures Using the Touch Function

Touch AF/Touch Shutter

1 Touch [ ].

2 Touch an icon.

• The icon switches every time you touch it.

(Touch AF) Focuses on the position you touch.

(Touch shutter)

Focuses on the touched position before recording

takes place.

(OFF) Touch AF and Touch Shutter are disabled.

3 (When settings other than OFF are selected)

Touch the subject.

• When [ ] (Touch AF) is set, refer to P102 for

information about the operation to change the size and

position of the AF area.

• If shooting with the touch shutter fails, the AF area turns red and disappears.

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Applicable modes:

You can easily optimise the brightness for a touched position. When the face of the subject

appears dark, you can brighten the screen according to the brightness of the face.

∫ Cancelling the Touch AE function

Touch [ ].

Touch AE

1 Touch [ ].

2 Touch [ ].

• The setting screen for the brightness optimisation position

is displayed.

• [Metering Mode] is set to [ ], which is used exclusively

for the Touch AE.

3 Touch the subject you want to optimise the

brightness for.

• Touch [Reset] to bring the brightness optimisation position

back to the centre.

4 Touch [Set].

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following cases:

– When using the Digital Zoom

– When [4K Live Cropping] is set

– When [Touch AF] in [Touch Settings] of the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu has been set to

[AF+AE]

ュリヴヱハ

6HW

5HVHW

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Setting menu items

You can either operate the buttons or touch the monitor to set menu items.

Press [MENU/SET] to display the menu.

Press 2.

• The [Setup] menu contains some important settings relating to the camera’s clock and power.

Check the settings of this menu before proceeding to use the camera.

Press 3/4 to select a menu selector icon,

such as [ ].

• You can also select the menu toggle icons by

rotating the front dial.

/ [Intelligent Auto] (P68)

These menus let you set the functions available for their

corresponding Recording Modes.

[Creative Video] (P180)

[Custom Mode] (P81)

[Scene Guide] (P82)

[Creative Control] (P88)

[Rec] (P193) This menu lets you set picture settings.

[Motion Picture] (P210) This menu lets you set motion picture settings.

[Custom] (P213)

Operation of the unit, such as displaying of the screen

and button operations, can be set up according to your

preferences.

[Setup] (P228)

This menu lets you perform the clock settings, select the

operating beep tone settings and set other settings which

make it easier for you to operate the camera.

You can also configure the settings of Wi-Fi/Bluetooth

related functions.

[My Menu] (P238) This menu lets you register frequently-used menus.

[Playback] (P239)

This menu lets you set the playback and editing settings

for images.

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Press [MENU/SET].

Touch a menu selector icon, such as [ ].

Touch the menu item.

• You can switch the page by touching the bar (A) on the right side of the screen.

Touch the Setting to set.

Touch operation

Press 3/4 of the cursor button to select

the menu item and press [MENU/SET].

• You can also move to the next screen by rotating the

rear dial.

Touch operation

Press 3/4 of the cursor button to select

the setting and press [MENU/SET].

• Depending on the menu item, its setting may not

appear or it may be displayed in a different way.

Touch operation

• You can also rotate the control dial to select the menu selector icon, menu item, or setting.



2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Touch [ ].

∫ Close the menu

Press [ ] or press the shutter button halfway.

Touch operation

• Press [DISP.] to display the menu description.

• Menu items that are not available are displayed in grey.

If you press [MENU/SET] while a grey item is selected,

the reason why it cannot be set is displayed in some

setting situations.

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Quick Menu

This menu enables you to quickly set functions that are frequently used during recording

without calling the menu screen.

Press [Q.MENU] to display the Quick Menu.

Rotate the front dial to select the menu item.

• Setting can also be performed by rotating the control

dial.

Rotate the rear dial to select the setting.

Press [Q.MENU] to exit the Quick Menu once

the setting is complete.

• You can also select menu items and setting items by pressing 3/4/2/1.

• The features that can be adjusted using Quick Menu are determined by the mode or a display

style the camera is in.

When using the on-monitor recording information

screen (P49)

Select the item by pressing the [Q.MENU] button and

rotating the front dial, and then select the setting by rotating

the rear dial.

AFSAFS

AWB

4:3

3.5

AFSAFS

AWB

4:3

3.5

AWB

0 0

ISO

AUTO

OFF

4:3

AFSAFS

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

You can add a maximum of 15 preferred settings to the Quick Menu.

1 Select the menu.

2 Press the shutter button halfway to close the menu.

3 Press [Q.MENU] to display the Quick Menu.

4 Press 4 to select [ ] and then press [MENU/SET].

5 Press 3/4/2/1 to select the menu item in the top

row and then press [MENU/SET].

• Items that have already been set in the top row are

displayed in light grey.

6 Press 2/1 to select the empty space in the bottom

row and then press [MENU/SET].

A Items that can be set

B Set items

• You can also perform the same operation by dragging the

item from the top row to the bottom row.

• If there is no empty space in the bottom row, you can replace an existing item with a new

select item by selecting the existing item.

• You can follow the steps below to cancel the setting.

1 Press 4 to move to the bottom row.

2 Press 2/1 to select the item to be cancelled and then press [MENU/SET].

7 Press [ ].

• It will return to screen of step 4.

Press [MENU/SET] to switch to the recording screen.

Customising the Quick Menu settings

> [Custom] > [Operation] > [Q.MENU] > [CUSTOM]

4:3

AFS

4:3

AFS

1/5

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Fn Buttons

You can register functions to the Fn (Function) buttons.

Different functions can be set for both during recording and playback.

Select the menu.

Press 3/4 to select the Fn button you want

to assign a function to and then press

[MENU/SET].

Press 3/4 to select the function you want to

assign and then press [MENU/SET].

• For details on the functions that can be assigned in [Setting in REC mode], refer to P61.

• For details on the functions that can be assigned in [Setting in PLAY mode], refer to P63.

• To restore the default Fn button settings, select [Restore to Default].

• When not setting a function in the Fn button, select [Off].

∫ Setting function buttons from the on-monitor recording information screen

You can also display the screen in step

2 by touching [Fn] on the on-monitor recording

information screen (P49).

∫ Assigning functions quickly

You can quickly display the screen in step

3 by pressing and holding an Fn button ([Fn1] to

[Fn3], [Fn9] to [Fn11]) for 2 seconds. (This screen, however, may not be displayed

depending on conditions such as the function registered or the screen displayed.)

> [Custom] > [Operation] > [Fn Button Set] >

[Setting in REC mode]/[Setting in PLAY mode]

• Some functions may not be available depending on the mode or the displayed screen.

• Some functions cannot be assigned depending on the Fn button.

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

You can use assigned functions by pressing the corresponding Fn buttons.

∫ Using Fn buttons with touch operations

1 Touch [ ].

2 Touch [Fn4], [Fn5], [Fn6], [Fn7] or [Fn8].

∫ Functions that can be assigned in [Setting in REC mode]

Using the Fn buttons during recording

–[Wi-Fi] (P257)

– [Q.MENU] (P58)

– [Video Record] (P169)

– [LVF/Monitor Switch] (P42)

– [LVF/Monitor Disp. Style]

(P49)

– [AF/AE LOCK] (P110)

–[AF-ON] (P110)

– [Preview] (P78)

– [One Push AE] (P79)

– [Touch AE] (P54)

– [Level Gauge] (P50)

– [Focus Area Set]

– [Zoom Control] (P155)

– [1 Shot "4K PHOTO"]

– [Operation Lock]

– [Focus Ring Lock] (P218)

– [Dial Operation Switch]

(P46)

– [Photo Style] (P196)

– [Filter Effect] (P87)

–[Aspect Ratio] (P194)

– [Picture Size] (P194)

– [Quality] (P195)

– [AFS/AFF] (P95)

– [Metering Mode] (P201)

– [Burst Rate] (P119)

– [4K PHOTO] (P122)

– [Self Timer] (P143)

– [Bracket] (P144)

– [Highlight Shadow] (P201)

– [i.Dynamic] (P202)

– [i.Resolution] (P203)

– [Min. Shtr Speed] (P204)

– [HDR] (P208)

– [Shutter Type] (P206)

– [Flash Mode] (P162)

– [Flash Adjust.] (P165)

– [Wireless Flash Setup]

(P166)

– [Ex. Tele Conv.] (P154)

– [Digital Zoom] (P156)

– [Stabilizer] (P148)

– [E-Stabilization (Video)]

(P150)

– [I.S. Lock (Video)] (P151)

– [4K Live Cropping] (P182)

– [Snap Movie] (P176)

– [Motion Pic. Set] (P171)

– [Picture Mode in Rec.]

(P175)

– [Sound Rec Level Disp.]

(P179)

– [Sound Rec Level Adj.]

(P179)

– [Mic. Directivity Adjust]

(P316)

– [Silent Mode] (P206)

– [Peaking] (P220)

– [Histogram] (P221)

– [Guide Line] (P221)

– [Zebra Pattern] (P

222)

– [Monochrome Live View]

(P219)

– [Constant Preview] (P220)

– [Live View Boost] (P220)

– [Rec Area] (P223)

– [Step Zoom] (P157)

– [Zoom Speed] (P157)

– [Exposure Comp.] (P111)

– [Sensitivity] (P113)

– [White Balance] (P115)

– [AF Mode/MF] (P97)

– [Rec / Playback Switch]

– [Restore to Default]

Fn5Fn5Fn5

Fn4Fn4Fn4

Fn6Fn6Fn6

Fn8Fn8Fn8

Fn7Fn7Fn7

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

• Fn button settings at the time of purchase.

Fn1 [Dial Operation Switch] Fn7 [Histogram]

Fn2 [Q.MENU] Fn8 [I.S. Lock (Video)]

Fn3 [LVF/Monitor Switch] Fn9

No function is set by default.Fn4 [Wi-Fi] Fn10

Fn5 [Preview] Fn11

Fn6 [Level Gauge]

• With [Video Record], you can start/stop recording a motion picture in the same way as with the

motion picture button.

• When set to [Focus Area Set], it is possible to display the position setting screen of either AF

area or MF Assist.

• When [1 Shot "4K PHOTO"] is set, recording is performed in a specified 4K Photo Mode only

once. After the recording has finished, the camera returns to normal state.

• When [Operation Lock] is set, a certain type of operation is disabled. Set the type of operation

to be disabled in [Operation Lock Setting] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu. (P218)

• If you assign [Rec / Playback Switch], you can switch between recording and playback

modes.

• If the screen displays A or similar, the displayed operation will

be performed instead of the function assigned to Fn buttons by

[Fn Button Set].

Fn2



2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

You can use an assigned function by pressing the appropriate Fn button.

• Depending on the function, you can directly use it for the image being played back.

Example: When [Fn1] is set to [Rating¿3]

1 Press 2/1 to select the image.

2 Press the Fn button (Fn1) to set the image as

[Rating¿3].

∫ Functions that can be assigned in [Setting in PLAY mode]

• The following functions can be assigned to the Fn button (Fn1)/[Fn3].

• Fn button settings at the time of purchase.

Using the Fn buttons during playback

–[Wi-Fi] (P257)

– [LVF/Monitor Switch] (P42)

– [Rec / Playback Switch]

– [4K PHOTO Play]

– [Delete Single] (P191)

– [Protect] (P242)

–[Rating¿1] (P242)

–[Rating¿2] (P242)

–[Rating¿3] (P242)

–[Rating¿4] (P242)

–[Rating¿5] (P242)

– [RAW Processing] (P244)

– [4K PHOTO Bulk Saving] (P128)

– [Restore to Default]

Fn1 [Wi-Fi]

Fn3 [LVF/Monitor Switch]

• If you assign [4K PHOTO Play], a screen will be displayed, allowing you to select the pictures

to be extracted from a 4K burst file and saved.

1/981/98

1/98

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Entering Text

Follow the steps below when the text entry screen is displayed.

Press 3/4/2/1 to select text and then

press [MENU/SET] to register.

• To repeatedly enter the same character, rotate the front/

rear dial or the control dial to the right to move the entry

location.

• Operations when the items below are selected

¢ You can also switch between text modes by pressing [DISP.].

• A maximum of 30 characters can be entered.

(Maximum of 9 characters when setting names in [Face Recog.])

• A maximum of 15 characters can be entered for [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] and [ ].

(Maximum of 6 characters when setting names in [Face Recog.])

Press 3/4/2/1 to move the cursor to [Set] and then press [MENU/

SET] to end text input.

– [ ]: Switch text between [A] (upper case characters), [a] (lower case

characters), [1] (numbers), and [&] (special characters)

–[]]: Enter a blank

– [Delete]: Delete a character

– [ ]: Move the entry position cursor to the left

– [ ]: Move the entry position cursor to the right

3. Recording Modes

Easy Recording (Intelligent Auto Mode)

Recording Mode:

The [ ] mode (Intelligent Auto mode) can record images using settings automatically

selected by the camera.

In this mode, the camera makes the optimal settings for the subject and scene.

Set the mode dial to [ ].

• At the time of purchase, the mode is set to Intelligent

Auto Plus Mode.

Hold the camera with the lens facing toward

the subject.

• When the camera identifies the optimum scene, the icon

of the scene concerned will change.

(Automatic Scene Detection)

3. Recording Modes

The camera detects scenes automatically (Scene Detection)

( : When taking pictures, : When recording motion pictures)

∫ Switching between Intelligent Auto Plus Mode and Intelligent Auto Mode

1 Select the menu.

2 Press 3/4 to select [ ] or [ ] and then press [MENU/SET].

Intelligent Auto Plus Mode allows you to adjust the settings below while also using

Intelligent Auto Mode for other settings.

[i-Portrait] [i-Scenery] [i-Macro] [i-Night Portrait]

¢1

[i-Night Scenery]

[iHandheld Night

Shot]

¢2

[i-Food] [i-Baby]

¢3

[i-Sunset] [i-Low Light]

¢1 Displayed when a flash is used.

¢2 Only displayed when [iHandheld Night Shot] is set to [ON].

¢3 Displayed when persons under 3 years old registered in the

camera with the Face Recognition function are detected.

•[¦] is set if none of the scenes are applicable, and the standard

settings are set.

• When recording is performed with the 4K Photo or Post Focus

function, Scene Detection works in the same way as when motion

picture is recorded.

> [Intelligent Auto] > [Intelligent Auto Mode]

It is also possible to display the selection screen by touching the

Recording Mode icon in recording screen.

Intelligent Auto Plus Mode Intelligent Auto Mode

Setting the brightness ± —

Setting the colour tone ± —

Defocus Control ± —

Menus that can be set Many Few

3. Recording Modes

∫ AF, Face/Eye Detection, and Face Recognition

The AF Mode is automatically set to [š]. If you touch the subject, the AF tracking function

will work.

• The AF tracking function will also work if you press [ ] (2) and then press the shutter button

halfway.

• When [Face Recog.] is set to [ON], and the face similar to the registered

face is detected, [R] is displayed in the top right of [ ], [ ] and [ ].

∫ About the flash

• Open the flash when the flash is to be used. (P159)

When recording with the flash, the camera automatically selects [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ]

according to the type and brightness of the subject.

∫ Scene Detection

• Use a tripod or similar support when the scene detection has been identified as [ ].

When the camera has judged that camera shake is minimal, the shutter speed becomes slower

than normal.

Take care not to move the camera while taking pictures.

• Depending on recording conditions, different scene types may be selected for the same

subject.

• When [ ] or [ ] is set, Red-Eye Removal is enabled.

• Shutter speed will be slower during [ ] or [ ].

• In Intelligent Auto Plus Mode, you can set [Flash Mode] to [Œ] (forced flash off) in [Flash] of

the [Rec] menu even with the flash open.

The Backlight Compensation

When there is a backlight, the subject appears darker and the camera will automatically

attempt to correct it by increasing the brightness of the picture.

Backlight Compensation works automatically in Intelligent Auto Plus Mode or Intelligent

Auto Mode.

3. Recording Modes

When [ ] is detected while taking handheld night shots, pictures of the night scenery will

be taken at a high burst speed and composed into a single picture.

When there is, for example, strong contrast between the background and the subject,

multiple still pictures are recorded with differing exposures and combined to create a

single still picture rich in gradation.

[iHDR] works automatically as needed. When it does, [ ] is displayed on the screen.

[Intelligent Auto] menu

Taking handheld shots of night scenes ([iHandheld Night Shot])

> [Intelligent Auto] > [iHandheld Night Shot] > [ON]/[OFF]

• The angle of view will be slightly narrower.

• Do not move the camera during the continuous shooting after pressing the shutter button.

• Flash is fixed to [Œ] (forced flash off).

Combining pictures into a single picture with rich gradation ([iHDR])

> [Intelligent Auto] > [iHDR] > [ON]/[OFF]

• The angle of view will be slightly narrower.

• Do not move the camera during the continuous shooting after pressing the shutter button.

• You cannot take the next picture until the combination of pictures is complete.

• A moving subject may be recorded with unnatural blurs.

Not available in these cases:

• [iHandheld Night Shot]/[iHDR] do not work for the pictures taken during a motion picture

recording.

• [iHandheld Night Shot]/[iHDR] are not available in the following cases:

– When recording in Burst Mode

– When recording 4K photos

– When recording with the Post

Focus function

– When recording with the Bracket

function

– When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]

– When [Ex. Tele Conv.] in the [Rec] menu is set

– When using [Time Lapse Shot]

– When using [Stop Motion Animation] (only when

[Auto Shooting] is set)

• [iHDR] is not available in the following cases:

– When recording using the flash

3. Recording Modes

Recording Mode:

∫ Setting colour

1 Press [ ].

2 Rotate the rear dial to adjust colour.

• To return to the recording screen, press [ ] again.

• The colour setting will return to the default level (centre

point) when this unit is turned off or the camera is switched

to another Recording Mode.

∫ Taking a picture with a blurred background (Defocus

Control)

1 Press [ ] to display the brightness setting screen.

2 Press the Fn button (Fn1) to display the setting

screen.

3 Set the blurriness by rotating the rear dial.

• To return to the recording screen, press [MENU/SET].

• To cancel the setting, press [Fn2] on the blurriness setting

screen.

• AF Mode is set to [Ø].

The position of the AF area can be set by touching the

screen. (Its size cannot be changed)

∫ Setting brightness

1 Press [ ].

2 Rotate the rear dial to adjust brightness.

• In the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu, [Exposure Comp.

Disp. Setting], you can change the functions to be set on

the exposure compensation screen. (P46)

• To return to the recording screen, press [ ] again.

Taking pictures with customised colour, defocus control, and

brightness settings

500 250 125 60 30

4.0 5.6 8.0

+1+1

+3+3+1+1 +2+2 +3+3

100

+5+5+4+4

3. Recording Modes

Change the settings by using the touch screen

1 Touch [ ].

2 Touch the item you want to set.

[ ]: Colour tone

[ ]: Defocus level

[ ]: Brightness

3 Drag the slide bar to set.

• To return to the recording screen, press [MENU/SET].

• Depending on the lens used, you may hear a sound from the lens while operating Defocus

Control. This is due to the aperture operation of the lens and is not a malfunction.

• Depending on the lens used, operational sound of the Defocus Control may be recorded

during the recording of a motion picture when the function is used.

3. Recording Modes

Programme AE Mode

Recording Mode:

The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and the aperture value according to the

brightness of the subject.

You can take pictures with greater freedom by changing various settings in the [Rec]

menu.

Set the mode dial to [ ].

Press the shutter button halfway and display

the aperture value and shutter speed value

on the screen.

A Shutter speed

B Aperture value

• If the exposure is not adequate, the aperture value and shutter speed turn red and blink.

∫ Programme Shift

You can change the preset aperture value and shutter speed without changing the

exposure. This is called Programme Shift.

It enables you to, for example, make the background more defocused by decreasing the

aperture value or capture a moving subject more dynamically by slowing the shutter

speed.

1 Press the shutter button halfway and display the aperture value and shutter

speed value on the screen.

2 While the values are displayed (about 10 seconds),

perform Programme Shift by rotating the rear dial or

front dial.

A Programme Shift indication

• To cancel Programme Shift, perform either of the following

operations:

– Turn off the camera.

– Rotate the front/rear dial until the Programme Shift indication disappears.

Not available in these cases:

• Programme Shift is not available in the following cases:

– When recording using the flash

– When recording 4K photos

– When recording with the Post Focus function

– When the ISO sensitivity is set to [ ]

3.5

4.0

3. Recording Modes

Taking Pictures by Specifying the Aperture/

Shutter Speed

Recording Mode:

• The effects of the set aperture value and shutter speed will not be visible on the recording

screen. To check on the recording screen, please use [Preview]. (P78)

• The brightness of the screen and the recorded pictures may differ. Check the pictures on the

playback screen.

• If the exposure is not adequate, the aperture value and the shutter speed turn red and blink

when the shutter button is pressed halfway.

(Example: In Manual

Exposure Mode)

A Shutter speed

B Aperture value

Aperture

value

Small

It becomes easier to

defocus the

background.

Large

It becomes easier to

maintain focus as far as

the background.

Shutter

speed

Slow

It becomes easier to

express movement.

Fast

It becomes easier to

freeze movement.

5.6

3. Recording Modes

When you set the aperture value, the camera automatically optimises the shutter speed

for the brightness of the subject.

1 Set the mode dial to [ ].

2 Set the aperture value by rotating the rear dial or the

front dial.

A Aperture value

When you set the shutter speed, the camera automatically optimises the aperture value

for the brightness of the subject.

1 Set the mode dial to [ ].

2 Set the shutter speed by rotating the rear dial or the

front dial.

A Shutter speed

Aperture-Priority AE Mode

• When using a lens with an aperture ring, set the position of the aperture ring to other than [A]

to use the aperture value of the lens.

Shutter-Priority AE Mode

• When the flash is activated, the fastest shutter speed that can be selected is 1/200 of a

second. (P162)

8.0

250

3. Recording Modes

Determine the exposure by manually setting the aperture value and the shutter speed.

1 Set the mode dial to [ ].

2 Rotate the rear dial to set the shutter speed, and

rotate the front dial to set the aperture value.

A Shutter speed

B Aperture value

C Manual Exposure Assistance

• When using the mechanical shutter or the electronic front curtain, you can set [B] (Bulb)

and then [LC] (Live View Composite) by rotating the rear dial to the left.

For information about Live View Composite recording, refer to page 76.

Optimising the ISO sensitivity for the shutter speed and aperture value

When the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO], it will be adjusted according to the shutter speed

and aperture value.

• Depending on recording conditions, an appropriate exposure may not be set or the ISO

sensitivity may become higher.

Manual Exposure Assistance

When the ISO sensitivity is set to other than [AUTO], Manual Exposure Assistance will be

displayed on the recording screen.

• The Manual Exposure Assistance is an approximation. We recommend checking the pictures

on the playback screen.

Manual Exposure Mode

Available Shutter Speed (Sec.)

When the mechanical shutter is used [B] (Bulb), 60 to 1/4000

When the Electronic Front Curtain is used [B] (Bulb), 60 to 1/2000

When the electronic shutter is used 1 to 1/16000

The exposure is adequate.

Set to faster shutter speed or larger aperture value.

Set to slower shutter speed or smaller aperture value.

• When using a lens having an aperture ring, set the position of the aperture ring to [A] to

activate the front/rear dial settings. At positions other than [A], the ring setting takes priority.

• When the flash is activated, the fastest shutter speed that can be selected is 1/200 of a second. (P162)

3030

5.6

000

−

3. Recording Modes

Recording Mode:

If you set the shutter speed to [B] (Bulb) during manual mode, the shutter stays open while

the shutter button is pressed and held fully.(Up to approximately 30 minutes)

The shutter closes if you release the shutter button.

Use this when you want to keep the shutter open for a long time to take pictures of

fireworks, a night scene etc.

Bulb recording

• We recommend using a tripod or the shutter remote control (DMW-RS2: optional) when

you take pictures with the shutter speed set to [B].

• When you take pictures with the shutter speed set to [B], noise may become visible. To

avoid picture noise, we recommend setting [Long Shtr NR] in the [Rec] menu to [ON]

before taking pictures.

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following cases:

– When recording using the flash (only when [Flash Synchro] is set to [2ND])

– When recording 4K photos

– When recording with the Post Focus function

– When recording with the Bracket function

– When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON]

– When using the electronic shutter

– When [HDR] is set to [ON]

– When using [Time Lapse Shot]

– When using [Stop Motion Animation] (only when [Auto Shooting] is set)

3. Recording Modes

Recording Mode:

The camera records images at set exposure time intervals, and combines parts with

changes in bright light to save the result as one picture.

A combined image is displayed at each exposure time interval, so you can keep recording

while checking results.

With its ability to take pictures with reduced overall brightness, this function is useful for

capturing the light trails of stars and fireworks with bright night scenery in the background.

1 Set the mode dial to [ ].

2 Rotate the rear dial to set the shutter speed to [LC].

3 Select the menu.

• After switching the shutter speed to [LC], pressing [MENU/SET] will

display the menu with [Live View Composite] selected. (It displays in

this state only once after switching the shutter speed to [LC].)

4 Select the exposure time per frame (shutter speed).

• This can be set in a range of [1/2 SEC] to [60 SEC].

• Press the shutter button halfway to return to the recording screen.

5 Press the shutter button fully to obtain an image with reduced noise.

• A countdown screen is displayed. Wait until this step completes.

6 Press the shutter button fully to start recording.

• Images are combined every time the exposure time set in step 4 has passed.

7 Press the shutter button fully again to stop recording.

• This will run noise reduction and save the image.

• Live View Composite can record up to 3 hours per recording.

(Recording stops automatically when the recording time exceeds 3 hours.)

∫ Screen indications during recording

A Histogram display

• After following step

5, this is displayed automatically.

B Exposure time per frame k Number of pictures combined

C Elapsed time

• The time is updated with each increase in the number of

pictures combined.

Live View Composite Recording

> [Rec] > [Live View Composite]

• We recommend using a tripod or the Shutter Remote Control (DMW-RS2: optional) for

Live View Composite recording.

• We recommend that you use a sufficiently charged battery or an AC adaptor (optional)

and DC coupler (optional).

sec. x 1200

5 sec. x 1200

1h40m00s



3. Recording Modes

• [Long Shtr NR] is fixed to [ON].

• After an image for noise reduction is obtained, some menus are not displayed.

• The image for noise reduction will be discarded if the following operations are performed.

Follow step

5 again.

– Setting [Live View Composite]

– Changing the ISO sensitivity

– Switching to Playback Mode

– Starting motion picture recording

– Changing the Recording Mode

– Changing the drive mode

• When the shutter button is pressed fully to stop recording, the last image will not be included

in the combined image.

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following cases:

– When recording using the flash (only when [Flash Synchro] is set to [2ND])

– When recording in Burst Mode

– When recording 4K photos

– When recording with the Post Focus function

– When recording with the Bracket function

– When using [Filter Settings]

– When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON]

– When [Shutter Type] is set to [ESHTR]

– When [HDR] is set to [ON]

– When using [Time Lapse Shot]

– When using [Stop Motion Animation]

– When using [Multi Exp.]

3. Recording Modes

Applicable modes:

• Confirm the effects of aperture: You can check the depth of field (effective focus range)

before taking a picture by closing the diaphragm blades to the aperture value you set.

• Confirm the effects of shutter speed: Movement can be confirmed by displaying the actual

picture that will be taken with that shutter speed.

Touch [Fn5] to switch between different effect preview

screens.

• [Preview] is assigned to [Fn5] by default. (P60)

Depth of field properties

¢1 Recording conditions

¢2 Example: When you want to take a picture with a blurred background etc.

¢3 Example: When you want to take a picture with everything in focus including the background

etc.

Preview Mode

Normal recording screen

Aperture effect preview

screen

Aperture effect: On

Shutter speed effect: Off

Shutter speed effect

preview screen

Aperture effect: On

Shutter speed effect: On

¢1

Aperture value Small Large

Focus length Tele Wide

Distance to the subject Near Distant

Depth of field (effective focus range) Shallow (Narrow)

¢2

Deep (Wide)

¢3

• It is possible to record while in Preview Mode.

• Range for shutter speed effect check is 8 seconds to 1/16000 of a second.

Not available in these cases:

• Preview Mode is not available when recording with [4K Pre-Burst].

Fn5Fn5Fn5

Fn4Fn4Fn4

Fn6Fn6Fn6

Fn8Fn8Fn8

Fn7Fn7Fn7

6KWU6SHHG(IIHFW2Q

Fn5

([LW3UHYLHZ

Fn5

3. Recording Modes

Applicable modes:

When the exposure setting is too bright or too dark, you can use one push AE to achieve a

suitable exposure setting.

1 Set a Fn button to [One Push AE]. (P60)

2 (When exposure is not adequate)

Press Fn button.

• The aperture and shutter speed change to the settings adjusted for the correct exposure.

• In the following cases, suitable exposure cannot be set.

– When the subject is extremely dark and it is not possible to achieve adequate exposure

by changing the aperture value or shutter speed

– When recording using the flash

– In Preview Mode

– When using a lens that includes an aperture ring

One Push AE

How to tell if the exposure is not adequate

• If the aperture values and shutter speed blink red when the shutter button is pressed

halfway.

• If the Manual Exposure Assistance (P74) is anything other than when in Manual

Exposure mode.

Blink red

The exposure is changed to give a

suitable exposure.

800080008000

3.53.5

3.5

989898

6060

3.5

3. Recording Modes

Custom Mode

Recording Mode:

Up to 4 sets of current camera settings can be registered using [Cust.Set Mem.].

(, , , )

Initial setting of the Programme AE Mode is registered as the custom settings initially.

Preparation:

Set to recording mode and menu settings of the state you wish to save.

• You can register up to three custom sets to [ ] of the mode dial.

• The following menu items are not registered as custom settings.

Registering custom settings

> [Setup] > [Cust.Set Mem.] >

Custom set where you want to register settings

[Custom] menu [Setup] menu

– [Menu Guide]

– Data registered with [Face Recog.]

– The [Profile Setup] setting

– All menus

[Playback] menu

– All menus

3. Recording Modes

Set the mode dial to [ ] or [ ].

• If you set the mode dial to [ ], the last used custom set will be called up.

∫ To change a custom set in [ ] ([Custom Mode] menu)

1 Set the mode dial to [ ].

2 Select the menu.

3 Press 3/4 to select the custom setting you want to use, and then press [MENU/

SET].

• The settings are switched to those settings you selected for the

custom set.

∫ Changing the registered content

Registered contents do not change when the menu setting is changed temporarily with the

mode dial set to [ ] or [ ]. To change the registered settings, overwrite the registered

content using [Cust.Set Mem.] on the [Setup] menu.

Using Custom Mode

> [Custom Mode]

It is also possible to display the selection screen by touching the

Recording Mode icon in recording screen.

C2-1C2-1C2-1

C2-1

C2 -1

C2-1

3. Recording Modes

Scene Guide Mode

Recording Mode:

If you select a scene to suit the subject and recording conditions with reference to the

example images, the camera will set optimal exposure, colour, and focus, allowing you to

record in a manner appropriate to the scene.

Set the mode dial to [ ].

Press 2/1 to select the scene.

• The scene can also be selected by dragging an example

image or the slide bar.

Press [MENU/SET].

It is also possible to display the selection screen by touching the

Recording Mode icon in recording screen.

• Depending on the scene, the recording screen may seem as if frames are missed.

• To change the Scene Guide Mode, select [Scene Switch] in the Scene Guide Menu. This will

return you to step

2 above.

• Some items in the [Rec] menu are not available in Scene Guide Mode as the camera

automatically makes optimisation adjustments.

• Although White Balance is fixed to [AWB] for certain types of scene, you can fine tune the

White Balance (P117) or use White Balance bracketing (P147) by pressing [ ] button on

the recording screen.

3. Recording Modes

Displaying the description of each scene and recording tips

Press [DISP.] while the scene selection screen is displayed.

• When it is set to the guide display, detailed explanations and tips for each scene are displayed.

Types of Scene Guide Mode

Normal display Guide display List display

[Clear Portrait] [Silky Skin]

• The smoothing effect is

applied to the part that has a

similar tone to the complexion

of a subject, as well.

• This mode may not be

effective under insufficient

lighting.

[Backlit Softness] [Clear in Backlight]

[Relaxing Tone] [Sweet Child's Face]

Touch the face.

• A still picture is recorded with

the focus and exposure set for

the touched location.

[Distinct Scenery] [Bright Blue Sky]

[Romantic Sunset Glow] [Vivid Sunset Glow]

3. Recording Modes

[Glistening Water]

• Star filter used in this mode

may cause glistening effects

on the objects other than

water surface.

[Clear Nightscape]

[Cool Night Sky] [Warm Glowing

Nightscape]

[Artistic Nightscape] [Glittering Illuminations]

[Handheld Night Shot]

• Do not move the unit during

the continuous shooting after

pressing the shutter button.

• The angle of view will be

slightly narrower.

[Clear Night Portrait]

• We recommend using a tripod

and the self-timer.

• When [Clear Night Portrait] is

selected, keep the subject still

for about 1 second after taking

the picture.

[Soft Image of a Flower]

• For close-up recording, we

recommend that you do not

use the flash.

[Appetizing Food]

• For close-up recording, we

recommend that you do not

use the flash.

[Cute Dessert]

• For close-up recording, we

recommend that you do not

use the flash.

[Freeze Animal Motion]

• The initial setting for the AF

assist lamp is [OFF].

[Clear Sports Shot] [Monochrome]

[Panorama Shot]

3. Recording Modes

Consecutive photos taken while the camera is moved are combined to form a panorama.

Preparation: Set the Scene Guide Mode to [Panorama Shot].

1 Press the shutter button halfway to focus.

2 Press the shutter button fully and move the camera in a small circle in the

direction of the arrow on the screen.

3 Press the shutter button once again to end the picture recording.

• Recording can also be ended by keeping the camera still while recording.

• Recording can also be ended by moving the camera to the end of the guide.

∫ Changing panorama picture settings

• The number of recording pixels in the horizontal and vertical directions of the panorama picture

varies depending on the image size, the recording direction and the number of combined

pictures.

The maximum number of pixels is shown below.

[Panorama Shot]

Recording from left to right

Image size: [STANDARD] Image size: [WIDE] A Recording direction and

panning (Guide)

B Horizontal/vertical guide

• Move the camera at a constant speed.

Pictures may not be able to be recorded properly if the

camera is moved too fast or slow.

> [Rec] > [Panorama Settings]

[Direction]

Sets the recording direction.

[]/[]/[]/[]

[Picture Size]

Sets the angle of view (image size).

[STANDARD]/[WIDE]

Image size Recording direction

Horizontal

Resolution

Vertical Resolution

[STANDARD]

Horizontal 8176 pixels 1920 pixels

Vertical 2560 pixels 7680 pixels

[WIDE]

Horizontal 8176 pixels 960 pixels

Vertical 1280 pixels 7680 pixels

3. Recording Modes

∫ Technique for Panorama Shot Mode

∫ About playback

Pressing 3 will start scrolling playback automatically in the

same direction as the recording.

• The following operations can be performed during scrolling

playback.

¢ When the playback is paused, you can scroll forwards and backwards by dragging the

screen.

When the scroll bar is touched, the playback position jumps to the touched position.

A Move the camera in the recording direction

without shaking it.

(If the camera shakes too much, pictures

may not be recorded, or the created

panorama picture may become narrower

(smaller).)

B Move the camera towards the edge of the

range you wish to record.

(However, the last frame is not recorded to

the end.)

3 Start panorama playback/Pause

4 Stop

• When the focal length is long, such as when a telephoto lens is attached, move the camera

slowly.

• The focus, White Balance, and exposure are fixed at the optimum values for the first picture.

As a result, if the focus or brightness changes substantially during recording, the entire

panorama picture may not be recorded at the suitable focus or brightness.

• When multiple pictures are combined to create a single panorama picture, the subject may

appear distorted or the connection points may be noticeable in some cases.

Not available in these cases:

• A panorama picture may not be able to be created, or the pictures may not be combined

properly when recording the following subjects or under the recording conditions below.

– Subjects with a single, uniform colour or repetitive pattern (such as the sky or a beach)

– Moving subjects (person, pet, car, waves, flowers blowing in the breeze, etc.)

– Subjects where the colour or patterns change in a short time (such as an image appearing

on a display)

– Dark places

– Locations with flickering light sources such as fluorescent lights or candles

1/981/98

1/98

3. Recording Modes

Creative Control Mode

Recording Mode:

You can set the effects to add by selecting example images and checking them on the

screen.

Set the mode dial to [ ].

Press 3/4 to select the image effects

(filters).

A Preview display

• You can also select the image effects (filters) by touching

the example images.

Press [MENU/SET].

Displaying the description of each image effect

Press [DISP.] while the image effect selection screen is displayed.

• When it is set to the guide display, explanations for each picture effect are displayed.

• It is also possible to display the

selection screen by touching the

Recording Mode icon in recording

screen.

Normal display Guide display List display

• White Balance will be fixed to [AWB], and [Sensitivity] will be fixed to [AUTO].

• Depending on the image effect, the recording screen may seem as if frames are missed.

1/8

EXPS

1/8

3. Recording Modes

∫ [Creative Control] menu

The menus below are available in Creative Control Mode.

> [Creative Control]

[Filter Effect] Displays the image effect (filter) selection screen.

[Simultaneous

Record w/o Filter]

Allows you to set the camera to take a picture with and without an image

effect simultaneously.

Types of image effects

[Expressive] [Retro] [Old Days]

[High Key] [Low Key] [Sepia]

[Monochrome] [Dynamic

Monochrome]

[Rough

Monochrome]

[Silky

Monochrome]

[Impressive Art] [High Dynamic]

[Cross Process] [Toy Effect] [Toy Pop]

[Bleach Bypass] [Miniature Effect] [Soft Focus]

[Fantasy] [Star Filter] [One Point Color]

[Sunshine]

3. Recording Modes

∫ Setting the type of defocus ([Miniature Effect])

1 Press 3 to display the setting screen.

• Setting screen can also be displayed by touching in order of [ ] then [ ].

2 Press 3/4 or 2/1 to move the in-focus portion.

• You can also move the in-focus portion by touching the

screen on the recording screen.

• To set the recording orientation (defocus orientation),

touch [ ].

3 Rotate the rear dial to change the size of in-focus

portion.

• The portion can also be enlarged/reduced by pinching out/

pinching in the screen.

• To reset the in-focus portion setting to the default, press [DISP.].

4 Press [MENU/SET] to set.

∫ Set the colour to leave in ([One Point Color])

1 Press 3 to display the setting screen.

• Setting screen can also be displayed by touching in order of [ ] then [ ].

2 Select the colour you want to leave by moving the

frame with 3/4/2/1.

• You can also select the colour you want to leave by

touching the screen.

• To return the frame back to the centre, press [DISP.].

3 Press [MENU/SET] to set.

• No sound is recorded in motion pictures.

• Approximately 1/8 of the time period is recorded.

(If you record for 8 minutes, the resulting motion picture recording will be approximately

1 minute long.)

The displayed available recording time is approximately 8 times.

Depending on the recording frame rate of the motion picture, the recording time of the motion

picture and the available recording time may differ from the values above.

• If you end motion picture recording after a short time, the camera may go on recording for a

certain period.

• Depending on the subject, the set colour may not be left in.

3. Recording Modes

∫ Setting the position and size of the light source ([Sunshine])

1 Press 3 to display the setting screen.

• Setting screen can also be displayed by touching in order of [ ] then [ ].

2 Press 3/4/2/1 to move the centre position of the light source.

• The position of the light source can also be moved by touching the screen.

3 Adjust the size of the light source by rotating the rear dial.

• The display can also be enlarged/reduced by pinching out/pinching in.

• To reset the light source setting to the default, press [DISP.].

4 Press [MENU/SET] to set.

1 Press [ ].

2 Rotate the rear dial to set.

• To return to the recording screen, press [ ] again.

Point for when placing the centre of the light

source

A more natural appearance can be created by placing

the centre of the light source outside the image.

Adjust the effect to fit your preferences

Image effect Items that can be set

[Expressive] Freshness Understated colours Pop colours

[Retro] Colour Yellowish tinge Reddish tinge

[Old Days] Contrast Low contrast High contrast

[High Key] Colour Pinkish tinge Aquamarinish tinge

[Low Key] Colour Reddish tinge Bluish tinge

[Sepia] Contrast Low contrast High contrast

3. Recording Modes

Image effect Items that can be set

[Monochrome] Colour Yellowish tinge Bluish tinge

[Dynamic

Monochrome]

Contrast Low contrast High contrast

[Rough

Monochrome]

Grittiness Less gritty Grittier

[Silky

Monochrome]

Extent of defocus Weak defocus Strong defocus

[Impressive Art] Freshness Black and white Pop colours

[High Dynamic] Freshness Black and white Pop colours

[Cross Process] Colour

Greenish tinge/Bluish tinge/Yellowish tinge/

Reddish tinge

[Toy Effect] Colour Orangish tinge Bluish tinge

[Toy Pop]

Area with reduced

peripheral brightness

Small Large

[Bleach Bypass] Contrast Low contrast High contrast

[Miniature Effect] Freshness Understated colours Pop colours

[Soft Focus] Extent of defocus Weak defocus Strong defocus

[Fantasy] Freshness Understated colours Pop colours

[Star Filter]

Length of the rays of light

Short Long

Number of the rays of light

Smaller Larger

Angle of the rays of light

Rotate to the left Rotate to the right

[One Point Color] Amount of colour left

Small amount of

colour

Large amount of

colour

[Sunshine] Colour

Yellowish tinge/Reddish tinge/

Bluish tinge/Whitish tinge

3. Recording Modes

1 Press [ ] to display the brightness setting screen.

2 Press the Fn button (Fn1) to display the setting

screen.

3 Rotate the rear dial to set.

• To return to the recording screen, press [MENU/SET].

• To cancel the setting, press [Fn2] on the blurriness setting

screen.

1 Press [ ].

2 Rotate the rear dial to set.

• In the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu, [Exposure Comp.

Disp. Setting], you can change the functions to be set on

the exposure compensation screen. (P46)

• To return to the recording screen, press [ ] again.

∫ Change the settings by using the touch screen

1 Touch [ ].

2 Touch the item you want to set.

[ ]: Adjusts an image effect

[ ]: Defocus level

[ ]: Brightness

3 Drag the slide bar to set.

• To return to the recording screen, press [MENU/SET].

Taking a picture with a blurred background (Defocus Control)

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following case:

– [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)

Setting brightness

500 250 125 60 30

4.0 5.6 8.0

+3+3+1+1 +2+2 +3+3

100

+5+5+4+4

EXPS

4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and

Colour tone Settings

Using AF

AF (Auto Focus) refers to automatic focusing.

Select the focus mode and the AF mode appropriate for the subject and scene.

Set the focus mode lever to [AFS/AFF] or

[AFC].

• The Focus Mode will be set. (P95)

Press [ ] (2).

Press 2/1 to select AF Mode and then press

[MENU/SET].

• The AF Mode will be set. (P97)

Press the shutter button halfway.

• AF will be activated.

• The focus indication is displayed as [ ] in a dark environment, and focusing may take

longer than usual.

• If the camera detects stars in the night sky after displaying [ ], Starlight AF will be

activated. When focus is achieved, the focus indication [ ] and AF areas in focus are

displayed. (Starlight AF cannot perform detection on the edges of the screen.)

Focus

When the subject is

focused

When the subject is not

focused

Focus indication A On Blinks

AF area B Green —

Sound Beeps 2 times —

LOW

STAR

4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings

• If you zoom in/out after focusing on a subject, the focus may lose its accuracy. In that case,

re-adjust the focus.

Subjects and recording conditions which are difficult to focus

• Fast-moving subjects, extremely bright subjects or subjects without contrast.

• When recording subjects through windows or near shiny objects.

• When it is dark or when jitter occurs.

• When the camera is too close to the subject or when taking a picture of both distant and near

subjects.

How to adjust the composition while pressing the shutter button halfway

When recording with [Ø], follow the steps below if the subject is not in the centre of the

composition of the picture you want to take. (When the focus mode is set to [AFS])

1 Aim the AF area over the subject.

2 Press the shutter button halfway.

• This will lock the focus and exposure.

3 While continuing to press and hold the shutter button halfway, move the camera to

compose the picture you want to take.

4 Press the shutter button to take the picture.

4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings

Applicable modes:

The method for achieving focus when the shutter button is

pressed halfway is set.

Set the focus mode lever.

Setting the Focus Mode (AFS/AFF/AFC)

Item Recommended recording scenes

[AFS/

AFF]

[AFS]

Subject is still

(Scenery,

anniversary

photograph, etc.)

“AFS” is an abbreviation of “Auto Focus Single”.

The focus stays locked while the shutter button is

pressed halfway, so you can perform recording while

changing the composition.

[AFF]

Movement cannot

be predicted

(Children, pets,

etc.)

“AFF” is an abbreviation of “Auto Focus Flexible”.

If the subject moves while the shutter button is pressed

halfway, the focus is readjusted automatically

according to the movement of the subject.

You can set the menu to change the setting.

> [Rec]/ [Motion Picture] > [AFS/AFF]

Settings: [AFS]/[AFF]

[AFC]

Subject is moving

(Sport, trains, etc.)

“AFC” is an abbreviation of “Auto Focus Continuous”.

In this mode, while the shutter button is pressed

halfway, focusing is constantly performed to match the

movement of the subject.

When recording using [AFF], [AFC]

• This predicts the movement of the subject, maintaining focusing. (Movement prediction)

• It may take time to focus on the subject when you operate the zoom from Wide to Tele or

suddenly change the subject from a distant one to a nearby one.

• Press the shutter button halfway again when it is difficult to focus on the subject.

• While the shutter button is pressed and held halfway, shake may be seen on the screen.

4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings

Applicable modes:

Sets the sensitivity to be applied when adjusting the focus according to the movement of

the subject.

Preparation:

The focus mode is set to [AFF] or [AFC]. (P95)

Settings: [i2], [i1], [w0], [j1], [j2]

• Focus Mode settings of [AFF] and [AFC] work in the same manner as [AFS] in the following

situations:

– Creative Video Mode

– When recording with [4K Burst(S/S)]

– In low light situations

• The setting is fixed to [AFS] when the Scene Guide Mode is set to [Panorama Shot].

• [AFF] is not available when recording 4K photos. [Continuous AF] works during recording.

• The Focus Mode setting cannot be changed when recording is performed with the Post Focus

function.

[AF Sensitivity(Photo)]

> [Rec] > [AF Sensitivity(Photo)]

When the distance to the subject changes drastically, the camera re-adjusts the focus

immediately. You can bring different subjects into focus one after another.

When the distance to the subject changes drastically, the camera waits for a short period

of time before re-adjusting the focus. This allows you to prevent the focus from being

accidentally re-adjusted when, for example, an object moves across the image.

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following cases:

– [Panorama Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

– When recording 4K photos

– When recording with the Post Focus function

4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings

Selecting the AF Mode

Applicable modes:

This allows the focusing method that suits the positions and

number of the subjects to be selected.

Press [ ] (2).

Press 2/1 to select the AF mode and then

press [MENU/SET].

([Face/Eye

Detection])

The camera automatically detects the faces and

eyes of subjects. The camera adjusts the focus on

the eye that is closer to the camera and the

exposure using the face (when [Metering Mode] is

set to [ ]). (P98)

([Tracking])

The camera keeps adjusting the focus and

exposure automatically to the specified moving

object. (Dynamic Tracking)

(When [Metering Mode] is set to [ ]) (P98)

([49-Area])

Up to 49 AF areas can be focused.

This is effective when a subject is not in the centre

of the screen.

, etc.

([Custom Multi])

From among 49 AF areas, you can freely set the

optimum shape of the AF area for the subject. (P99)

([1-Area])

The camera focuses on the subject in the AF area

on the screen.

([Pinpoint])

You can achieve a more precise focus on a point

that is smaller than [Ø].

If you press the shutter button halfway, the screen

that lets you check the focus will be enlarged.

• In Intelligent Auto Mode and Intelligent Auto Plus Mode, you can switch to either [š] or [ ].

4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings

When the camera detects faces, AF areas are displayed and

the eye to be brought into focus are indicated.

A: Eye used for focusing

∫ Changing the eye to be brought into focus

Touch the eye to be brought into focus.

• Touching [ ] or pressing [MENU/SET] will cancel the setting

of the eye that has been brought into focus.

Aim the AF Tracking area B over the subject and

then press the shutter button halfway.

• The AF area turns green when the subject is detected.

• The AF area turns yellow when you release the shutter button.

• Press [MENU/SET] to clear the lock.

Touch the subject.

• Perform this operation with the Touch Shutter function

cancelled.

• The AF Tracking area turns yellow while the subject is locked.

• Touch [ ] to clear the lock.

About [š] ([Face/Eye Detection])

Yellow: The colour changes to green when the shutter button

is pressed halfway and focus is achieved.

White: This is displayed when more than one face is

detected. Faces that are at the same distance as the

face inside the yellow AF area will be brought into

focus.

• The camera can detect the faces of up to 15 people.

Only the eyes of the face to be brought into focus can be detected.

Locking the subject to be tracked ([ ] ([Tracking]))

Button operation

Touch operation

• The AF Tracking area will blink in red and then disappear if the lock fails.

4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings

1 Press [ ] (2).

2 Select a Custom Multi icon ([ ], etc.), and press 3.

3 Press 2/1 to select a setting and then press 4.

A The current shape of the AF area

• The AF area setting screen is displayed.

4 Select AF areas.

B The selected AF areas

When selecting [ ]/[ ]/[ ]

1 Change the shape of an AF area.

2 Press [MENU/SET] to set.

Setting the shape of the AF area ([Custom Multi])

([Horizontal

Pattern])

This shape is

convenient for taking

panning shots or

similar shots.

([Vertical

Pattern])

This shape is

convenient for

recording objects,

such as buildings.

([Central

Pattern])

This shape is

convenient when you

want to bring the

centre area into focus.

([Custom1]/

[Custom2]/

[Custom3])

You can select a customised setting.

Button operation

Touch

operation

Description of

operation

3/4/2/1 Touching Moves the position

Pinching

out/in

Changes the size

[DISP.] [Reset]

First time:

The position is reset to

the centre

Second time:

The size is reset to the

default

ヤピヤビヤヒ

ヤヒ

ヤビ

ヤピ

4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings

100

When selecting [ ]/[ ]/[ ]

1 Change the shape of an AF area.

Press 3/4/2/1 to select the AF area, and then press

[MENU/SET] to set (repeat).

• The setting is cancelled when [MENU/SET] is pressed

again.

• To cancel all selections, press [DISP.].

Touch or drag to select AF areas.

• To cancel the selection of a particular AF area, touch the area again.

2 Press the Fn button (Fn1) to set.

∫ Registering the set AF area to [ ], [ ] or [ ]

1 On the screen in step

3 on P99, press 3.

2 Press 3/4 to select a destination to which the setting will be registered, and press

[MENU/SET].

Button operation

Touch operation

• Turning off this unit will return the setting adjusted with [ ]/[ ]/[ ] back to the default

setting.

ヤヒ

ヤビ

ヤピ

ヤヒヤビ

ヤピ

101

4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings

• The AF Mode is fixed to [Ø] in the following cases.

– When using the Digital Zoom

– [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)

• The AF Mode is fixed to [š] when [4K Live Cropping] is set.

• It cannot be set the AF Mode in the following cases.

– When recording with the Post Focus function

– When [Pull Focus] in [Snap Movie] is set to [ON]

([Face/Eye Detection])

•[š] is not available in the following cases.

– [Clear Nightscape]/[Cool Night Sky]/[Warm Glowing Nightscape]/[Artistic Nightscape]/

[Glittering Illuminations]/[Handheld Night Shot]/[Appetizing Food]/[Cute Dessert] (Scene

Guide Mode)

• You cannot change the eye to bring into focus when [4K Live Cropping] is set.

• The camera may not detect faces in certain situations, such as when the subjects are moving

fast. In such situations, the camera performs the operation of [].

([Tracking])

• In situations where AF Tracking does not work correctly due to certain recording conditions,

such as when the subject is small or the location is dark, the operation of [Ø] is performed.

• [ ] is not available in the following cases.

– When using [Time Lapse Shot]

– When recording with Live View Composite

• In the following cases, [ ] operates as [Ø].

– [Glistening Water]/[Glittering Illuminations]/[Soft Image of a Flower]/[Monochrome] (Scene

Guide Mode)

– [Sepia]/[Monochrome]/[Dynamic Monochrome]/[Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/

[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/[Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)

– [Monochrome]/[L.Monochrome]/[L.Monochrome D] ([Photo Style])

([Pinpoint])

• In the following case, [ ] operates as [Ø].

– When recording motion pictures

– When recording 4K photos

• [ ] is not available in the following cases.

– [AFF]/[AFC] (Focus Mode)

Restrictions on AF Mode

4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings

102

Applicable modes:

When [š], [ ], [Ø] or [ ] in AF Mode is selected, you can change the position and

size of the AF area. With [ ], you can set the lock-on position.

• Set the touch function to [ ] (Touch AF). (P53)

• You can also display the AF area setting screen by touching the recording screen.

• You can use the [Custom] ([Focus / Release Shutter]) menu to set the display method for the

AF area according to your preference. (P213)

1 Press [ ] (2).

2 Select [š], [ ] or [Ø] and press 4.

• The AF area setting screen appears.

3 Change the position and size of the AF area.

¢ This operation is not available for [ ].

4 Press [MENU/SET] to set.

• If you have selected [š], an AF area with the same function as [Ø] will be set in the set

position.

Setting of the AF area is cleared when [MENU/SET] is pressed or [ ] is touched.

AF area movement operation

> [Custom] > [Operation] > [Touch Settings] > [Touch AF] >

[AF]

• The spot metering target can also be moved to match the AF area when the [Metering Mode]

is set to [ ].

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following cases:

– When using the Digital Zoom

– When [4K Live Cropping] is set

When selecting [š], [ ], [Ø]

Button

operation

Touch

operation

Description of operation

3/4/2/1 Touching Moves the position

Pinching out/in Changes the size (in small steps)

/ s Changes the size

[DISP.] [Reset]

First time: The position is reset to the centre

Second time: The size is reset to the default

103

4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings

When selecting [ ]

You can set the focus position by selecting an AF area group. The AF area, which is

configured with 49 points, is divided into groups consisting of 9 points each (6 points or

4 points for the groups located at the edges of the screen).

1 Press [ ] (2).

2 Select [ ] and press 4.

• The AF area setting screen appears.

3 Press 3/4/2/1 to select an AF area group.

4 Press [MENU/SET] to set.

• Setting of the AF area is cleared when [MENU/SET] is

pressed or [ ] is touched.

Examples of group

4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings

104

You can set the focus position precisely by enlarging the screen.

1 Press [ ] (2).

2 Select [ ] and press 4.

3 Press 3/4/2/1 to set the focus position and then

press [MENU/SET].

• The enlarged display appears.

4 Move [+] to the position to be in focus.

• When the picture is displayed in windowed mode, you can enlarge the picture by

approximately 3k to 6k; when the picture is displayed in full screen, you can enlarge the

picture by approximately 3k to 20k.

• You can also take pictures by touching [ ].

5 Press [MENU/SET] to set.

When selecting [ ]

Button

operation

Touch operation Description of operation

3/4/2/1 Touching Moves [+].

Pinching out/in Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.

s Enlarges/reduces the screen.

Switches the enlarged display (windowed/full screen).

[DISP.] [Reset] Returns you to the screen in step 3.

• You cannot set the position to be in focus at the edges of the screen.

105

4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings

Applicable modes:

You can move the AF area displayed on the viewfinder by

touching the monitor.

• Press the shutter button halfway to determine the focus position.

To return the focus position to the centre, press [DISP.] before determining the position. Press it

again to reset the size to the initial setting.

• To cancel the AF area setting when [š], [ ] or [ ] is selected, press [MENU/SET].

Specifying the AF area position with the Touch Pad

> [Custom] > [Operation] > [Touch Settings] > [Touch Pad AF]

[EXACT]

Moves the AF area of the

Viewfinder by touching a

desired position on the Touch

Pad.

[OFFSET1] -

[OFFSET7]

Moves the AF area of the

viewfinder according to the

distance you drag the touch

pad.

Operation area can be

selected from 7 areas.

Settings:

[OFFSET1] (all areas)

[OFFSET2] (right half)

[OFFSET3] (upper right)

[OFFSET4] (lower right)

[OFFSET5] (left half)

[OFFSET6] (upper left)

[OFFSET7] (lower left)

Example: When set to [OFFSET1]

[OFF] —

• [Touch Pad AF] is not available in the following cases:

– When [4K Live Cropping] is set

– When [Pull Focus] in [Snap Movie] is set to [ON]

4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings

106

Applicable modes:

1 Touch the subject you want to optimise the

brightness for.

• The AF area with the same function as [Ø] is displayed

on the touched position. (P102)

• The brightness optimisation position is displayed on the

centre of the AF area. The position follows the movement

of the AF area.

• [Metering Mode] is set to [ ], which is used exclusively

for the Touch AE.

2 Touch [Set].

• To cancel the focus and brightness set with [AF+AE], touch [ ] ([ ] when [Ø] is

selected).

Adjusting focus and brightness for the touched position

> [Custom] > [Operation] > [Touch Settings] > [Touch AF] >

[AF+AE]

When the background has become too bright, etc.,

the brightness contrast with the background can be

adjusted by compensating the exposure.

• When recording with the Touch Shutter, the focus and brightness are optimised for the

touched position before recording takes place.

• At the edge of the screen, the metering may be affected by the brightness around the touched

location.

Not available in these cases:

• The [AF+AE] does not function in the following case:

– When using the Digital Zoom

– When [4K Live Cropping] is set

ュリヴヱハ

5HVHW

6HW

107

4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings

Record Using MF

Applicable modes:

MF (Manual Focus) refers to manual focusing.

Use this function when you want to fix the focus or when the distance between the lens

and the subject is determined and you do not want to activate AF.

Set the focus mode lever to [MF].

Press [ ] (2).

Press 3/4/2/1 to adjust the focus position, and press [MENU/SET].

• The assist screen is displayed, enlarging the area.

(MF Assist)

• You can also adjust the focus position by dragging the

screen.

• You can also enlarge the area by performing one of the

following operations:

– Rotating the focus ring

– Moving the focus lever

– Pinching out or touching the screen twice

Adjust the focus.

The operations used to focus manually differ depending on the lens.

When using an interchangeable lens with a focus ring

Rotate to A side:

Focuses on nearby subject

Rotate to B side:

Focuses on distant subjects

When using the interchangeable lens having a focus lever

Move to C side:

Focuses on nearby subject

Move to D side:

Focuses on distant subjects

• The focusing speed varies depending on how far you move the

focus lever.

4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings

108

B MF Assist (enlarged screen)

C Peaking

D MF Guide

• In-focus portions are highlighted with colour. (Peaking)

• You can check whether the point of focus is to the near

side or to the far side. (MF Guide)

You can perform the following operations:

¢1 When using an interchangeable lens with no focus ring, you can perform these

operations after pressing

4 to display the screen that lets you set the area to be

enlarged.

¢2 Not available in Intelligent Auto Mode.

• When the picture is displayed in windowed mode, you can enlarge the picture by

approximately 3k to 6k; when the picture is displayed in full screen, you can enlarge

the picture by approximately 3k to 20k.

When using an interchangeable lens with no focus ring

Press 1: Focuses on nearby subject

Press 2: Focuses on distant subjects

A Slide bar

• Pressing and holding 2/1 will increase the

focus speed.

• Focus can also be adjusted by dragging the slide

bar.

Button operation Touch operation Description of operation

3/4/2/1

¢1

Dragging Moves the enlarged area.

Pinching out/in Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.

s Enlarges/reduces the screen.

¢2 ¢2

Switches the enlarged display (windowed/full

screen).

[DISP.]

¢1

[Reset]

¢1

First time:

The position of the enlarged area is reset to the

centre.

Second time:

The size is reset to the default.

109

4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings

Press the shutter button halfway.

• You can also perform the same operation by pressing [MENU/SET].

• If you have enlarged the picture by rotating the focus ring or moving the focus lever, the

assist screen will close approximately 10 seconds after the operation.

Achieving focus quickly using AF

Touching [ ].

• AF works at the centre of the frame.

• AF also works with the following operations.

– Pressing the [AF/AE LOCK] to which [AF-ON] is assigned

(P110)

– Pressing the Fn button to which [AF-ON] is assigned (P60)

– Dragging the monitor and releasing your finger at the position

you want to focus on

• This function is not available when [4K Live Cropping] is set.

• MF Assist and MF Guide may not display depending on the lens used. To display MF Assist,

use the touch screen or buttons to operate the camera directly.

• If [Focus Switching for Vert / Hor] in the [Custom] ([Focus / Release Shutter]) menu is

enabled, you can store the position of the enlarged MF Assist display for each orientation of

the camera.

• The focus distance reference mark A is a mark used to measure

the focus distance.

Use this when taking pictures with MF or taking close-up pictures.

4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings

110

Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock)

Applicable modes:

Lock the focus and exposure in advance to take pictures with the same focus and

exposure settings while changing the composition.

This is useful when you want to bring an edge of the screen into focus or there is a

backlight, for example.

Point the camera at the subject.

Press and hold [AF/AE LOCK] to fix the focus

or exposure.

• In default settings, [AE LOCK] will operate to fix the

exposure. [AEL] will be displayed on the screen.

• If you release [AF/AE LOCK], AF/AE Lock is cancelled.

While pressing [AF/AE LOCK], move the camera as you compose the

picture and then press shutter button fully.

∫ Setting the functions of [AF/AE LOCK]

> [Custom] > [Focus / Release Shutter] > [AF/AE Lock]

[AE LOCK]

The exposure is locked.

• [AEL] is displayed.

[AF LOCK]

The focus is locked.

• [AFL] is displayed.

[AF/AE LOCK]

Both focus and exposure are locked.

• [AFL] and [AEL] are displayed.

[AF-ON] AF is performed.

• AF Lock only is effective when taking pictures in Manual Exposure Mode.

• AE Lock only is effective when taking pictures with MF.

• The subject can be focused again by pressing the shutter button halfway even when AE is

locked.

• Programme Shift can be set even when AE is locked.

FHD

MP4

989898

AFLAFL

4:3

AELAELAELAEL

3.5

111

4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings

Exposure Compensation

Applicable modes:

Use this function when you cannot achieve appropriate exposure due to the difference in

brightness between the subject and the background.

Press [ ].

Rotate the front/rear dial or the control dial to

compensate the exposure.

A Exposure Compensation

• In the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu, [Exposure Comp.

Disp. Setting], you can change the functions to be set on

the exposure compensation screen. (P46)

Press [ ] to set.

• You can also press the shutter button halfway to set.

Underexposed Properly exposed Overexposed

Compensate the exposure

towards positive.

Compensate the exposure

towards negative.

+3+3+1+1 +2+2 +3+3

100

+5+5+4+4

4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings

112

• In Manual Exposure Mode, you can compensate the exposure only when the ISO sensitivity is

set to [AUTO].

• You can set the exposure compensation value in the range between j5 EV and

i5 EV.

You can set a value between

j3 EV and i3 EV while recording motion picture or performing

recording with the 4K Photo or Post Focus function.

• When [Auto Exposure Comp.] in [Flash] in the [Rec] menu is set to [ON], the brightness of the

flash will automatically be set to the level appropriate to the selected Exposure Compensation.

• Depending on the brightness, this may not be possible in some cases.

• When the exposure compensation value falls below or exceeds the j3EV to i3 EV range,

the brightness of the recording screen will no longer change. Values outside this range will be

applied to the recording screen when the shutter button is pressed halfway or AE Lock is

performed with [AF/AE LOCK].

• The set Exposure Compensation value is stored even if the camera is turned off. (When

[Exposure Comp. Reset] is set to [OFF])

113

4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings

Setting the ISO Sensitivity

Applicable modes:

This allows the sensitivity to light (ISO sensitivity) to be set.

Press [ ].

Rotate the front/rear dial or the control dial to

select the ISO sensitivity.

• In the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu, [ISO Displayed

Setting], you can change the functions to be set on the

ISO sensitivity screen. (P45)

A ISO sensitivity

¢1 When [ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting] in [ISO Sensitivity (photo)] in the [Rec] menu is set to

[AUTO].

¢2 When [Extended ISO] in the [Custom] ([Exposure]) menu is set to [ON].

Press [ ] to set.

• You can also press the shutter button halfway to set.

AUTO

The ISO sensitivity is automatically adjusted according to the

brightness.

• Maximum [ISO3200]

¢1

(Intelligent ISO)

The camera automatically sets the optimum ISO sensitivity

and shutter speed to suit the movement of the subject and

brightness of the scene to minimise the jitter of the subject.

• Maximum [ISO3200]

¢1

• The shutter speed is not fixed when the shutter button is

pressed halfway. It is continuously changing to match the

movement of the subject until the shutter button is pressed

fully.

L.100

¢2

, from 200 to 25600 The ISO sensitivity is fixed to various settings.

4040

ISO

ISOISOISO

ISOISOISOISOISOISOISO

AUTO

4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings

114

∫ Extended ISO

Applicable modes:

You will be able to set ISO sensitivity down to a minimum of [ISO100].

Characteristics of the ISO sensitivity

200 25600

Recording location

(recommended)

When it is light (outdoors) When it is dark

Shutter speed Slow Fast

Noise Less Increased

Jitter of the subject Increased Less

• For details on the available flash range used when the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO], refer to

P159.

• Cannot select [ ] in the following cases:

– Shutter-Priority AE Mode

– Manual Exposure Mode

• When [Multi Exp.] is set, the maximum setting is [ISO3200].

• If you set [Photo Style] to [V-Log L], the lower limit of the ISO sensitivity will be fixed to

[ISO400].

• When the following functions are being used, the ISO sensitivity that can be set is restricted:

– Creative Video Mode/4K Photo recording/Post-Focus recording:

[AUTO], [200] to [6400] ([L.100] to [6400] if [Extended ISO] is set to [ON])

– Live View Composite recording:

[200] to [1600] ([L.100] to [1600] if [Extended ISO] is set to [ON])

• You can set the ISO sensitivity in Scene Guide Mode only when using [Panorama Shot].

> [Custom] > [Exposure] > [Extended ISO] > [ON]

Not available in these cases:

• [Extended ISO] does not work in the following case:

– When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log L]

– When using [Multi Exp.]

115

4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings

Setting the White Balance (WB)

Applicable modes:

White Balance adjusts the colour of white according to the light source to make the overall

colour hue closer to what is seen by the eye.

Press [ ].

Rotate the front/rear dial or the control dial to

select the White Balance.

¢ [AWB] is applied when you record motion picture or perform recording with the 4K

Photo or Post Focus function.

[AWB] Auto

[AWBc] Auto (Reduces the reddish hue under an incandescent light source)

[AWBw] Auto (Leaves the reddish hue under an incandescent light source)

[V] When taking pictures outdoors under a clear sky

[Ð] When taking pictures outdoors under a cloudy sky

[î] When taking pictures outdoors in the shade

[Ñ] When taking pictures under incandescent lights

[]

When taking pictures with the flash only

WBWBWB

WBWBWBWBWBWBWB

AWBc

AWBw

AWB

4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings

116

Press [ ] to set.

• You can also press the shutter button halfway to set.

[]/[]/

[]/[]

A white object is recorded to set the White Balance.

This is convenient for recording under multiple light

sources.

1 Press

2 Place a white object such as a piece of paper

within the frame at the centre of the screen, and press [MENU/

SET].

• This will set the White Balance and return you to the recording screen.

• White Balance may not be set when the subject is too bright or too dark.

Set the White Balance again after adjusting to appropriate brightness.

[]/[]/

[]/[]

Set the White Balance Colour Temperature to suit

the light source.

1 Press 3.

2 Press 3/4 to select the colour temperature and

then press [MENU/SET].

• You can set a colour temperature from [2500K] to [10000K].

Under fluorescent lighting, LED lighting fixture etc., the appropriate White Balance

will vary depending on the lighting type.

Use [AWB], [AWBc], [AWBw], [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ].

• If you take pictures with the flash outside the available flash range, the correct White Balance

may not be obtained.

• During Scene Guide Mode:

– Settings are adjusted to suit each scene.

– Changing the scene or Recording Mode will return White Balance settings (including the

White Balance fine-adjustment setting) to [AWB].

1 2

5500K5500K5500K

2 3

117

4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Colour tone Settings

∫ Auto White Balance

Depending on the conditions prevailing when pictures are taken, the pictures may take on

a reddish or bluish tinge.

Please note that the White Balance may not work correctly in the cases below. In these

cases, adjust the White Balance to anything other than [AWB], [AWBc] or [AWBw].

– When there are multiple light sources

– When there are no colours close to white

1 [AWB] will work within this range.

2 Blue sky

3 Cloudy sky (Rain)

4 Shade

5 Sunlight

6 White fluorescent light

7 Incandescent light bulb

8 Sunrise and sunset

9 Candlelight

KlKelvin Colour Temperature

You can adjust the colouring even when the colouring you want to apply is not produced

by the selected white balance.

1 Select the White Balance and then press 4.

2 Press 3/4/2/1 to adjust the colouring.

• You can also make fine adjustments by touching the White

Balance graph.

• To reset the position to the centre, press [DISP.].

• You can set the White Balance Bracket by rotating the control dial. (P147)

3 Press [MENU/SET].

• Press the shutter button halfway to return to the recording screen.

Finely adjusting the White Balance

2 : [A] (AMBER: ORANGE)

1 : [B] (BLUE: BLUISH)

3 : [G] (GREEN: GREENISH)

4 : [M] (MAGENTA: REDDISH)

• If you adjust the White Balance to [A] (amber), the White Balance icon on the screen will

change to orange.

If you adjust the White Balance to [B] (blue), the White Balance icon on the screen will change

to blue.

• If you adjust the White Balance to [G] (green) or [M] (magenta), [_] or [`] appears beside the

White Balance icon on the screen.

GGGGGG

AAAAAABBBBBBB

MMMMMM

118

5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings

Select a Drive Mode

Applicable modes:

You can change what the camera will do when you press the shutter button.

Rotating the drive mode dial.

Single

When the shutter button is pressed, only one picture is

recorded.

Burst (P119)

Recordings are made in succession while the shutter

button is pressed.

4K PHOTO (P122)

When the shutter button is pressed, a 4K photo is

recorded.

Post Focus (P133)

When the shutter button is pressed, Post Focus

recording is performed.

Time Lapse Shot/Stop

Motion Animation

(P138, 140)

Pictures are recorded with Time Lapse Shot or Stop

Motion Animation.

Self Timer (P143)

When the shutter button is pressed, recording takes

place after the set time has elapsed.

119

5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings

Taking Pictures using Burst Mode

Applicable modes:

Pictures are taken continuously while the shutter button is pressed.

Set the drive mode dial to [ ].

Select the Burst Mode setting.

Settings: [H] (High speed), [M] (Middle speed), [L]

(Low speed)

Focus on the subject and take a picture.

• Hold down the shutter button fully to activate the Burst Mode.

∫ Burst Rate

∫ Number of burst picture frames

• When recording is performed under the test conditions specified by Panasonic.

The burst speed will become slower halfway. However, pictures can be taken until the capacity

of the card becomes full.

Depending on recording conditions, the number of burst pictures that can be taken will be

reduced.

> [Rec] > [Burst Rate]

Burst Rate Live View during Burst Mode

[H] (High speed)

9 frames/second ([AFS]/[MF])

6 frames/second ([AFF]/[AFC])

None ([AFS]/[MF])

Available ([AFF]/[AFC])

[M] (Middle speed) 6 frames/second Available

[L] (Low speed) 2 frames/second Available

With RAW files Without RAW files

[H] (High speed)

30 frames or more 600 frames or more

[M] (Middle speed)

[L] (Low speed)

AFSAFS

4:3

5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings

120

∫ About the maximum number of pictures that can be taken continuously

When you press the shutter button halfway, the maximum number

of pictures you can take continuously will appear.

You can check the approximate number of burst pictures that can

be taken at a constant recording speed.

Example: When 20 pictures can be taken: [r20]

• Once recording starts, the maximum number of pictures that can be taken continuously will

decrease.

The recording speed slows down when [r0] appears.

• When [r99+] is displayed, you can take 100 or more pictures continuously.

∫ Notes on focus in Burst Mode

The way focus is achieved varies according to the focus mode setting and the [Focus/

Release Priority] setting in the [Custom] ([Focus / Release Shutter]) menu.

¢1 When the subject is dark, the focus is fixed on the first picture.

¢2 Burst speed takes priority, and focus is estimated within possible range.

¢3 The burst speed may become slower.

Focus mode [Focus/Release Priority] [H] [M]/[L]

[AFS]

[FOCUS]

At the first picture

[BALANCE]

[RELEASE]

[AFF]/[AFC]

¢1

[FOCUS] Predicted focusing

¢2

Normal focusing

¢3

[BALANCE]

Predicted focusing

¢2

[RELEASE]

[MF] — Focus set with MF

2020r20

121

5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings

• The burst speed may become slower depending on the following settings.

– [Picture Size]/[Quality]/[Sensitivity]/Focus Mode/[Focus/Release Priority]

• When the burst rate is set to [H] (when the focus setting is [AFS] or [MF]), the exposure will be

set to that of the first picture. In other cases, the exposure will be adjusted for each picture.

• It may take time to save pictures taken in Burst Mode on the card. If you take pictures

continuously while saving, the maximum number of recordable pictures decreases.

For continuous shooting, use of a high speed memory card is recommended.

• We recommend using the shutter remote control (DMW-RS2: optional) when you want to

keep the shutter button pressed fully while taking pictures in Burst Mode.

Not available in these cases:

• Burst recording does not work in the following cases:

– [Glistening Water]/[Glittering Illuminations]/[Handheld Night Shot]/[Soft Image of a Flower]/

[Panorama Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

– [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Miniature Effect]/[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/

[Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)

– When recording using the flash

– When using [Multi Exp.]

5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings

122

4K Photo Recording

Applicable modes:

The camera allows you to take burst pictures of 8 million pixels (approx.) at 30 frames/

second. After taking these pictures, you can save the desired moment extracted from their

burst file.

• Use a UHS Speed Class 3 card.

Set the drive mode dial to [ ].

Select the recording method.

¢ Audio is not played back when you perform playback with the camera.

Press the shutter button halfway to exit the menu.

Record a 4K photo.

• If you are using AF, [Continuous AF] will work during recording. Focus will be adjusted

continuously.

> [Rec] > [4K PHOTO] > [Rec Method]

[4K Burst]

For capturing the best shot of a fast-moving subject

(e.g., sports, aeroplanes, trains)

Audio recording: Not available

[4K Burst(S/S)]

“S/S” is an

abbreviation of

Start/Stop.

For capturing unpredictable photo opportunities

(e.g., plants, animals, children)

Audio recording: Available

[4K Pre-Burst]

For recording as needed whenever a photo opportunity

arises

(e.g., the moment when a ball is thrown)

Audio recording: Not available

123

5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings

• The camera will perform burst recording of a 4K photo and saves it as a 4K burst file with a

[Rec Format] setting of [MP4].

• When [Auto Review] is enabled, the picture selection screen will be displayed automatically.

To continue recording, press the shutter button halfway to display the recording screen.

• For information on how to select and save pictures from recorded 4K burst files, refer to P128.

[4K Burst]

1 Press the shutter button halfway.

2 Press and hold the shutter button

fully for as long as you want to

perform recording.

A Press and hold

B Recording is performed

• Press the button fully slightly in advance. Recording starts

approximately 0.5 seconds after it has been pressed fully.

• If you remove your finger from the shutter button immediately after

the start of recording, up to a period of approximately 1.5 seconds

after the moment that the finger has been removed may be

recorded.

[4K Burst(S/S)]

1 Press the shutter button fully to

start recording.

2 Press the shutter button fully again

to stop recording.

C Start (First)

D Stop (Second)

E Recording is performed

Setting markers manually

You can add markers if you press [Fn2] during recording.

(Up to 40 markers per recording) When selecting and saving pictures

from a 4K burst file, you can skip to the positions where you added

markers.

[4K Pre-Burst]

Press the shutter button fully.

F Approximately 1 second

G Recording is performed

• AF adjusts focus continuously, and except

in Manual Exposure Mode, it also adjusts

exposure continuously.

• Images may not be displayed as smoothly as when recording with the

normal recording screen.

Recording tips

In situations where you want to lock focus and exposure, such as

when the subject is not at the centre, use [AF/AE LOCK]. (P110)















5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings

124

∫ Setting Pre-Burst Recording ([4K Burst]/[4K Burst(S/S)])

The camera starts recording approximately 1 second before the shutter button is pressed

fully, so you will not miss a photo opportunity.

Settings: [ON]/[OFF]

∫ Setting Loop Recording ([4K Burst(S/S)])

You can perform recording while deleting the oldest recorded data, allowing you to keep

on recording while waiting for a photo opportunity without replacing the card.

• Once you start recording, the 4K burst file will be recorded and divided approximately every

2minutes.

Approximately the last 10 minutes (up to approximately 12 minutes) will be saved.

The preceding part will be deleted.

Settings: [ON]/[OFF]

> [Rec] > [4K PHOTO] > [Pre-Burst Recording]

• When this function is enabled, [ ] is displayed on the recording screen.

• When [Pre-Burst Recording] is being used, AF operations and unavailable menus are the

same as those during [4K Pre-Burst] operation.

> [Rec] > [4K PHOTO] > [Loop Recording(4K PHOTO)]

• We recommend that you use a sufficiently charged battery or an AC adaptor (optional)

and the DC coupler (optional).

• Up to 12 hours of continuous recording is possible.

• When this function is enabled, [ ] is displayed on the recording screen.

Not available in these cases:

• [Loop Recording(4K PHOTO)] is not possible when there is insufficient free space on the card.

Battery drainage and camera temperature

• If the ambient temperature is high or 4K photo recording is performed continuously, [ ] may

be displayed and then recording may stop. Wait until the camera cools down.

• When [ ] ([4K Pre-Burst])

or [Pre-Burst Recording] is set, the battery drains faster

and the camera temperature rises. Use these functions only when recording with

them.

¢ The setting may switch to [ ] ([4K Burst]) to protect the camera.

125

5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings

∫ To change the aspect ratio

Selecting [Aspect Ratio] in the [Rec] menu allows you to change the aspect ratio for 4K

photos.

∫ To record the subject with reduced blur

You can reduce the blur of the subject by setting a faster shutter speed.

1 Set the mode dial to [ ].

2 Set the shutter speed by rotating the rear dial or the front dial.

∫ Preventing camera shake when you are recording pictures

• To reduce camera shake, we recommend that you use a tripod and shutter remote control

(DMW-RS2: optional) when using [Light Composition] or [Sequence Composition].

∫ Shutter sound for recording

• When using [4K Burst] or [4K Pre-Burst], you can change the electronic shutter sound settings

in [E-Shutter Vol] and [E-Shutter Tone].

• When recording with [4K Burst(S/S)], you can set the start/stop tone volume in [Beep Volume].

• High-speed burst recording can be used quietly when used in combination with [Silent Mode].

∫ Scenes not suitable

Recording in extremely bright locations or indoors

When subjects are recorded in an extremely bright place or under fluorescent/LED

lighting, the colour tone or brightness of the image may change, or horizontal stripes may

appear on the screen.

Lowering the shutter speed may reduce the effect of the horizontal stripes.

Subjects that are moving fast in the horizontal direction

If you record a subject moving fast in the horizontal direction, the subject in the recorded

pictures may appear distorted.

Notes on the 4K Photo function

• Approximate shutter speed for outdoor recording in fine weather conditions:

1/1000 seconds or faster.

• If you increase the shutter speed, the ISO sensitivity becomes higher, which may

increase the noise on the screen.

5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings

126

∫ The camera’s setup for the 4K Photo function

The camera’s setup is automatically optimised for 4K photo recording.

• The following [Rec] menu items are fixed to the settings below:

• 4K burst files are recorded with the settings indicated below:

Settings in the [Motion Picture] menu are not applied to 4K burst files.

• When recording with the 4K Photo function, the ranges for the following functions differ from

the ones available for taking pictures:

– Shutter speed: 1/30 to 1/16000

– [Min. Shtr Speed]: [1/1000] to [1/30]

– Exposure Compensation: j3EV to

i3EV

– ISO sensitivity: [AUTO], [200] to [6400] ([L.100] to [6400] when [Extended ISO] is set to [ON])

• The following menu items are disabled:

[Picture Size]

[4K] (8M)

[Quality] [A]

[4:3]: 3328k2496

[3:2]: 3504k2336

[16:9]: 3840k2160

[1:1]: 2880k2880

[Shutter Type] [ESHTR]

[Rec Format] [MP4] [Continuous AF] [ON]

[Rec Quality] [4K/100M/30p] [Luminance Level] [0s255]

• When recording with the 4K Photo function, the following functions are disabled:

–Flash

– Bracket Recording

– Programme Shift

– Focus mode (AFF)

– AF Mode ( )

– [MF Assist] ([4K Pre-Burst] only)

– White Balance ( )

[Intelligent Auto] [iHandheld Night Shot]/[iHDR]

[Creative Control] [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter]

[Rec]

[Picture Size]/[Quality]/[AFS/AFF]/[AF Sensitivity(Photo)]/

[Color Space]/[Flash]/[Long Shtr NR]/[Shading Comp.]/[Ex. Tele Conv.]

([Rec])/[Live View Composite]/[Shutter Type]/[Shutter Delay]/[Bracket]/

[HDR]

[Custom] [Rec Area]/[Face Recog.]/[Profile Setup]

[Setup] [Economy] (when [4K Pre-Burst] is set)

127

5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings

• 4K burst file will be recorded and played back in separate files in the following cases. (You can

continue recording without interruption.)

– When using an SDHC memory card:

If the file size exceeds 4 GB

– When using an SDXC memory card:

If the continuous recording time exceeds 3 hours and 4 minutes or if the file size exceeds

96 GB

• The following changes occur when recording 4K photos:

– The angle of view becomes narrower.

– [Location] in [Travel Date] cannot be recorded.

– [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter] in [Filter Settings] is not available.

– It is not possible to use the HDMI output.

• When recording with [4K Pre-Burst], [Step Zoom] in [Power Zoom Lens] is disabled.

• Scene Detection in Intelligent Auto Mode works the same way as when recording motion

pictures.

• When the drive mode is set to 4K Photo, it is not possible to take pictures while recording

motion picture. (Only when [ ] (Photo Priority) is set)

• To select and save pictures from 4K burst files on a PC, use the software

“PHOTOfunSTUDIO”. Please note that it is not possible to edit a 4K burst file as a motion

picture.

Not available in these cases:

• 4K Photo does not work in the following cases:

– [Clear in Backlight]/[Glistening Water]/[Artistic Nightscape]/[Glittering Illuminations]/

[Handheld Night Shot]/[Clear Night Portrait]/[Soft Image of a Flower]/[Panorama Shot]

(Scene Guide Mode)

– [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Miniature Effect]/[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/

[Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)

– When recording motion pictures

– When using [Multi Exp.]

5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings

128

Selecting pictures from 4K burst file

Select an image with the [ ] icon on the playback

screen, and press 3.

• You can also perform the same operation by touching the icon [ ].

• If the image was recorded with [4K Pre-Burst], proceed to step

Drag the frames to select the frame you want

to save as a picture.

• You can also perform the same operation by pressing

2/1.

• To continuously rewind/forward frame-by-frame, touch

and hold [ ]/[ ].

Touch [ ] to save the picture.

• The picture will be saved in JPEG format.

∫ [4K PHOTO Bulk Saving]

You can save any 5-second period of pictures from a 4K burst file all at once.

1 Select the menu.

2 Press 2/1 to select the 4K photo burst files and press [MENU/SET].

• If the burst time is 5 seconds or less, all frames will be saved as pictures.

3 Select the first frame of the pictures to be saved at once.

• Select the frame in the same way as you select pictures from a 4K burst file.

• Pictures will be saved as a group of Burst Mode pictures in JPEG format. (P189)

Drag the slide bar to make a rough selection

of scenes.

• For information on how to use the slide view screen, refer

to P129.

• You can select its scenes on the 4K burst playback

screen by touching [ ] (Fn1). (P130)

• Touching [ ] allows you to switch to the marker

operation screen. (P131)

Slide view screen

• The picture will be saved with recording information (Exif information), including its shutter

speed, aperture and ISO sensitivity information.

• 4K burst files saved on a PC will be treated as MP4 motion pictures.

> [Playback] > [4K PHOTO Bulk Saving]

Fn1

AUTO

MODE

AUTO

129

5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings

∫ Navigating the slide view screen

Operations during selecting pictures

Button

operation

Touch

operation

Description of operation

2/1/

Dragging/

Selects a frame.

• To change the frames displayed in slide view, select the

frame at the left/right end, and touch [ ] or [ ].

2/1

Press and hold

Touch and hold

Continuously rewinds/forwards frame-by-frame.

Touching/

Dragging

Selects the frame to be displayed.

• The previous or next frame is displayed in slide view.

Pinching out/in

Enlarges/reduces the display.

Selects a frame while maintaining the enlarged display.

(during enlarged display)

3/4/2/1 Dragging Moves the enlarged area (during enlarged display).

s Switches a marker to be displayed. (P132)

Fn1 Displays the 4K burst playback screen.

s Switches to marker operation. (P131)

s / Adds/deletes a marker.

In-focus portions are highlighted with colour. ([Peaking])

• Switches in order of [ ] > [ ] ([LOW]) >

[ ] ([HIGH]).

[MENU/SET] Saves the picture

Fn1

AUTO

MODE

Position of the displayed frame

5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings

130

∫ Navigating the 4K burst playback screen

During pause During continuous playback

Button

operation

Touch

operation

Description of operation

3 / Continuous playback/Pause (during continuous playback).

4 / Continuous rewind/Pause (during continuous rewind).

1/ / Fast forward/Frame-by-frame forward (during pause).

2/ / Fast rewind/Frame-by-frame rewind (during pause).

Touching/

Dragging

Selects the frames to be displayed (during pause).

Pinching out/in Enlarges/reduces the display (during pause).

Selects a frame while maintaining the enlarged display

(during enlarged display).

3/4/2/1 Dragging Moves the enlarged area (during enlarged display).

s Switches a marker to be displayed. (P132)

Fn1 Displays the slide view screen (during pause).

s Switches to marker operation. (P131)

s / Adds/deletes a marker.

In-focus portions are highlighted with colour. ([Peaking])

• Switches in order of [ ] > [ ] ([LOW]) >

[ ] ([HIGH]).

[MENU/SET] Saves the picture (during pause).

• Each time you touch the screen twice, the display switches between enlarged and normal

view.

Fn1

AUTO

MODE

131

5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings

• Set [HDMI Mode (Play)] to either [AUTO] or a setting with a resolution of [4K/25p].

When connecting to a TV that does not support 4K motion picture, select [AUTO].

• If you display 4K burst files on a TV connected to the camera, they will be displayed on the 4K

burst playback screen.

• Depending on the TV to be connected, 4K burst files may not be played back correctly.

∫ Skips to the marked positions

When [ ] is touched on the slide view screen or 4K burst playback screen, the marker

operation screen appears and you can skip to the marked positions. Touch [ ] to

return to the original operation.

Auto Marking function

The camera automatically sets markers on scenes in which a face or the movement of a

subject is detected.

(Example: At the scene when a vehicle passes by, a balloon bursts, or a person turns

around)

• Up to 10 markers are displayed for each file.

• In the following cases, markers may not be set by the Auto Marking function depending on the

recording conditions and the status of subjects.

– The camera is moving because of panning or jitter

– The movement of a subject is slow/small

– The subject is small

– A face is not facing front

Selecting and saving pictures on the TV screen

Marker

When selecting and saving pictures from a 4K burst file,

you can select pictures easily by skipping between

marked positions.

Two types of markers are available.

White marker:

This is manually set during recording or playback.

Green marker:

This is automatically set by the camera during recording.

(Auto Marking function)

Marker operation screen

Button

operation

Touch

operation

Description of operation

2/1 / Moves to the previous/next marker.

Fn1

AUTO

MODE

5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings

132

∫ Switches a marker to be displayed

Touch [ ] on the slide view screen, 4K burst playback screen, or marker

operation screen.

[Auto]

Displays a marker on a scene in which a face or the movement of a

subject is detected.

[Face Priority]

Displays a marker with preference given to a scene in which a face is

detected.

[Motion Priority]

Displays a marker with preference given to a scene in which the

movement of a subject is detected.

[Off] Displays manually set markers only.

• You cannot delete markers set by the Auto Marking function.

• The markers set by the Auto Marking function may not be displayed correctly if you split the

4K burst file on another device and then play it back on the camera.

• In the following case, markers set by the Auto Marking function are not displayed.

– 4K burst files recorded with [4K Pre-Burst]

133

5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings

Post Focus Recording

Applicable modes:

The camera allows you to take 4K burst pictures while shifting the focus to different areas.

After taking these pictures, you can select the desired focus area.

This function is suited for recording still objects.

• Use a UHS Speed Class 3 card.

• We recommend that you use a tripod when recording images to be used for Focus Stacking.

Set the drive mode dial to [ ].

Decide on the composition, and press the

shutter button halfway.

• AF will detect focus areas on the screen. (Excluding the

edges of the screen)

• While the shutter button is pressed and held halfway, shake may be seen on the screen.

• If no areas on the screen can be brought into focus, the focus display (

) will flash.

Recording is not possible in this case.

4K burst recording while

automatically shifting the

focus.

Touch the desired focus

point.

A picture with the desired

focus point is made.

From the time you press the shutter button halfway until the end of recording:

• Maintain the same distance to the subject and the same composition.

4:3

5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings

134

Press the shutter button fully to start

recording.

• The focus point changes automatically while recording.

When the icon (

) disappears, recording automatically

ends.

• A motion picture will be recorded with [Rec Format] set to [MP4]. (Audio will not be

recorded.)

• When [Auto Review] is enabled, a screen that lets you select the desired focus area will

be displayed. (P135)

∫ Limitations on the Post Focus function

• Since recording is performed in the same image quality as 4K photos, certain limitations apply

to recording functions and menu settings. For details, refer to “The camera’s setup for the 4K

Photo function” on P126.

• In addition to the limitations of the 4K Photo function, the following limitations apply to the Post

Focus function:

– AF Mode is disabled.

– MF operation is disabled.

– Motion pictures cannot be recorded.

– [Digital Zoom] is disabled.

– The following [Custom] menu items are disabled:

[Shutter AF]

About camera temperature

• When the ambient temperature is high or Post Focus recording is performed continuously,

the camera may display [ ] and recording may stop.

Wait until the camera cools down.

Not available in these cases:

• Post Focus recording does not work in the following cases:

– [Clear in Backlight]/[Glistening Water]/[Artistic Nightscape]/[Glittering Illuminations]/

[Handheld Night Shot]/[Clear Night Portrait]/[Soft Image of a Flower]/[Panorama Shot]

(Scene Guide Mode)

– [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Miniature Effect]/[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/

[Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)

– When [Multi Exp.] is set



135

5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings

1 Select an image with the [ ] icon on the playback screen, and

press 3.

• You can also perform the same operation by touching the icon [ ].

2 Touch the desired focus area.

• If a picture that is in focus is not available for the selected

area, a red frame will be displayed. You cannot save a

picture in this case.

• You cannot select the edges of the screen.

• You can fine-adjust the focus by dragging the slide bar

during enlarged display. (You can also perform the same

operation by pressing 2/1.)

3 Touch [ ] to save the picture.

• The picture will be saved in JPEG format.

Selecting the Focus Position for the Picture to Save

Button operation Touch operation Description of operation

3/4/2/1/

Touching

Selects a focus area.

• It cannot be selected during enlarged display.

Enlarges the display.

Reduces the display (during enlarged display).

Fn1

Switches to the Focus Stacking function.

(P136)

In-focus portions are highlighted with colour.

([Peaking])

• Switches in order of [ ] > []

([LOW]) > [ ] ([HIGH]).

[MENU/SET] Saves the picture.

• You cannot display an image on a TV screen and then select the focus position.

Fn1

5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings

136

Save a picture with multiple focus positions merged.

A Focus: closer

B Focus: farther away

1 Touch [ ] on the screen that lets you select the desired focus area in step 2 of

“Selecting the Focus Position for the Picture to Save” (P135).

• You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button (Fn1).

2 Touch the merging method.

(When [Range Merging] is selected)

3 Touch the desired focus area.

• To cancel the selection, touch the focus area again.

• To select multiple areas, drag the screen.

Focus Stacking

[Auto Merging]

Automatically selects pictures that are suited to be merged, and

merges them into a single picture.

• Priority will be given to pictures with closer focus.

• Perform the focus stacking and save the picture.

[Range Merging] Merges pictures with specified focus areas into a single picture.

• Specify at least two areas.

• In-focus areas between the selected two points are

indicated.

• Parts that cannot be selected are indicated in grey.

Button

operation

Touch

operation

Description of operation

3/4/2/1/

Touching Selects an area.

Fn1 [Set/Cancel] Specifies/cancels an area.

[DISP.]

[All]

Selects all areas.

(Before selecting areas)

[Reset]

Cancels all selections.

(After selecting areas)

[MENU/SET]

Merges pictures and saves

the resulting picture.

Fn1

ュリヴヱハ

5HVHW

6HW&DQFHO

ュリヴヱハ

5HVHW

Fn1

6HW&DQFHO

137

5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings

4 Touch [ ] to merge the pictures and save the resulting picture.

• The picture will be saved in JPEG format. Recording information (Exif information) of the

original picture with the closest focus distance, including the shutter speed, aperture, and

ISO sensitivity, will also be recorded to the new picture.

• The camera may automatically correct the misalignments of pictures caused by camera

shake. If they are corrected, the angle of view becomes slightly narrower when pictures are

merged.

• Pictures may be merged into an unnatural picture in the following cases:

– When the subject moves during recording

– When the distance between subjects is great

– When pictures are too defocused (If you take pictures with a larger aperture value, the

resulting picture may look less unnatural.)

• You may not be able to use Focus Stacking for images recorded with other devices.

5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings

138

Taking Pictures with Time Lapse Shot/

Stop Motion Animation

Applicable modes:

You can take pictures with Time Lapse Shot or Stop Motion Animation. In addition, the

pictures taken can be combined into a motion picture.

• Set the date and time settings in advance. (P39)

The camera can automatically take pictures of subjects such as animals or plants as time

elapses and create a motion picture.

1 Set the drive mode dial to [ ].

2 Select the menu.

• You can also perform the same operation by touching

[].

• After switching the drive mode dial to [ ], pressing [MENU/SET] will display the menu

with [Time Lapse/Animation] selected. (It displays in this state only once after switching

the drive mode dial.)

3 Press 3/4 to select an item and set.

¢1 Can be set only when [Shooting Interval Setting] is set to [ON].

• Recorded pictures are displayed as group pictures.

[Time Lapse Shot]

> [Rec] > [Time Lapse/Animation] >

[Mode] > [Time Lapse Shot]

[Shooting

Interval

Setting]

[ON]

Sets the time from recording start time to the next

recording start time.

[OFF]

After recording is finished, the next recording is started

without any interval.

[Start Time]

[Now] Starts the recording by fully-pressing the shutter button.

[Start Time

Set]

Any time up to 23 hours 59 minutes ahead can be set.

2/1: Select the item (hour/minute)

3/4: Setting

[MENU/SET]: Set

[Image Count]/

[Shooting

Interval]

¢1

The number of pictures and the recording interval can be set.

2/1: Select the item (minute/second/number of pictures)

3/4: Setting

[MENU/SET]: Set

139

5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings

• The estimated recording ending time is displayed on the setting screen.

It is displayed under the following conditions when [Shooting Interval Setting] is set to

[OFF]:

– Recording Mode: Shutter-Priority AE Mode or Manual Exposure Mode

– Focus Mode: [MF]

• The camera may not be able to record using the pre-set interval and number of pictures to

be recorded or may not finish recording at the estimated recording ending time under

some recording conditions.

4 Press the shutter button halfway.

• The recording screen will be displayed.

5 Press the shutter button halfway to focus and then press it

fully to take the picture.

• The recording starts automatically.

• During recording standby, the camera will turn off automatically if no operation is

performed for a certain period. The Time Lapse Shot is continued even with the camera

turned off. When the recording start time arrives, the camera turns on automatically.

To turn on the camera manually, press the shutter button halfway.

• Operations during recording standby (The camera is turned on)

¢2 When you record pictures by setting [Shooting Interval Setting] to [OFF], you can

press [Fn2] even while recording is in progress. After recording (exposure) of a

picture taken at the time when you pressed [Fn2] is finished, a selection screen is

displayed.

¢3 When you record pictures by setting [Shooting Interval Setting] to [OFF], you cannot

perform touch operation.

• After the recording stops, a confirmation screen will be displayed, asking whether to

proceed to create a motion picture.

To create a motion picture, select [Yes].

For information on creating motion pictures, refer to “Motion pictures using Time Lapse

Shot/Stop Motion Animation”. (P142)

Button

operation

Touch

operation

Description of operation

[Fn2]

¢2

¢3

Displays a selection screen that lets you pause or stop

the recording.

Displays a selection screen that lets you resume or

stop the recording (during pause).

AFSAFS

4:3

5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings

140

A stop motion picture is created by splicing pictures together.

1 Set the drive mode dial to [ ].

2 Select the menu.

• You can also perform the same operation by touching

[].

• After switching the drive mode dial to [ ], pressing [MENU/SET] will display the menu

with [Time Lapse/Animation] selected. (It displays in this state only once after switching

the drive mode dial.)

3 Press 3/4 to select an item and set.

4 Press the shutter button halfway.

• The recording screen will be displayed.

• This function is not for use in a security camera.

• [Time Lapse Shot] is paused in the following cases.

– When the charge on the battery runs out

– Turning the camera off

During [Time Lapse Shot], you can replace the battery and the card, and then restart by

turning on this unit. (Note that the pictures taken after replacing the card will be saved as a

separate set of group pictures.)

Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF] when replacing the battery or card.

• When [Shooting Interval] is set to a longer value, if the camera turns off automatically while

waiting for the next recording, we recommend that you use Time Lapse Shot in AF Mode.

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following cases:

– [Handheld Night Shot]/[Panorama Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

– When using [Multi Exp.]

Recording with Stop Motion Animation

> [Rec] > [Time Lapse/Animation] >

[Mode] > [Stop Motion Animation]

[Auto Shooting]

[ON] Takes pictures automatically at a set recording interval.

[OFF] This is for taking pictures manually, frame by frame.

[Shooting Interval]

(Only when [Auto Shooting] is set to [ON])

2/1: Select the item (second)

3/4: Setting

[MENU/SET]: Set

AFS

4:3

141

5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings

5 Press the shutter button halfway to focus and then

press it fully to take the picture.

6 (When taking the second and subsequent pictures)

Move the subject to decide on the composition and

then take the picture.(Repeat this)

• Up to 9999 frames can be recorded.

• If this unit is turned off while recording, a message for

resuming the recording is displayed when the camera is

turned on. Selecting [Yes] allows you to continue the recording from the interruption point.

7 Touch [ ] to end the recording.

• It can also be ended by selecting [Time Lapse/Animation]

from the [Rec] menu and then pressing [MENU/SET].

• When [Auto Shooting] is set to [ON], select [End] on the

confirmation screen.

(If [Pause] has been selected, press the shutter button fully

to resume the recording.)

• After the recording stops, a confirmation screen will be

displayed, asking whether to proceed to create a motion picture.

To create a motion picture, select [Yes].

For information on creating motion pictures, refer to “Motion pictures using Time Lapse

Shot/Stop Motion Animation”. (P142)

∫ Adding pictures to the Stop Motion Animation group

Selecting [Add to Picture Group] in step

3 will display group pictures recorded with [Stop

Motion Animation].

Select a set of group pictures, and then press [MENU/SET].

Recording materials skilfully

• The recording screen displays up to two pictures taken previously. Use them as

reference for the amount of movement.

• To check the recorded pictures, press [(].

Unnecessary pictures can be deleted by pressing [ ].

To return to the recording screen, press [(] again.

• Recording takes time under certain recording conditions, such as when the flash is used for

recording. Automatic recording, as a result, may not take place at set intervals.

• A picture cannot be selected from [Add to Picture Group] when it is the only one that was

taken.

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following cases:

– [Panorama Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

– When using [Multi Exp.]

• [Auto Shooting] in [Stop Motion Animation] is not available for the following functions:

– [Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings

142

After performing Time Lapse Shot or stop motion recording, you can proceed to create a

motion picture.

1 Select the methods for creating a motion picture.

• The recording format is set to [MP4].

2 Press 3/4 to select [OK] and then press [MENU/SET].

Motion pictures using Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation

[Rec Quality] Sets the quality of a motion picture.

[Frame Rate]

Sets the number of frames per second.

The larger the number is, the smoother the motion picture will be.

[Sequence]

[NORMAL]:

Splices pictures together in recording order.

[REVERSE]:

Splices pictures together in reverse recording order.

• You can also create motion pictures using [Time Lapse Video] (P254) or [Stop Motion Video]

(P254) in the [Playback] menu.

• When creating motion pictures with a [Rec Quality] setting of [4K], recording times are limited

to 29 minutes and 59 seconds.

– When using an SDHC Memory Card, you cannot create motion pictures with a file size

exceeding 4 GB.

– When using an SDXC Memory Card, you can create motion pictures with a file size

exceeding 4 GB.

• A motion picture with a [Rec Quality] setting of [FHD] or [HD] cannot be created if the

recording time exceeds 29 minutes and 59 seconds or the file size exceeds 4 GB.

143

5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings

Recording Using the Self-timer

Applicable modes:

Set the drive mode dial to [ ].

Press the shutter button halfway to focus

and then press it fully to take the picture.

• The focus and exposure are fixed when the shutter

button is pressed halfway.

• After the self-timer indicator flashes, recording starts.

∫ Setting the self-timer

> [Rec] > [Self Timer]

Picture is taken 10 seconds after shutter is pressed.

After 10 seconds the camera takes 3 pictures at about 2 seconds intervals.

Picture is taken 2 seconds after shutter is pressed.

• This setting is a convenient way to avoid camera blur caused by pressing the shutter

button.

• We recommend using a tripod when recording with the self-timer.

Not available in these cases:

• [ ] is not available in the following cases.

– When [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter] of [Filter Settings] is set to [ON]

– When recording with the Bracket function

– When using [Multi Exp.]

– When recording with Live View Composite

• The self-timer does not work in the following case:

– When recording motion pictures

5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings

144

Bracket Recording

Applicable modes:

You can take multiple pictures while automatically adjusting a setting by pressing the

shutter button.

Select the menu.

Press 3/4 to select [More Settings] and then press [MENU/SET].

• For information on [More Settings], refer to the page that describes each function.

• Press the shutter button halfway to exit the menu.

Focus on the subject and take a picture.

• When Exposure Bracket is selected, the bracket display flashes until all of the pictures

you have set are taken. If you change the bracket settings or turn off the camera before

all of the pictures you have set are taken, the camera restarts recording from the first

picture.

∫ To cancel [Bracket Type]

Select [OFF] in step

> [Rec] > [Bracket]> [Bracket Type]

Exposure Bracket

Press the shutter button to perform recording while

adjusting the exposure. (P145)

Aperture Bracket

Press the shutter button to perform recording while

adjusting the aperture. (P146)

• Available in Aperture-Priority AE Mode or when

the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO] in Manual

Exposure Mode.

Focus Bracket

Press the shutter button to perform recording while

adjusting the focus position. (P146)

White Balance Bracket

Press the shutter button once to take three pictures

with different white balance settings automatically.

(P147)

145

5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings

∫ About [More Settings] (step 2 in P144)

¢ Not available for burst recording. When using burst recording, if you press and hold the

shutter button, recording will be performed continuously until a specified number of pictures

are taken.

[Step]: [3•1/3], [Sequence]: [0/s/r]

Not available in these cases:

• Bracket recording does not work in the following cases:

– [Glistening Water]/[Glittering Illuminations]/[Handheld Night Shot]/[Soft Image of a Flower]/

[Panorama Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

– [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Miniature Effect]/[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/

[Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)

– When recording using the flash (except for White Balance Bracket)

– When recording motion pictures

– When recording 4K photos

– When recording with the Post Focus function

– When using [Multi Exp.]

– When using [Time Lapse Shot]

– When using [Stop Motion Animation] (when [Auto Shooting] is set)

• White Balance Bracket does not work in the following cases:

– Intelligent Auto Plus Mode

– Creative Control Mode

– When recording in Burst Mode

– When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]

Exposure Bracket

[Step]

Sets the number of pictures to be taken and the exposure

compensation range.

[3•1/3] (Takes three pictures with an interval of 1/3 EV) to [7•1]

(Takes seven pictures with an interval of 1 EV)

[Sequence] Sets the order in which pictures are taken.

[Single Shot Setting]

[ ]: Takes one picture each time you press the shutter button.

[ ]: Takes all the pictures set to be taken when you press the

shutter button once.

1st picture 2nd picture 3rd picture

d0EV j1/3 EV i1/3 EV

• When taking pictures using Exposure Bracket after setting the Exposure Compensation value,

the pictures taken are based on the selected Exposure Compensation value.

5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings

146

Recording Mode:

∫ About [More Settings] (step

2 in P144)

• When using burst recording, if you press and hold the shutter button, recording will be

performed until a specified number of pictures are taken.

The available aperture values vary depending on the lens.

Example: when using the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060)

When the initial position is set to F8.0:

1 first picture, 2 second picture, 3 third picture... 7 seventh picture

∫ About [More Settings] (step

2 in P144)

¢ Not available for burst recording. When using burst recording, if you press and hold the

shutter button, recording will be performed continuously until a specified number of pictures

are taken.

A Focus: closer

B Focus: farther away

1 first picture, 2 second picture... 5 fifth picture...

Aperture Bracket

[Image Count]

[3], [5]: Takes a specified number of pictures with different aperture

values within the range based on the initial aperture value.

[ALL]: Takes pictures using all aperture values.

Focus Bracket

[Step]

Sets the interval between focus positions.

• The distance by which the focus position moves in each step will be

shorter if the initial position is closer to a subject, and conversely if the

initial position is farther from a subject, the distance will be longer.

[Image Count]

Sets the number of pictures to be taken.

[Sequence]

[0/s/r]: Alternately moves the focus position closer and farther away

within the range centred on the initial position as you take pictures.

[0/r]: Moves the focus position farther away from the initial position as

you take pictures.

[Sequence]: [0/s/r] [Sequence]: [0/r]

• Pictures taken with Focus Bracket are displayed as a set of group pictures.

4.0 5.6 8.0 11 16 22

・・・・・・

・・・

147

5. 4K Photo and Drive Settings

∫ About [More Settings] (step 2 in P144)

Rotate the control dial to adjust the correction range,

and press [MENU/SET].

: Horizontal ([A] to [B])

: Vertical ([G] to [M])

• You can also set the correction range by touching A.

White Balance Bracket

GGGGGG

AAAAAABBBBBBB

MMMMMM

148

6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

Image Stabiliser

The camera can use both the in-body image stabiliser and the in-lens image stabiliser.

Of the Dual I.S. modes that effectively combine two image stabilisers, this supports Dual

I.S.2 ( , , ) with high correction efficiency.

Furthermore, during motion picture recording, you can use the 5-Axis Hybrid Image

Stabiliser that incorporates electronic stabilisation.

• The image stabilisers to be activated differ depending on your lens. The icon for the currently

activated image stabiliser is displayed on the recording screen.

Attached lens

Available image

stabiliser

Icons displayed

When taking

pictures

When recording

motion pictures

Panasonic lenses

compatible with Dual I.S.

Mode

(Based on the Micro Four

Thirds System standard)

Lens + Body

(Dual I.S.)

// / /

Lenses compatible with the

image stabiliser function

(Based on the Micro Four

Thirds System standard/

Four Thirds System

standard)

Lens or Body /

Lenses not compatible with

the image stabiliser function

(Based on the Micro Four

Thirds System standard/

Four Thirds System

standard)

Body /

When using a Leica lens

mount adaptor (optional) /

Mount adaptor made by

another manufacturer

Body /

149

6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

• The 5-Axis Hybrid Image Stabiliser function can be used with all lenses.

Set [E-Stabilization (Video)] in [Stabilizer] to [ON] in the [Rec] menu.

The recording screen displays the following icons when [ON] is set:

– Panasonic lenses compatible with Dual I.S. Mode: [ ]/[ ]

– Other than the above: [ ]

• If the recording screen icon is not indicated with [ ] or [ ] even when a supported

lens is being used, update the lens firmware to the latest version.

For the latest information on supported lenses or to download their firmware, refer to our

website. (P13)

∫ Using the Image Stabiliser

• When using a lens with an O.I.S. switch, set it to [ON].

• When using lenses without a function for communicating with this camera, a message asking

you to check the focal length setting is displayed after you turn on the camera.

Correctly operating the image stabilisation function requires that the focal length be set to

match the attached lens.

Set the focal length in accordance as prompted by the message.

This can also be set using the menu. (P151)

Preventing jitter (camera shake)

When the jitter alert [ ] appears, use [Stabilizer], a tripod, the self-timer or the shutter

remote control (DMW-RS2: optional).

• Shutter speed will be slower particularly in the following cases. Keep the camera still from the

moment the shutter button is pressed until the picture appears on the screen.

We recommend using a tripod.

– Slow Sync.

– Slow Sync./Red-Eye Reduction

– [Clear Nightscape]/[Cool Night Sky]/[Warm Glowing Nightscape]/[Artistic Nightscape]/

[Glittering Illuminations]/[Clear Night Portrait] (Scene Guide Mode)

– When you set to a slow shutter speed

6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

150

Applicable modes:

Set the image stabiliser movement to match the recording situation.

• When using an interchangeable lens with O.I.S. switch (such as H-FSA14140), stabiliser

function is activated if the O.I.S. switch of the lens is set to [ON]. ([ ] is set at the time of

purchase.)

Image Stabiliser Settings

> [Rec]/ [Motion Picture] > [Stabilizer]

[Operation

Mode]

[]

(Normal)

Camera shake is corrected for up/down,

left/right, and rotational movements.

[]

(Panning)

Camera shake is corrected for up/down

movements.

This mode is ideal for panning (a method of

taking pictures which involves turning the

camera to track the movements of a

subject which continues to move in a fixed direction).

[OFF]

[Stabilizer] does not work. ([ ])

• When using a lens with an O.I.S. switch, set the switch to

[OFF].

[E-Stabilization

(Video)]

Jitter during motion picture recording is corrected along the vertical,

horizontal, roll, pitch, and yaw axes by making use of the In-Lens Image

Stabiliser, In-Body Image Stabiliser, and Electronic Image Stabiliser. (5-Axis

Hybrid Image Stabiliser)

[ON]/[OFF]

• The angle of view may become narrower if this is set to [ON].

151

6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

1 Select the menu.

2 Enter a focal length.

2/1: Select the item (digit); 3/4: Setting

• A focal length ranging from 0.1 mm to 1000 mm can be

set.

3 Press [MENU/SET].

∫ Registering a focal length

1 Enter a focal length.

2 Press 1 to select the focal length to be overwritten and

then press [DISP.].

• Up to 3 focal length settings can be registered.

∫ Calling a registered focal length

Press 2/1 to select a registered focal length and then press

[MENU/SET].

[I.S. Lock

(Video)]

Allows you to enhance the image stabilisation effect during motion picture

recording. This effect can keep the motion blur in the composition minimal

when you want to perform recording from a fixed perspective.

[ON]/[OFF]

• This effect works only during recording. [ ] is displayed on the

recording screen.

• To change the composition during recording, set to [OFF] first, and

then move the camera. Use the Fn button to switch between [ON]/[OFF]

during recording. (P60)

• In situations where the focal length becomes greater, such as when a

telephoto lens is attached, the stabilisation effect will be weaker.

• The stabilisation effect may be weak depending on the lens used.

• [I.S. Lock (Video)] is not available when using other manufacturer’s lenses

with an image stabilisation function.

[Focal Length

Set]

When using lenses without a function for communicating with this camera,

manually set the focus length.

Setting the focal length of a lens

> [Rec]/ [Motion Picture] > [Stabilizer] > [Focal Length Set]

6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

152

• The Image Stabiliser may produce operational sound or cause vibration during its

operation, but these are not malfunctions.

• It is recommended to disable the Image Stabiliser when using a tripod.

• The stabiliser function may not be effective in the following cases.

– When there is a lot of jitter

– When the zoom magnification is high

– When using the Digital Zoom

– When taking pictures while following a moving subject

– When the shutter speed becomes slower to take pictures indoors or in dark places

• The panning effect in [ ] is more difficult to achieve in the following cases.

– In brightly lit places such as in broad daylight on a summer’s day

– When the shutter speed is faster than 1/100 of a second

– When you move the camera too slowly because the subject is moving slowly

(The background will not become a blur)

– When the camera does not keep up with the subject satisfactorily

Not available in these cases:

• In the following cases, the [Stabilizer] will switch to [ ] (Panning), even if it is set to [ ]

(Normal):

– [Panorama Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

• In the following cases, the [Stabilizer] will switch to [ ] (Normal), even if it is set to [ ]

(Panning):

– When recording motion pictures

– When recording 4K photos

– When recording with the Post Focus function

• In the following case, the [Stabilizer] will switch from [ ] to [ ] even when a compatible

lens is being used:

– When [High Speed Video] is set

• The 5-Axis Hybrid Image Stabiliser function is not available in the following cases:

– When using the Digital Zoom

– When [High Speed Video] is set

– When [4K Live Cropping] is set

153

6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

Taking Pictures with the Zoom

Applicable modes:

You can zoom-in to make people and objects appear closer or zoom-out to record

landscapes, etc.

Optical zoom

T side: Enlarges distant subject

W side: Widens angle of view

Interchangeable lens

with a zoom ring

Rotate the zoom ring.

Interchangeable lens

that supports the

power zoom

(electrically operated

zoom)

Move the zoom lever.

(The zoom speed varies depending on

how far you move the lever.)

• If you assign [Zoom Control] to a Fn

button, you can operate the optical zoom

slowly by pressing 2/1 or fast by

pressing 3/4.

For information on how to operate, refer to step

2 and the

subsequent steps on P155.

Interchangeable lens

that does not support

the zoom

The optical zoom is not available.

6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

154

Applicable modes:

Extra Tele Conversion enables you to take pictures that are further enlarged without

deteriorating the picture quality.

Preparations:

∫ Maximum zoom magnifications when using Extra Tele Conversion

Raising the telescopic effect

[Ex. Tele Conv.]

• When taking pictures:

Set [Picture Size] to [ M] or [ S], and [Quality] to other

than [ ].

• When recording motion

pictures:

Set the size for [Rec Quality] to [FHD] or [HD].

When taking

pictures

[Ex. Tele Conv.]

([Rec])

1.3k: [ M] (When [Aspect Ratio] is set to [16:9])

1.4k: [ M] (When [Aspect Ratio] is set to [4:3]/[3:2]/

[1:1])

2.0k: [ S]

When recording

motion pictures

[Ex. Tele Conv.]

([Motion Picture])

2.7k (motion pictures size is set to [FHD] in [Rec

Quality])

4.0k (motion pictures size is set to [HD] in [Rec

Quality])

155

6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

∫ Increasing the zoom magnification in steps when taking pictures

1 Select the menu.

2 Set a Fn button to [Zoom Control]. (P60)

3 Press the Fn button.

4 Press 2/1 or 3/4.

• The zoom operation is terminated when the Fn button is pressed again or a certain

amount of time passes.

A Optical Zoom range (Focal length)

B Extra Tele Conversion range (Zoom magnification)

¢ This zoom slider is displayed when using an

interchangeable lens that supports the power zoom.

• A constant zoom speed will be set.

• The indicated zoom magnification is an approximation.

• You can also operate the zoom by using touch zoom. (P158)

∫ Fixing the zoom magnification at the maximum level

> [Rec] > [Ex. Tele Conv.] > [ZOOM]

3/1: Tele (Enlarges distant subject)

4/2: Wide (Widens angle of view)

> [Rec] > [Ex. Tele Conv.] > [TELE CONV.]

> [Motion Picture] > [Ex. Tele Conv.] > [ON]

[OFF] [TELE CONV.]/[ON]

EX1.0x EX2.0x

4:3 4:3

4:3

6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

156

Applicable modes:

(DC-G90)

Although the image quality deteriorates every time you zoom in further, you can zoom in

up to four times the original zoom magnification.

(Continuous zooming is not possible.)

(DC-G91)

Although the image quality deteriorates every time you zoom in further, you can zoom in

up to two times the original zoom magnification.

(Continuous zooming is not possible.)

• If you assign [Ex. Tele Conv.] to [Fn Button Set] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu, you can

display the Extra Tele Conversion setting screen for both pictures and motion pictures by

pressing the assigned Fn button. While this screen is displayed, you can change the [Picture

Size] setting by pressing [DISP.].

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following cases:

– [Panorama Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

– [Toy Effect]/[Toy Pop] (Creative Control Mode)

– When [Quality] is set to [ ]

– When recording 4K photos

– When recording with the Post Focus function

– When [HDR] is set to [ON]

– When using [Multi Exp.]

– When [High Speed Video] is set to [120fps/FHD], [100fps/FHD], [90fps/FHD] or [75fps/FHD]

– When [4K Live Cropping] is set

• [Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Rec]) is not available in the following case:

– [Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

• [Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Motion Picture]) is not available during HDMI output. (Except in Creative

Video Mode)

[Digital Zoom]

> [Rec]/ [Motion Picture] > [Digital Zoom] > [4t]/[2t]

> [Rec]/ [Motion Picture] > [Digital Zoom] > [2t]

157

6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

Applicable modes:

Sets the screen display and lens operations when using an interchangeable lens that is

compatible with power zoom (electrically operated zoom).

• When using the Digital Zoom, we recommend using a tripod and the self-timer for taking

pictures.

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following cases:

– [Toy Effect]/[Toy Pop]/[Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)

– When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]

– When recording with the Post Focus function

– When [High Speed Video] is set

– When [HDR] is set to [ON]

– When using [Multi Exp.]

Changing the settings for a power zoom lens

> [Custom] > [Lens / Others] > [Power Zoom Lens]

[Disp Focal

Length]

When you zoom, the focal distance is

displayed and you can confirm the zoom

position.

A Focal distance indication

B Current focal distance

[Step Zoom]

When you operate the zoom with this setting

[ON], the zoom will stop at positions

corresponding to predetermined distances.

C Step zoom indication

• This setting does not work when recording

motion pictures or recording with [4K

Pre-Burst].

[Zoom Speed]

You can set the zoom speed for zoom operations.

• If you set [Step Zoom] to [ON], the zoom speed will not change.

[Photo]:

[H] (High speed)/[M] (Middle speed)/[L] (Low speed)

[Video]:

[H] (High speed)/[M] (Middle speed)/[L] (Low speed)

[Zoom Ring]

This may be selected when a power zoom-compatible lens with a zoom

lever and zoom ring is attached.

When set to [OFF], the operations controlled by the zoom ring are disabled

to prevent accidental operation.

6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

158

You can change the zoom magnification of Extra Tele Conversion with touch operation

when using the optical zoom or taking pictures.

• When using an interchangeable lens that does not support power zoom (H-FS12060/

H-FSA14140/H-FS1442A), you can operate the zoom magnification of Extra Tele Conversion

by setting [Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Rec]) to [ZOOM].

Touch [ ].

• The slide bar is displayed.

Perform zoom operations by dragging

the slide bar.

• The zoom speed varies depending on the touched

position.

• To end touch zoom operations, touch [ ] again.

Zooming using touch operations (Touch zoom)

[ ]/[ ] Zooms slowly

[ ]/[ ] Zooms quickly

159

6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

Using a Flash

Applicable modes:

∫ Open/Close the built-in flash

A To open the flash

Slide the flash open lever.

• Be careful when opening the flash as the flash will jump

out.

B To close the flash

Press the flash until it clicks.

• Be careful not to catch your finger, etc.

• Forcibly closing the flash can damage the camera.

• Be sure to close the built-in flash when not in use.

∫ The available flash range (approximation)

When you use certain lenses, light from the flash may be blocked or fail to cover the

lens field of view, causing dark areas to appear in the resulting pictures.

The distance at which light from the flash is blocked by lens, and the distance to which

light from the flash is delivered vary depending on the lens used. Check the distance to the

subject when taking a picture.

• These ranges are obtained when the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO] and [ISO Auto Upper Limit

Setting] in [ISO Sensitivity (photo)] is set to [AUTO].

When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used

Wide Tele

0.5 m (1.6 feet) to 7.3 m (24 feet) 0.3 m (0.98 feet) to 4.5 m (15 feet)

When the interchangeable lens (H-FSA14140) is used

Wide Tele

0.5 m (1.6 feet) to 7.3 m (24 feet) 0.5 m (1.6 feet) to 4.5 m (15 feet)

When the interchangeable lens (H-FS1442A) is used

Wide Tele

0.5 m (1.6 feet) to 7.3 m (24 feet) 0.3 m (0.98 feet) to 4.5 m (15 feet)

6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

160

Using the flash skilfully

When taking pictures with flash with the lens hood attached, the lower portion of the photo may

turn dark and the control of the flash may be disabled because the photo flash may be

obscured by the lens hood. We recommend detaching the lens hood.

• Do not perform the following, as heat or light may cause the object to deform or discolour:

– Bringing any object near the flash

– Blocking the flash with your hand while it is firing

– Closing the flash while it is firing

• Do not close the flash immediately after a preliminary flash is fired by using a function such as

Forced On/Red-Eye. This may cause a malfunction.

• When the remaining battery power becomes low or the flash is fired continuously, it may take

time to charge the flash. While the flash is charging, the flash icon blinks red, and even if you

fully press the shutter button, recording is not possible.

• When an external flash is attached, it will have priority over the built-in flash.

For information about external flashes: (P313)

161

6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

Setting Flash Functions

You can set the flash function to control flash firing from the camera.

Applicable modes:

Select whether to set the flash output automatically or manually.

• This can be set when the built-in flash is used.

1 Select the menu.

2 (When [MANUAL] is selected)

Select the menu.

3 Press 2/1 to set the luminosity ratio and then press [MENU/SET].

• You can set from [1/1] (full brightness) to [1/128] in steps of 1/3.

[Firing Mode]/[Manual Flash Adjust.]

> [Rec] > [Flash] > [Firing Mode]

[TTL] The camera automatically sets the flash output.

[MANUAL]

Set the luminosity ratio of the flash manually. In [TTL] you can shoot the

photograph you want even when shooting dark scenes that may

otherwise be too brightly lit by the flash.

• When [MANUAL] is set, the luminosity ratio ([1/1], etc.) is displayed on

the flash icon on the screen.

> [Rec] > [Flash] > [Manual Flash Adjust.]

6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

162

Applicable modes:

Set the flash to match the recording.

¢ Set [Flash] to the following settings:

– [Wireless]: [OFF]

– [Firing Mode]: [TTL]

• In Intelligent Auto Plus Mode ( ), [ ] or [Œ] can be set.

Refer to page 67 for information about flash settings during Intelligent Auto Mode ( or ).

• Some flash modes may not be available depending on the external flash’s settings.

The flash is activated twice.

The interval between the first and second flash is longer when [ ] or [ ] is

set. The subject should not move until the second flash is activated.

• The Red-Eye Reduction effect differs between people. Also, if the subject was far away from

the camera or was not looking at the first flash, the effect may not be evident.

∫ Shutter speed for each flash setting

¢ This becomes 60 seconds in Shutter-Priority AE Mode and B (Bulb) in the Manual Exposure

Mode.

• In Intelligent Auto ( or ) Mode, shutter speed changes depending on the identified

scene.

[Flash Mode]

> [Rec] > [Flash] > [Flash Mode]

‰

(Forced Flash On)

(Forced On/Red-Eye)

The flash is activated every time regardless of the recording

conditions.

• Use this when your subject is back-lit or under fluorescent

light.

(Slow Sync.)

(Slow Sync./

Red-Eye)

When taking pictures against a dark background landscape, this

feature will slow the shutter speed when the flash is activated.

Dark background landscape will appear brighter.

• Use this when you take pictures of people in front of a dark

background.

• Using a slower speed can cause motion blur. Using a

tripod can enhance your photos.

Œ (Forced Flash Off) The flash is not fire.

Flash setting Shutter speed (Sec.) Flash setting Shutter speed (Sec.)

‰

1/60

to 1/200 1 to 1/200

163

6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

∫ Available flash settings by Recording Mode

The available flash settings depend on the Recording Mode.

(±: Available, —: Not available,

¥: Initial setting of Scene Guide Mode)

Recording Mode ‰ Œ

Programme AE Mode

Aperture-Priority AE Mode

±±±±±

Shutter-Priority AE Mode

Manual Exposure Mode

±±——±

Scene

Guide

Mode

[Clear Portrait]

±¥——±

[Silky Skin]

±¥——±

[Clear in Backlight]

¥ ———±

[Sweet Child's Face]

±¥——±

[Clear Night Portrait]

———¥±

[Soft Image of a Flower]

¥ ———±

[Appetizing Food]

¥ ———±

[Cute Dessert]

¥ ———±

[Freeze Animal Motion]

¥ ———±

[Clear Sports Shot]

¥ ———±

[Monochrome]

¥±±±±

• In the following cases, the flash mode is fixed to [Œ]:

– When the flash is closed (except when an external flash is being used)

– [Backlit Softness]/[Relaxing Tone]/[Distinct Scenery]/[Bright Blue Sky]/[Romantic Sunset

Glow]/[Vivid Sunset Glow]/[Glistening Water]/[Clear Nightscape]/[Cool Night Sky]/[Warm

Glowing Nightscape]/[Artistic Nightscape]/[Glittering Illuminations]/[Handheld Night Shot]/

[Panorama Shot] (Scene Guide Mode) (P82)

– When recording motion pictures (P169)

– When recording 4K photos (P122)

– When recording with the Post Focus function (P133)

– When using the electronic shutter (P206)

– When using [Filter Settings] (P199)

– When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON] (P206)

– When [HDR] is set to [ON] (P208)

• The Scene Guide Mode flash setting is returned to the initial value with each change of scene.

6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

164

Applicable modes:

When a moving subject is recorded at night using a slow shutter and flash, a trail of light

may appear in front of the subject.

If you set [Flash Synchro] to [2ND], you can take a dynamic picture with a trail of light

appearing behind the subject by firing the flash immediately before the shutter closes.

Preparation: Set [Wireless] in [Flash] to [OFF].

[Flash Synchro]

> [Rec] > [Flash] > [Flash Synchro]

[1ST]

1st curtain synchro

The normal method when taking pictures with the flash.

[2ND]

2nd curtain synchro

The light source appears behind the subject and picture

becomes dynamic.

• [2nd] is displayed in the flash icon on the screen if you set [Flash Synchro] to [2ND].

• When a fast shutter speed is set, the effect of [Flash Synchro] may deteriorate.

• You cannot set [ ] or [ ] when [Flash Synchro] is set to [2ND].

• The [Flash Synchro] settings also apply to an external flash. (P313)

165

6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

Applicable modes:

Adjust the flash brightness when pictures taken with the flash are over or underexposed.

Preparation: Set [Wireless] and [Firing Mode] in [Flash] to [OFF] and [TTL], respectively.

1 Select the menu.

2 Press 2/1 to set the flash output and then press [MENU/SET].

• You can adjust from [j3 EV] to [i3 EV] in steps of 1/3 EV.

• Select [n0] to return to the original flash output.

Applicable modes:

The flash output is automatically adjusted in accordance with the exposure compensation

value.

Settings: [ON]/[OFF]

Adjusting the Flash Output

> [Rec] > [Flash] > [Flash Adjust.]

•[i] or [j] is displayed on the flash icon in the screen when the flash level is adjusted.

• The [Flash Adjust.] setting also applies to an external flash. (P313)

[Auto Exposure Comp.]

> [Rec] > [Flash] > [Auto Exposure Comp.]

• For details on Exposure Compensation, refer to P111.

• The [Auto Exposure Comp.] settings also apply to an external flash. (P313)

6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

166

Recording Using a Wireless Flash

Applicable modes:

Flashes compatible with this camera (DMW-FL580L/DMW-FL360L/DMW-FL200L:

optional) come with the wireless recording function.

With this function, you can separately control the firing of three flash groups and the

built-in flash (or the flash attached to the hot shoe of the camera).

Preparation:

Slide the flash open lever on the camera to open the flash, or attach the Flash (optional) to

the camera.

Set the wireless flashes to RC Mode and then place them.

• Set a channel and groups for the wireless flash.

∫ Placing wireless flashes

Place the wireless flash with its wireless sensor facing toward the camera.

The following figure shows the estimated controllable range when you take pictures by

holding the camera horizontally. Controllable range differs depending on the surrounding

environment.

Placement range Placement example

• In this placement example, flash C is placed to erase the shadow of the subject that flashes

A and B will create.

• The recommended number of wireless flashes for each group is three or less.

• If the subject is too close, signal flashing may affect the exposure.

If you set [Communication Light] to [LOW] or lower the output with a diffuser or similar

product, the effect will be reduced.

5 m

7 m

(23 feet)

(16 feet)

50°

30°

167

6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

Select the menu.

Press 3/4 to select an item and then

press [MENU/SET].

• To fire a test flash, press [DISP.].

A Flash output

B Luminosity ratio

C Firing Mode

¢1 Not available when [Wireless FP] is set to [ON].

¢2 This option is not displayed when the flash (DMW-FL200L: optional) is attached to the

camera.

¢3 Available when an external flash is attached.

> [Rec] > [Flash]

[Wireless]

Select [ON].

The flash icon on the screen will be indicated with [WL].

[Wireless Channel]

Select the channel you have set for the wireless flashes in

step

[Wireless Setup] Proceed to step 3.

[Built-in

Flash]

¢1

[External

Flash]

¢1

[Firing

Mode]

[TTL]: The camera automatically sets the output.

[AUTO]

¢2, 3

: Flash output is set by the external flash.

[MANUAL]

¢3

: Set the luminosity ratio of the external flash

manually.

[OFF]: The flash on the camera side emits only

communication light.

[Flash

Adjust.]

Set the flash output of the camera manually when [Firing Mode] is

set to [TTL].

[Manual

Flash

Adjust.]

Set the luminosity ratio of the external flash when [Firing Mode] is

set to [MANUAL].

• You can set from [1/1] (full brightness) to [1/128] in steps of 1/3.

[A Group]/

[B Group]/

[C Group]

[Firing

Mode]

[TTL]: The camera automatically sets the output.

[AUTO]

¢1

: The wireless flashes automatically set the output.

[MANUAL]: Set the luminosity ratio of the wireless flashes

manually.

[OFF]: The wireless flashes of the specified group will

not fire.

[Flash

Adjust.]

Adjust the output of the wireless flashes manually when [Firing

Mode] is set to [TTL].

[Manual

Flash

Adjust.]

Set the luminosity ratio of the wireless flashes when [Firing Mode]

is set to [MANUAL].

• You can set from [1/1] (full brightness) to [1/128] in steps of 1/3.

6. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

168

During wireless recording, an external flash fires an FP flash (high speed repetition of flash

firing). This firing allows recording with the flash at a fast shutter speed.

Settings: [ON]/[OFF]

Set the strength of communication light.

Settings: [HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]

Using other settings for wireless flash recording

[Wireless FP]

> [Rec] > [Flash] > [Wireless FP]

[Communication Light]

> [Rec] > [Flash] > [Communication Light]

169

7. Recording Motion Pictures

Recording Motion Picture

Applicable modes:

This camera can record full high definition motion pictures compatible with the AVCHD

format or motion pictures recorded in MP4. In addition, the camera can record 4K motion

pictures in MP4.

Audio will be recorded in stereo.

Start recording by pressing the motion

picture button.

A Elapsed recording time

B Available recording time

• Recording of motion picture appropriate for each mode

is possible.

• The recording state indicator (red) C will light up while

recording motion pictures.

• If no operation is performed, part of the information on

the screen will gradually become darker after

approximately 10 seconds has passed, and will no

longer be displayed after approximately 1 minute has

passed.

Pressing the [DISP.] button or touching the monitor will

make the display reappear.

This operation is to prevent screen burn-in and is not a malfunction.

• Release the motion picture button right after you press it.

• m: minute, s: second

Stop the recording by pressing the motion picture button again.

• With recording in a quiet environment, the sound of aperture and focus may be

recorded in motion pictures. This is not a malfunction.

The focus operation during recording of motion pictures can be set to [OFF] in

[Continuous AF] (P172).

If the operation sound of the motion picture button pressed to end recording bothers

you, try the following:

• Record the motion picture about three seconds longer, and then divide the last

part of the motion picture using [Video Divide] in the [Playback] menu.

• Use the Shutter Remote Control (DMW-RS2: optional) to record.

7. Recording Motion Pictures

170

• When the ambient temperature is high or a motion picture is recorded continuously, the

camera may display [ ] and then stop the recording. Wait until the camera cools down.

• ISO sensitivity operates as [AUTO] (for motion pictures) during motion picture recording. In

Creative Video Mode, you can set the ISO sensitivity for motion picture recording.

• You can display the available recording time before recording in Creative Video Mode.

• When the aspect ratio setting is different in still and motion pictures, the angle of view

changes at the start of motion picture recording.

When [Rec Area] in the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display]) menu is set to [ ], angle of view

during motion picture recording is displayed.

• The operational sound of the zoom or button operation may be recorded when it is operated

during the recording of a motion picture.

• The functions available when recording motion pictures differ according to the lens you are

using, and the operational sound of the lens may be recorded.

• Depending on the type of the card, the card access indication may appear for a while after

recording motion pictures. This is not a malfunction.

• The Recording Mode will switch when you record motion pictures in the following Scene

Guide Modes.

Scene Guide Mode

Recording Mode while

recording motion picture

[Clear in Backlight]

Portrait Mode

[Clear Nightscape]/[Artistic Nightscape]/[Handheld Night

Shot]/[Clear Night Portrait]

Low Light Mode

Not available in these cases:

• Motion pictures cannot be recorded in the following cases.

– [Glistening Water]/[Glittering Illuminations]/[Soft Image of a Flower]/[Panorama Shot] (Scene

Guide Mode)

– [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/[Sunshine] (Creative

Control Mode)

– When recording with the Post Focus function

– When taking pictures with [Time Lapse Shot]

– When using [Stop Motion Animation]

171

7. Recording Motion Pictures

These set the recording format and recording quality for motion picture recording.

This camera can record motion pictures in 4K (3840k2160) or full high-definition

(1920k1080) resolution. The image quality settings that can be selected vary depending

on the [Rec Format] setting.

1 Select the menu.

2 Press 3/4 to select [Rec Quality] and then press [MENU/SET].

When [AVCHD] is selected

¢1 AVCHD Progressive

When [MP4] is selected

¢2 4K motion pictures

[Rec Format]/[Rec Quality]

> [Motion Picture] > [Rec Format]

[AVCHD]

This data format is suitable for when playing back on a high-definition TV,

etc.

[MP4] This data format is suitable for when playing back on a PC, etc.

Item Size Recording frame rate Sensor output Bit rate

[FHD/28M/50p]

¢1

1920k1080 50p 50 frames/second 28 Mbps

[FHD/17M/50i] 1920k1080 50i 50 frames/second 17 Mbps

[FHD/24M/25p] 1920k1080 50i 25 frames/second 24 Mbps

[FHD/24M/24p] 1920k1080 24p 24 frames/second 24 Mbps

Item Size Recording frame rate Sensor output Bit rate

[4K/100M/30p]

¢2

3840k2160 30p 30 frames/second 100 Mbps

[4K/100M/25p]

¢2

3840k2160 25p 25 frames/second 100 Mbps

[4K/100M/24p]

¢2

3840k2160 24p 24 frames/second 100 Mbps

[FHD/28M/60p] 1920k1080 60p 60 frames/second 28 Mbps

[FHD/28M/50p] 1920k1080 50p 50 frames/second 28 Mbps

[FHD/20M/30p] 1920k1080 30p 30 frames/second 20 Mbps

[FHD/20M/25p] 1920k1080 25p 25 frames/second 20 Mbps

[HD/10M/30p] 1280k720 30p 30 frames/second 10 Mbps

[HD/10M/25p] 1280k720 25p 25 frames/second 10 Mbps

7. Recording Motion Pictures

172

∫ About the compatibility of the recorded motion pictures

Motion pictures in AVCHD and MP4 formats may not be played back even on devices that

support these formats. In other cases, the motion pictures may be played back with poor

image or sound quality or their recording information may not be displayed correctly. In

these cases, play them back on the camera.

• To play back or import motion pictures in AVCHD format using another device, use a Blu-ray

disc recorder that supports the format or a PC installed with the software “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.

• For details about 4K motion pictures recorded with the camera, refer to “Watching/Saving 4K

Motion Pictures on an External Device” on P300.

Applicable modes:

You can select how to set the focus in AF when recording motion pictures.

• The higher the Bit rate value is, the higher the picture quality becomes. Since the camera

employs the VBR recording method, the bit rate is changed automatically depending on the

subject to record. As a result, the recording time is shortened when a fast-moving subject is

recorded.

• When [Miniature Effect] is selected for Creative Control Mode, you cannot select the items

used for 4K motion pictures.

• When recording motion pictures in 4K, use a card rated as UHS Speed Class 3.

• When you record 4K motion pictures, the angle of view will be narrower than motion pictures

of other sizes.

• To ensure highly accurate focus, 4K motion pictures are recorded at reduced AF speeds.

It may be difficult to focus on the subject with AF, but this is not a malfunction.

• Refer to P34 for information about continuous recordable times.

• Depending on the TV to be connected, MP4 motion pictures recorded with [4K/100M/30p],

[FHD/28M/60p], [FHD/20M/30p] or [HD/10M/30p] may not be played back correctly.

[Continuous AF]

> [Motion Picture] > [Continuous AF]

Focus mode [Continuous AF] Description of settings

[AFS]/[AFF]/

[AFC]

[ON]

The camera automatically keeps focusing on subjects

during recording.

[OFF]

The camera maintains the focus position at the start of

recording.

[MF] [ON]/[OFF] You can focus manually.

173

7. Recording Motion Pictures

Applicable modes:

You can fine-adjust the focusing method for motion picture recording using [Continuous

AF].

Preparation: Set [Continuous AF] to [ON].

• When the focus mode is set to [AFS], [AFF] or [AFC], if you press the shutter button halfway

while recording a motion picture, the camera will re-adjust the focus.

• Depending on the recording conditions or lens used, operational sound may be recorded

when the AF is operated while recording a motion picture.

It is recommended to record with [Continuous AF] in the [Motion Picture] menu set to [OFF],

if the sound of operation bothers you to avoid recording the lens noise.

• When operating the zoom while recording motion pictures, it may take time to come into

focus.

Not available in these cases:

• [Continuous AF] is not available in the following case:

– When [High Speed Video] is set

• [Continuous AF] does not work in the following case:

– When [Pull Focus] in [Snap Movie] is operating

[AF Custom Setting(Video)]

> [Motion Picture] > [AF Custom Setting(Video)]

[ON] Enables the following settings.

[OFF] Disables the following settings.

[SET]

[AF Speed]

[r] side: Focus moves at a faster speed.

[s] side: Focus moves at a slower speed.

[AF Sensitivity]

[r] side: When the distance to the subject changes significantly,

the camera immediately readjusts the focus.

[s] side: When the distance to the subject changes significantly,

the camera waits for a little before readjusting the focus.

7. Recording Motion Pictures

174

Applicable modes:

You can perform log recording by setting [Photo Style] to [V-Log L]. It allows you to create

images finished with rich gradation through post production editing.

1 Select the menu.

2 Press 2/1 to select [V-Log L] and then press [MENU/SET].

• The recording screen and images output via HDMI will appear darker overall.

Log recording (V-Log L)

> [Motion Picture] > [Photo Style]

• LUTs (Look-Up Tables) can be used for post-production editing. You can download LUT data

from the support site below.

https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/

(This Site is English only.)

This camera records motion pictures in 4:2:0/8 bit, so after post-production

editing, luminance and colour unevenness or noise may appear in areas such as

blue skies, people’s skin, and white walls.

We recommend performing trial recording in advance and editing and checking

post-production images before proceeding to actual recording.

175

7. Recording Motion Pictures

Applicable modes:

You can record still pictures while recording a motion picture. (Simultaneous recording)

During motion picture recording, press the shutter

button fully to record a still picture.

• Simultaneous recording indicator is displayed while recording

still pictures.

• Recording with the Touch Shutter function is also available.

∫ Setting the motion picture priority or still picture priority mode

Applicable modes:

Recording still pictures while recording motion pictures

> [Motion Picture] > [Picture Mode in Rec.]

[]

(Video Priority)

• Pictures will be recorded with a picture size determined by the [Rec Quality]

setting for motion pictures.

• Only JPEG images are recorded when [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or

[].

(When set to [ ], still pictures will be recorded in [Quality] of [A].)

• You can take up to 40 still pictures.

(Up to 10 still pictures during 4K motion picture recording)

[]

(Photo Priority)

• Pictures will be recorded with the set picture size and quality.

• The screen will go dark while recording pictures. A still picture will be

recorded in the motion picture during that period, and audio is not recorded.

• You can take up to 10 still pictures.

(Up to 5 still pictures during 4K motion picture recording)

• The picture aspect ratio will be fixed to [16:9].

Not available in these cases:

• When [ ] (Photo Priority) is set, simultaneous recording is not possible in the following

cases:

– When [Rec Quality] is set to a motion picture item with a frame rate of [24p]

– When the drive mode is set to 4K Photo

– When using [Ex. Tele Conv.] in the [Motion Picture] menu

• Simultaneous recording is not possible when [Snap Movie] is set to [ON].

7. Recording Motion Pictures

176

Applicable modes:

You can specify the recording time in advance and record motion pictures casually like you

take snapshots. The function also allows you to shift a focus at the start of recording and

add fade in/out effects in advance.

• Motion pictures will be recorded with [FHD/20M/25p] in [MP4].

• Using the smartphone/tablet app “Panasonic Image App”, you can combine motion pictures

recorded with the camera. Music can be added and various editing operations can be

performed when you combine them. In addition, you can send the combined motion picture to a

web service. (P275)

1 Select the menu.

• Press the shutter button halfway to exit the menu.

2 Start recording by pressing the motion picture

button.

A Elapsed recording time

B Set recording time

• Release the motion picture button right after you press it.

• You cannot stop motion picture recording in the middle.

The recording will stop automatically when the set

recording time has elapsed.

∫ To cancel Snap Movie

Select [OFF] in step

[Snap Movie]

> [Motion Picture] > [Snap Movie] > [ON]

SNAP

4SEC

177

7. Recording Motion Pictures

Snap Movie settings

> [Motion Picture] > [Snap Movie] > [SET]

[Record time] Sets the recording time of motion pictures.

[Pull Focus]

Shifts focus gradually at the start of recording for more dramatic imaging

expression. (P178)

[Fade]

Adds a fade-in (gradual appearance) effect to an image and audio as

recording starts or adds a fade-out (gradual disappearance) effect to them

as recording ends.

[WHITE-IN]/[WHITE-OUT]:

Adds a fade-in or fade-out effect that uses a white screen.

[BLACK-IN]/[BLACK-OUT]:

Adds a fade-in or fade-out effect that uses a black screen.

[COLOR-IN]/[COLOR-OUT]:

Adds an effect that fades in from black-and-white to colour or an effect that

fades out from colour to black-and-white. Audio will be recorded normally.

[OFF]

• Motion pictures recorded with [WHITE-IN] or [BLACK-IN] are displayed as all-white or

all-black thumbnails in Playback Mode.

• If you set [Snap Movie] in [Fn Button Set] (P60) of the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu and then

press the Fn button, a screen that lets you switch [Snap Movie] between [ON]/[OFF] is

displayed. You can change the settings of Snap Movie by pressing [DISP.] in this switching

screen display.

• [Snap Movie] will be set to [OFF] when you connect to Wi-Fi with [Remote Shooting & View].

• This function is not available in the following cases:

– [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)

– When recording 4K photos

– When recording with the Post Focus function

– When [High Speed Video] is set

– When [4K Live Cropping] is set

7. Recording Motion Pictures

178

∫ Setting [Pull Focus]

Set the frames that specify the positions where the [Pull

Focus] starts (first position) and stops (second position).

1 Press 2.

2 Press 3/4/2/1 to move the AF area frame, and

press [MENU/SET]. (First position)

• If you press [DISP.] before pressing [MENU/SET], the frame will return to the centre.

3 Repeat step 2. (Second position)

• Press [MENU/SET] to cancel the second frame position setting.

Touch a subject (first position), drag your finger to the desired location (second

position), and release the finger.

• If you touch [ ], the frame settings will be cancelled.

Button operation

Touch operation

• A greater effect can be achieved by creating a striking contrast of focus between the

start and end positions, for example by shifting focus from the background to

foreground, or vice versa.

• After setting focus, try to keep the distance between the subject and the camera

constant.

• When the camera fails to set the frame, it returns to the first position.

• When [Pull Focus] is set to [ON]:

– AF Mode will be switched to [ ], a setting specially designed for [Pull Focus].

– During picture taking, AF operates as [Ø] at the first frame position.

• When the [Metering Mode] (P201) is set to [ ], the spot metering target is set at the first

frame.

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following cases:

–During MF

– When using the Digital Zoom

179

7. Recording Motion Pictures

Applicable modes:

Display the sound recording level on the recording screen.

Settings: [ON]/[OFF]

• When [Sound Rec Level Limiter] is set to [OFF], [Sound Rec Level Disp.] is fixed to [ON].

Applicable modes:

Adjust the sound input level to 19 different levels (j12 dB to i6dB).

• Displayed dB values are approximate.

Applicable modes:

The camera adjusts the sound input level automatically, minimising the sound distortion

(crackling noise) when the volume is too high.

Settings: [ON]/[OFF]

Displaying/Setting the Sound Recording Level

[Sound Rec Level Disp.]

> [Motion Picture] > [Sound Rec Level Disp.]

[Sound Rec Level Adj.]

> [Motion Picture] > [Sound Rec Level Adj.]

[Sound Rec Level Limiter]

> [Motion Picture] > [Sound Rec Level Limiter]

7. Recording Motion Pictures

180

Creative Video Mode

Recording Mode:

It is possible to manually change the aperture, shutter speed and ISO sensitivity and

record motion pictures.

The following motion pictures can only be recorded in Creative Video Mode:

Set the mode dial to [ ].

Select the menu.

• The operation for changing the aperture value or shutter speed is the same as the

operation for setting the mode dial to , , or .

• Programme Shift does not work.

Press the motion picture button (or shutter button) to start recording.

• The operational sound of the zoom or button operation may be recorded when it is

operated during the recording of a motion picture.

Using touch icons allows silent operation while recording motion pictures.

[High Speed Video] P181

[4K Live Cropping] P182

> [Creative Video] > [Exposure Mode] > [P]/[A]/[S]/[M]

It is also possible to display the selection screen by touching the

Recording Mode icon in recording screen.

1 Touch [ ]. (This cannot be used when recording with High Speed Video.)

2 Touch icon.

: Zoom

: Aperture value

: Shutter speed

: Exposure Compensation

: ISO sensitivity

: Sound rec level adjustment

¢ When using an interchangeable lens that supports power zoom (electronic zoom)

3 Drag the slide bar to set.

[ ]/[ ]: Changes the setting slowly

[ ]/[ ]: Changes the setting quickly

ISO

181

7. Recording Motion Pictures

Press the motion picture button (or shutter button) again to stop

recording.

∫ [AUTO] ISO sensitivity settings

Set the upper and lower limits of the ISO sensitivity when it is set to [AUTO].

Records slow motion pictures of MP4 format by performing ultra-high-speed recording.

• Use a UHS Speed Class 3 card.

1 Set the mode dial to [ ].

2 Select the menu.

3 Press the motion picture button (or shutter button) to start recording.

4 Press the motion picture button (or shutter button) again to stop recording.

> [Motion Picture] > [ISO Sensitivity (video)]

[ISO Auto Lower Limit Setting] [200]/[400]/[800]/[1600]/[3200]

[ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting] [AUTO]/[400]/[800]/[1600]/[3200]/[6400]

[High Speed Video]

> [Creative Video] > [High Speed Video]

Settings

Frame rate

(for recording)

[Rec Quality]

(for storage)

Slow motion effect

[120fps/FHD] 120 frames/second FHD/20M/30p Approx. 1/4k

[100fps/FHD] 100 frames/second FHD/20M/25p Approx. 1/4k

[90fps/FHD] 90 frames/second FHD/20M/30p Approx. 1/3k

[75fps/FHD] 75 frames/second FHD/20M/25p Approx. 1/3k

[60fps/FHD] 60 frames/second FHD/20M/30p Approx. 1/2k

[50fps/FHD] 50 frames/second FHD/20M/25p Approx. 1/2k

[OFF] —

• The angle of view becomes narrower in the following case:

– When [120fps/FHD], [100fps/FHD], [90fps/FHD] or [75fps/FHD] is set

• AF does not work.

• Audio is not recorded.

• When using an interchangeable lens with no focus ring, you cannot set focus with MF.

• Under fluorescent lighting, flicker or horizontal bars may be seen.

7. Recording Motion Pictures

182

By cropping your motion picture down from the 4K angle of view to Full High Definition,

you can record a motion picture that pans and zooms in/out while leaving the camera in a

fixed position.

• [Rec Format] and [Rec Quality] in the [Motion Picture] menu will be fixed to [MP4] and [FHD/

20M/30p]/[FHD/20M/25p], respectively.

• Hold the camera firmly in place while recording.

• The angle of view becomes narrower.

1 Set the mode dial to [ ].

2 Select the menu.

3 Set the cropping start frame.

A Cropping start frame

• When making settings for the first time, a cropping start

frame of size 1920k1080 is displayed. (After setting the

cropping start frame and end frame, the start frame and

end frame that you set immediately before will be

displayed.)

• The camera will remember the frame position and size

even when the camera is turned off.

[4K Live Cropping]

Pan Zoom in

> [Creative Video] > [4K Live Cropping] > [40SEC]/[20SEC]

Button operation Touch operation Description of operation

3/4/2/1 Touching Moves the frame.

/ s

Enlarges/reduces the

frame in small steps.

The range of

settings allowed is

from 1920k1080 to

3840k2160.

Pinching out/in

Enlarges/reduces the

frame.

[DISP.] [Reset]

Returns the position of the frame to the centre

and its size to the default setting.

[MENU/SET] [Set] Decides the position and size of the frame.

ュリヴヱハ

5HVHW

6HW

183

7. Recording Motion Pictures

4 Set the cropping end frame.

B Cropping end frame

5 Press the motion picture button (or shutter button)

to start recording.

C Elapsed recording time

D Set operating time

• Immediately release the motion picture button (or the

shutter button) after pressing it.

• When the set operating time has elapsed, recording

automatically ends.

To end recording midway, press the motion picture button

(or the shutter button) again.

∫ Changing the position and size of a crop frame

Press 2 while the recording screen is displayed, and perform steps

3 and 4.

∫ To cancel [4K Live Cropping] recording

Set [4K Live Cropping] to [OFF] in step

To add zoom in/out effects, set different angles of view for the cropping start and

end frames. For example, to zoom in while recording, set a larger angle of view

for the start frame and a smaller angle of view for the end frame.

• The setting of the AF Mode switches to [š]. (The eye to be in focus is not indicated.)

• Brightness is measured and focus is done in the cropping start frame. During motion picture

recording, they are done in the crop frame. To lock the focus position, set [Continuous AF] to

[OFF], or set the Focus Mode to [MF].

• [Metering Mode] will be [ ] (Multiple).

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following cases:

– When [High Speed Video] is set

ュリヴヱハ

5HVHW

6HW

184

8. Playing Back and Editing Images

Playing Back Pictures

Press [(].

Press 2/1.

• If you press and hold 2/1, you can play back the

pictures in succession.

• You can also perform this step by operating the camera

as below.

∫ To finish playback

Press [

(] again or press the shutter button halfway.

2: Play back the previous picture

1: Play back the next picture

Sending images

• Rotate the front dial or the control dial.

• Drag the screen horizontally.

Sending images

continuously

• After dragging to change the image,

leave your finger touching the left or

right edge of the screen.

Sending an image to a web service

If you press

4 when displaying images one by one, you can easily send an image to a

web service. (P287)

Not available in these cases:

• This camera complies with the DCF standard “Design rule for Camera File system”

established by JEITA “Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association”

and with Exif “Exchangeable Image File Format”.

This camera can only display pictures that comply with the DCF standard.

• The camera may not play back images recorded on other devices correctly, and the functions

of the camera may not be available for the images.

1/981/98

1/98

185

8. Playing Back and Editing Images

Playing Back Motion Pictures

This unit was designed to play motion pictures using the AVCHD and MP4 formats.

Select an icon indicated with [ ], and then press

3 to play it back.

A Motion picture recording time

• After playback starts, the elapsed playback time is displayed on

the screen.

For example, 8 minutes and 30 seconds is displayed as

[8m30s].

• Some information (recording information, etc.) is not displayed for motion pictures recorded in

[AVCHD].

• Touching [ ] in the middle of the screen allows you to play back motion pictures.

• Motion pictures recorded with [Snap Movie] are played back automatically.

∫ Operations during Motion Picture Playback

¢1 The fast forward/rewind speed increases if you press 1/2 again.

¢2 When a motion picture recorded with [AVCHD] is rewound frame-by-frame, its frames will be

shown in intervals of approximately 0.5 seconds.

∫ Operations during automatic Snap Movie playback

• If you touch the screen, automatic playback will stop.

Button

operation

Touch

operation

Description of

operation

Button

operation

Touch

operation

Description of

operation

3 Play/Pause 4 Stop

Fast rewind

¢1

Fast forward

¢1

Frame-by-frame

rewind

(while pausing)

¢2

Frame-by-frame

forward

(while pausing)

Reduce volume level

Increase volume

level

3 Playback from the beginning

2 Back to previous picture

1 Ahead to next picture

• You can play back motion pictures on a PC with “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.

12s12s

12s

8. Playing Back and Editing Images

186

Extract one frame of a motion picture and save it as a JPEG image.

Press 3 to pause motion picture playback.

• Press 2/1 to fine-adjust the pause position while the motion picture is paused.

Press [MENU/SET].

• The same operation can be performed by touching

[].

Extracting a Picture

• Still pictures will be saved with [Aspect Ratio] set to [16:9] and [Quality] set to [A].

The number of pixels will differ according to the motion picture you play back.

Motion picture recording quality

Picture size of the picture to be

saved

[4K] 3840k2160

[FHD]/[HD] 1920k1080

• Still pictures created from a motion picture may be coarser than with normal picture quality.

• [ ] is displayed during playback of still pictures created from motion pictures.

187

8. Playing Back and Editing Images

Switching the Display Mode

Playback images can be displayed enlarged (Playback Zoom).

• Each time you touch the screen twice, the display switches between enlarged and normal view.

• Images recorded with [Quality] set to [ ] can be enlarged up to 8k.

Enlarged Display

Rotate the rear dial right.

1k > 2k > 4k > 8k > 16k

Button

operation

Touch

operation

Description of operation

s Enlarges/reduces the screen.

s Pinching out/in Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.

3/4/2/1 Dragging Moves the enlarged area.

/ s

Forwards or rewinds the image while maintaining the same

zoom magnification and zoom position.

Thumbnail Screen

Rotate the rear dial left.

1 screen > 12 screens > 30 screens > Calendar display

• If the rear dial is rotated to the right, the previous playback

screen will be displayed.

• It is possible to switch the playback screen by touching the

following icons.

– [ ]: 1 screen

– [ ]: 12 screens

– [ ]: 30 screens

– [ ]: Calendar display

• You can also scroll the list display by dragging the screen up/down.

• Pictures displayed using [ ] cannot be played back.

∫ To return to Normal Playback

Select the picture, and then press [MENU/SET].

• If you select a motion picture, it will be played back automatically.

2.0X2.0X2.0X2.0X

CAL

1/98

8. Playing Back and Editing Images

188

Calendar Playback

1 Rotate the rear dial left to display the Calendar display.

2 Press 3/4/2/1 to select the recording date and

press [MENU/SET].

• Only the images recorded on that date will be displayed.

• Rotate the rear dial left to return to the Calendar display.

3 Press 3/4/2/1 to select a picture and then press

[MENU/SET].

• The recording date of the picture selected in the playback screen becomes the date selected

when the Calendar screen is first displayed.

• You can display the Calendar between January 2000 and December 2099.

• If the date is not set in the camera, the recording date is set as the 1st January, 2019.

• If you take pictures after setting the travel destination in [World Time], the pictures are

displayed by the dates at the travel destination in Calendar Playback.

7644321

141312111098

21201918171615

28272625242322

SUN SATFRITHUWEDTUEMON

30 3129

2019

189

8. Playing Back and Editing Images

Group Images

A picture group consists of multiple pictures. You can play back pictures in a group either

continuously or one by one.

• You can edit or delete all pictures in a group at once.

(For example, if you delete a picture group, all pictures in the group are deleted.)

∫ Playing back group pictures one by one

1 Press 4.

• The same operation can be performed by touching [ ],

[ ], [ ], or [ ].

2 Press 2/1 to flip through images.

• To return to the normal playback screen, press 4 again or touch [ ].

• Each picture in a group can be treated same as normal pictures when they are played

back. (Such as thumbnail screen, enlarged display and deleting images)

[]:

A picture group saved at once with [4K PHOTO Bulk Saving].

[]:

A picture group consisting of pictures taken with Focus

Bracket.

[]:

A picture group consisting of pictures taken in a Time Lapse

Shot.

[]:

A picture group consisting of pictures taken in the Stop

Motion Animation.

• Pictures will not be grouped if recorded without setting the clock.

1/981/981/981/98





SLF



SLF



SLF

1/981/98

1/98





SLF





SLF





SLF

8. Playing Back and Editing Images

190

∫ Continuously playing back Group Pictures

Press 3.

• The same operation can be performed by touching the group picture icon ([ ], [ ],

[]).

• When playing back group pictures one at a time, options are displayed.

After selecting [Burst Play] (or [Sequential Play]), select either of the following playback

methods:

[From the first picture]:

Pictures are played back continuously from the first picture of the group.

[From the current picture]:

Pictures are played back continuously from the picture being played back.

• Operations during continuous playback

Button

operation

Touch

operation

Description of

operation

Button

operation

Touch

operation

Description of

operation

Continuous

playback/Pause

4 Stop

Fast rewind

Fast forward

Rewind

(while pausing)

Forward

(while pausing)

191

8. Playing Back and Editing Images

Deleting Images

Once deleted, pictures cannot be recovered.

∫ To delete a single picture

1 In Playback Mode, select the picture to delete and

then press [ ].

• The same operation can be performed by touching [ ].

2 Press 3 to select [Delete Single] and then press [MENU/SET].

∫ To delete multiple pictures (up to 100) or all the pictures

• Picture groups are treated as a single picture. (All the pictures in the selected picture group will

be deleted.)

1 In Playback Mode, press [ ].

2 Press 3/4 to select [Delete Multi] or [Delete All] and then press [MENU/SET].

• After selecting [Delete All], if you select [Delete All Non-rating], you can delete all pictures

except for those with ratings.

(When [Delete Multi] is selected)

3 Press 3/4/2/1 to select the picture, and then

press [MENU/SET] to set. (Repeat this step.)

•[‚] appears on the selected pictures.

To cancel the selection, press [MENU/SET] again.

4 Press [DISP.] to execute.

• Depending on the number of pictures to be deleted, it may take some time to delete them.

ュリヴヱハ

192

9. Menu Guide

Given below is the list of menus. Menus explained in detail on other pages are indicated

with page numbers.

• For information about menu operation methods, refer to page 55.

• For information about methods of entering text, refer to page 64.

Menus that are only available for particular

Recording Modes

You can change the settings registered to custom sets ( ). (P81)

Menus that are only available for

particular Recording Modes

P192 A

[Rec] menu

P193

[Motion Picture] menu

P210

[Custom] menu

P213

[Setup] menu

P228

[My Menu] menu

P238

[Playback] menu

P239

: [Intelligent Auto] menu

• [Intelligent Auto Mode] (P66)

• [iHandheld Night Shot] (P68)

• [iHDR] (P68)

: [Creative Video] menu

• [Exposure Mode] (P180)

• [High Speed Video] (P181)

• [4K Live Cropping] (P182)

: [Custom Mode] menu

193

9. Menu Guide

[Rec] menu

¢ Menu items common to the [Rec] menu and [Motion Picture] menu. Setting changes will be

applied to the settings of both menus.

: [Scene Guide] menu

• [Scene Switch] (P82)

: [Creative Control] menu

• [Filter Effect] (P88) • [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter] (P88)

• [Aspect Ratio] (P194)

•[Picture Size] (P194)

• [Quality] (P195)

• [AFS/AFF] (P95)

• [AF Sensitivity(Photo)] (P96)

• [Photo Style] (P196)

• [Filter Settings] (P199)

• [Color Space] (P200)

• [Metering Mode] (P201)

• [Highlight Shadow] (P201)

• [i.Dynamic] (P202)

• [i.Resolution] (P203)

• [Flash] (P162)

• [Red-Eye Removal] (P203)

• [ISO Sensitivity (photo)] (P203)

• [Min. Shtr Speed] (P204)

• [Long Shtr NR] (P204)

• [Shading Comp.] (P205)

• [Diffraction Compensation] (P205)

• [Stabilizer] (P148)

• [Ex. Tele Conv.] (P154)

• [Digital Zoom] (P156)

• [Burst Rate] (P119)

• [4K PHOTO] (P122)

• [Self Timer] (P143)

• [Time Lapse/Animation] (P138, 140)

• [Live View Composite] (P76)

• [Panorama Settings] (P85)

• [Silent Mode] (P206)

• [Shutter Type] (P206)

• [Shutter Delay] (P207)

• [Bracket] (P144)

• [HDR] (P208)

•[Multi Exp.] (P209)

9. Menu Guide

194

Applicable modes:

This allows you to select the aspect ratio of the pictures to suit printing or the playback

method.

Applicable modes:

The higher the numbers of pixels, the finer the detail of the pictures will appear even when

they are printed onto large sheets.

[Aspect Ratio]

> [Rec] > [Aspect Ratio]

[4:3] [Aspect Ratio] of a 4:3 TV

[3:2] [Aspect Ratio] of a 35 mm film camera

[16:9] [Aspect Ratio] of a 16:9 TV

[1:1] Square aspect ratio

Not available in these cases:

• [Aspect Ratio] cannot be set in the following cases:

– [Panorama Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

[Picture Size]

> [Rec] > [Picture Size]

Aspect

ratio

Image size

Aspect

ratio

Image size

[4:3]

[L] (20M) 5184k3888

[16:9]

[L] (14.5M) 5184k2920

[ M] (10M) 3712k2784 [ M] (8M) 3840k2160

[ S] (5M) 2624k1968 [ S] (2M) 1920k1080

[3:2]

[L] (17M) 5184k3456

[1:1]

[L] (14.5M) 3888k3888

[ M] (9M) 3712k2480 [ M] (7.5M) 2784k2784

[ S] (4.5M) 2624k1752 [ S] (3.5M) 1968k1968

• When [Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Rec]) is set, [ ] is displayed on the picture sizes of each aspect ratio

except for [L].

Not available in these cases:

• [Picture Size] cannot be set in the following cases:

– [Panorama Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

– When recording 4K photos

– When recording with the Post Focus function

195

9. Menu Guide

Applicable modes:

Set the compression rate at which the pictures are to be stored.

[Quality]

> [Rec] > [Quality]

Settings File format Description of settings

[A]

JPEG

A JPEG image in which image quality was given priority.

[›]

A standard image quality JPEG image.

This is useful for increasing the number of shots without

changing the number of pixels.

[]

RAWiJPEG

You can record a RAW image and a JPEG image ([A] or

[›]) simultaneously.

[]

[] RAW You can only record RAW images.

About RAW

RAW format refers to a data format of images that have not been processed. Playback

and editing of RAW images require the camera or the dedicated software.

• You can process RAW images in [RAW Processing] in the [Playback] menu.

• Use software (“SILKYPIX Developer Studio” by Ichikawa Soft Laboratory) to process and

edit RAW files on a PC. (P306)

• RAW images are always recorded in the [4:3] (5184k3888) aspect ratio.

• When you delete an image recorded with [ ] or [ ], both the RAW and JPEG

images will be deleted simultaneously.

• When you play back an image recorded with [ ], grey areas corresponding to the aspect

ratio at the time of recording are displayed.

• The setting is fixed to [A] when recording is performed with the 4K Photo or Post Focus

function.

Not available in these cases:

• In the following cases, [ ], [ ], and [ ] cannot be set.

– [Handheld Night Shot]/[Panorama Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

9. Menu Guide

196

Applicable modes:

You can select effects to match the type of image you wish to record.

[Photo Style]

> [Rec]/ [Motion Picture] > [Photo Style]

[Standard] This is the standard setting.

[Vivid] Brilliant effect with high saturation and contrast.

[Natural] Soft effect with low contrast.

[Monochrome] Monochrome effect with no colour shades.

[L.Monochrome]

Black-and-white effect with rich gradation and crisp black

accents.

[L.Monochrome D]

Monochrome effect that creates a dynamic impression with

enhanced highlights and shadows.

[Scenery]

An effect appropriate for sceneries with vivid blue skies and

greens.

[Portrait]

An effect appropriate for portraits with a healthy and beautiful

skin tone.

[Custom] Use the setting registered in advance.

[Cinelike D]

An effect that creates a film-like finishing touch using a gamma

curve and gives priority to the dynamic range.

• This function is suitable for motion picture editing processes.

[Cinelike V]

Gives priority to the contrast by using a gamma curve designed

to create film-like images.

[V-Log L]

A gamma curve effect designed for post production editing.

• It allows you to add rich gradation to images during post

production editing.

• In Intelligent Auto Plus Mode:

– Only [Standard] or [Monochrome] can be set.

– The setting will be reset to [Standard] when the camera is switched to another Recording

Mode or this unit is turned off.

– Image quality cannot be adjusted.

• In Scene Guide Mode, you can only set the image quality.

197

9. Menu Guide

∫ Adjusting the picture quality

1 Press 2/1 to select the type of Photo Style.

2 Press 3/4 to select the items, and then press 2/1

to adjust.

• You can register adjusted details to [Custom] by pressing

[DISP.].

¢1 It cannot be adjusted when [V-Log L] is set.

¢2 Not displayed when [Monochrome], [L.Monochrome] or [L.Monochrome D] is selected.

¢3 Displayed only when [Monochrome], [L.Monochrome] or [L.Monochrome D] is selected.

• If you adjust the picture quality, [_] is displayed beside the Photo Style icon on the screen.

3 Press [MENU/SET].

[Contrast]

¢1

[r]

Increases the difference between the brightness and

the darkness in the picture.

[s]

Decreases the difference between the brightness

and the darkness in the picture.

[Sharpness]

[r] The picture is sharply defined.

[s] The picture is softly focused.

[Noise Reduction]

[r]

The noise reduction effect is enhanced.

Picture resolution may deteriorate slightly.

[s]

The noise reduction effect is reduced. You can obtain

pictures with higher resolution.

[Saturation]

¢1, 2

[r] The colours in the picture become vivid.

[s] The colours in the picture become natural.

[Color Tone]

¢3

[r] Adds a bluish tone.

[s] Adds a yellowish tone.

[Filter Effect]

¢3

[Yellow] The blue sky can be recorded clearly.

[Orange] The blue sky can be recorded in darker blue.

[Red] The blue sky can be recorded in much darker blue.

[Green]

The skin and lips of people appear in natural tones.

Green leaves appear brighter and more enhanced.

[Off] —

[Grain Effect]

¢3

[Low]/

[Standard]/

[High]

Sets the graininess in a picture.

[Off] —

DISP.カスタム登録

500

+5+5

±0

6WDQGDUG

9. Menu Guide

198

• The effect of [Grain Effect] cannot be checked on the recording screen.

Not available in these cases:

• [Grain Effect] is not available in the following cases.

– [Panorama Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

– When recording motion pictures

– When recording 4K photos

– When recording with the Post Focus function

199

9. Menu Guide

Applicable modes:

You can add the image effects (filters) of Creative Control Mode. (P87)

Settings: [ON]/[OFF]/[SET]

∫ Setting a Filter with Touch Operation

1 Touch [ ].

2 Touch the item you want to set.

[Filter Settings]

> [Rec]/ [Motion Picture] > [Filter Settings] > [Filter Effect]

[]:Image effect ON/OFF

[]:Selects an image effect (filter)

[]:Adjusts an image effect

• [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/[Sunshine] are not

available in the following cases.

– Creative Video Mode

– When recording motion pictures

• The available ISO sensitivity settings will be limited up to [ISO3200].

• The ISO sensitivity for [High Dynamic] will be fixed to [AUTO].

• When using [Filter Effect], you cannot use menus or recording functions not available in

Creative Control Mode.

For example, White Balance will be fixed to [AWB] and the flash will be set to [

Œ] (forced flash

off).

• The following limitations apply when the Scene Guide Mode is set to [Panorama Shot]:

– [Toy Effect]/[Toy Pop]/[Miniature Effect]/[Sunshine] are not available.

– The image effects of [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter] will

not be applied to the screen during recording.

– When [High Key] is set, its effect may not appear clearly in scenes that are not bright

enough.

Not available in these cases:

• In the following case, [Filter Settings] does not work:

– When the Scene Guide Mode is set to anything other than [Panorama Shot]

– When [High Speed Video] is set

– When using [4K Live Cropping]

EXPS

9. Menu Guide

200

∫ [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter]

You can press the shutter button once and take two pictures simultaneously, one with an

image effect and the other one without it.

Settings: [ON]/[OFF]

Applicable modes:

This sets the method for reproducing the correct colours to output the recorded images to

a PC screen or a device such as a printer.

> [Rec]/ [Motion Picture] > [Filter Settings] >

[Simultaneous Record w/o Filter]

• A picture with an image effect will be taken first, followed by a picture without it.

• Only an image with an image effect is displayed for Auto Review.

Not available in these cases:

• In the following case, [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter] does not work:

– Scene Guide Mode

– Recording still pictures while recording a motion picture (when set to [ ] (Video Priority))

– When recording 4K photos

– When recording with the Post Focus function

– When recording in Burst Mode

– When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]

– When recording with the Bracket function

– When using [Time Lapse Shot]

– When using [Stop Motion Animation]

[Color Space]

> [Rec] > [Color Space]

[sRGB]

Colour space is set to sRGB colour space.

This is widely used in computer related equipment.

[AdobeRGB]

Colour space is set to AdobeRGB colour space.

AdobeRGB is mainly used for business purposes such as professional

printing because it has a greater range of reproducible colours than sRGB.

• Set to [sRGB] if you are not very familiar with AdobeRGB.

• The setting is fixed to [sRGB] in the following cases.

– When recording motion pictures

– When recording 4K photos

– When recording with the Post Focus function

– When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log L]

201

9. Menu Guide

Applicable modes:

Type of optical measurement to measure brightness can be changed.

Applicable modes:

You can adjust the brightness of bright and dark portions on an image while checking the

brightness on the screen.

1 Press 2/1 to select the type of Highlight Shadow.

[Metering Mode]

> [Rec]/ [Motion Picture] > [Metering Mode]

Brightness measurement

position

Conditions

[]

(Multiple)

Whole screen

Normal usage

(produces balanced pictures)

[]

(Centre weighted)

Centre and surrounding area Subject in centre

[]

(Spot)

Centre of [i]

(spot metering target A)

Great difference between

brightness of subject and

background

(e.g. person in spotlight on stage,

backlighting)

• If you set the spot metering target on the edge of the screen, the metering may be affected by

the brightness around the location.

Not available in these cases:

• In the following case, [Metering Mode] does not work:

– When the Scene Guide Mode is set to anything other than [Panorama Shot]

[Highlight Shadow]

> [Rec]/ [Motion Picture] > [Highlight Shadow]

(Standard) A state with no adjustments is set.

(Raise the contrast) Bright areas are brightened, and dark areas are darkened.

(Lower the contrast) Bright areas are darkened, and dark areas are brightened.

(Brighten dark areas) Dark areas are brightened.

// (Custom) Registered custom settings can be applied.

ヒ

ヤ

ビ

ヤ

ピ

ヤ

9. Menu Guide

202

2 Rotate the front/rear dial to adjust the brightness of

bright/dark portions.

A Bright portion

B Dark portion

• Adjustments can also be made by dragging the graph.

• To register a preferred setting, press 3, and select the

destination where the custom setting will be registered to

([Custom1] ( )/[Custom2] ( )/[Custom3] ( )).

3 Press [MENU/SET].

Applicable modes:

Contrast and exposure are compensated when the brightness difference between the

background and subject is great, etc.

Settings: [AUTO]/[HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/[OFF]

• The screen display can be switched by pressing [DISP.] on the brightness adjustment screen.

• Turning off this unit will return the setting adjusted with / / / back to the default

setting.

• When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log L], the setting is fixed to (Standard).

Not available in these cases:

• [Highlight Shadow] cannot be set in the following cases:

– When using [Filter Settings]

[i.Dynamic]

> [Rec]/ [Motion Picture] > [i.Dynamic]

Not available in these cases:

• Compensation effect may not be achieved depending on the recording conditions.

• [i.Dynamic] does not work in the following cases:

– When [HDR] is set to [ON]

• [i.Dynamic] is not available in the following cases:

– [Panorama Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

– When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log L]

– When recording with Live View Composite

ヒ

ヤ

ビ

ヤ

ピ

ヤ

203

9. Menu Guide

Applicable modes:

Pictures with sharp profile and resolution can be taken by using the Intelligent Resolution

Technology.

Settings: [HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/[OFF]

Applicable modes:

If you fire the flash when using Red-Eye Reduction ([ ] or [ ]), the camera

automatically detects red-eye and corrects the picture.

Settings: [ON]/[OFF]

Applicable modes:

Set the upper and lower limits of the ISO sensitivity when it is set to [AUTO] or [ ].

[i.Resolution]

> [Rec]/ [Motion Picture] > [i.Resolution]

[Red-Eye Removal]

> [Rec] > [Red-Eye Removal]

• If you set this item to [ON], the icon will change to [ ] or [ ].

• Under certain circumstances, red-eye cannot be corrected.

[ISO Sensitivity (photo)]

> [Rec] > [ISO Sensitivity (photo)]

[ISO Auto Lower Limit Setting] [200]/[400]/[800]/[1600]/[3200]/[6400]/[12800]

[ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting]

[AUTO]/[400]/[800]/[1600]/[3200]/[6400]/[12800]/

[25600]

Not available in these cases:

• [ISO Sensitivity (photo)] is not available when the following functions are being used:

– [Clear Nightscape]/[Cool Night Sky]/[Warm Glowing Nightscape]/[Handheld Night Shot]

(Scene Guide Mode)

9. Menu Guide

204

Applicable modes:

Set the minimum shutter speed when the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO] or [ ].

Settings: [AUTO]/[1/16000] to [1/1]

Applicable modes:

The camera automatically removes noise that appears when the shutter speed becomes

slower to take pictures of night or similar scenery.

Settings: [ON]/[OFF]

[Min. Shtr Speed]

> [Rec] > [Min. Shtr Speed]

• The shutter speed may become slower than the set value in situations where proper exposure

cannot be obtained.

[Long Shtr NR]

> [Rec] > [Long Shtr NR]

• [Long shutter noise reduction ongoing] is displayed for the same time as the shutter speed for

signal processing.

Not available in these cases:

• [Long Shtr NR] is not available in the following cases:

– [Panorama Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

– When recording motion pictures

– When recording 4K photos

– When recording with the Post Focus function

– When using the electronic shutter

205

9. Menu Guide

Applicable modes:

When the screen periphery darkens as a result of the lens characteristics, you can record

pictures with the brightness of the screen periphery corrected.

Settings: [ON]/[OFF]

Applicable modes:

The camera raises the resolution by correcting the blurriness caused by diffraction when

the aperture is closed.

Settings: [AUTO]/[OFF]

[Shading Comp.]

> [Rec] > [Shading Comp.]

• Compensation effect may not be achieved depending on the recording conditions.

• Noise in the periphery of the picture may stand out with higher ISO sensitivity.

Not available in these cases:

• Correction is not possible in the following cases:

– When recording motion pictures

– When taking pictures while recording motion pictures (when [ ] (Video Priority) is set)

– When recording 4K photos

– When recording with the Post Focus function

– When using [Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Rec])

– When using the Digital Zoom

[Diffraction Compensation]

> [Rec]/ [Motion Picture] > [Diffraction Compensation]

• Noise may stand out with higher ISO sensitivity.

9. Menu Guide

206

Applicable modes:

Disables operational sounds and output of light at once.

Settings: [ON]/[OFF]

• Audio from the speaker will be muted and the flash and the AF Assist lamp will be disabled.

The following settings are fixed.

– [Flash Mode]: [Œ] (forced flash off)

– [Shutter Type]: [ESHTR]

– [AF Assist Lamp]: [OFF]

– [Beep Volume]: [s] (OFF)

– [E-Shutter Vol]: [ ] (OFF)

Applicable modes:

Select the shutter to be used for taking pictures.

[Silent Mode]

> [Rec] > [Silent Mode]

• Even when [ON] is set, the following lamps light up/flash.

– WIRELESS connection lamp

– Self-timer indicator

• Sounds that are produced by the camera regardless of your operations, such as the lens

aperture sound, cannot be muted.

• Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy, the likeness rights, etc. of the subject

when you use this function. Use at your own risk.

[Shutter Type]

> [Rec] > [Shutter Type]

[AUTO]

Switches the shutter type automatically depending on the recording condition

and shutter speed.

[MSHTR] Takes pictures in Mechanical Shutter Mode.

[EFC] Takes pictures in Electronic Front Curtain Mode.

[ESHTR] Takes pictures in Electronic Shutter Mode.

207

9. Menu Guide

¢1 This setting is available only in Manual Exposure Mode.

¢2 If the ISO sensitivity is higher than [ISO3200], the shutter speed will be faster than 1 second.

¢3 The electronic shutter sound can be set in [E-Shutter Vol] and [E-Shutter Tone] in [Beep] of

the [Setup] menu.

• Compared to Mechanical Shutter Mode, Electronic Front Curtain Mode produces less

shutter-induced shake, so it can minimise the influence of shutter vibration.

• Electronic Shutter Mode allows you to take pictures without causing shutter vibration.

Applicable modes:

To reduce the influence of hand shake or shutter vibration, shutter is released after the

specified time has passed.

Settings: [8SEC]/[4SEC]/[2SEC]/[1SEC]/[OFF]

Mechanical Shutter

Electronic Front

Curtain

Electronic Shutter

Description

The camera starts and

ends an exposure with

the mechanical shutter.

The camera starts an

exposure electronically,

and ends it with the

mechanical shutter.

The camera starts and

ends an exposure

electronically.

Flash ±±—

Shutter Speed

(Sec.)

B (Bulb)

¢1

/60 to 1/4000 B (Bulb)

¢1

/60 to 1/2000 1

¢2

to 1/16000

Shutter Sound

Mechanical shutter

sound

Mechanical shutter

sound

Electronic shutter

sound

¢3

• When [ ] is displayed on the screen, pictures will be taken with the electronic shutter.

• When [ESHTR] is set, if you take a picture of a moving subject, it may appear distorted

in the picture.

• When [ESHTR] is set, horizontal stripes may appear on pictures taken under lighting

such as a fluorescent or LED lighting fixture. The horizontal stripes may be reduced if

you set a slower shutter speed.

[Shutter Delay]

> [Rec] > [Shutter Delay]

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following cases:

– [Panorama Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

– When recording motion pictures

– When recording 4K photos

– When recording with the Post Focus function

– When [HDR] is set to [ON]

9. Menu Guide

208

Applicable modes:

You can combine 3 pictures with different levels of exposure into a single picture with rich

gradation.

You can minimise the loss of gradations in bright areas and dark areas when, for example,

the contrast between the background and the subject is large.

An image combined by HDR is recorded in JPEG.

Settings: [ON]/[OFF]/[SET]

∫ Changing settings

[HDR]

> [Rec] > [HDR]

[Dynamic Range]

[AUTO]: Automatically adjusts the exposure range according to the

differences between the bright and dark areas.

[n1EV]/[n2EV]/[n3EV]:

Adjusts the exposure within the selected exposure

parameters.

[Auto Align]

[ON]: Automatically corrects camera shake (jitter) and other

problems that can cause the images to misalign.

Recommended for use during hand-held shooting.

[OFF]: Image misalignment not adjusted.

Recommended when a tripod is used.

• Do not move the unit during the continuous shooting after pressing the shutter button.

• You cannot take the next picture until the combination of pictures is complete.

• A moving subject may be recorded with unnatural blurs.

• The angle of view becomes narrow slightly when [Auto Align] is set to [ON].

• Flash is fixed to [Œ] (forced flash off).

Not available in these cases:

• [HDR] does not work for the pictures taken during a motion picture recording.

• This function is not available in the following cases:

– When recording 4K photos

– When recording with the Post Focus function

– When recording in Burst Mode

– When recording with the Bracket function

– When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]

– When using [Time Lapse Shot]

– When using [Stop Motion Animation] (when [Auto Shooting] is set)

209

9. Menu Guide

Applicable modes:

Gives an effect like multi exposure. (up to 4 times equivalent per a single image)

1 Press 3/4 to select [Start] and then press [MENU/SET].

2 Decide on the composition, and take the first

picture.

• After taking the picture, press the shutter button halfway

down to take the next picture.

• Press 3/4 to select the item and then press [MENU/SET]

for one of the following operations.

3 Shooting the second, third, and fourth exposures.

• To save the recorded pictures and finish Multiple Exposure, press [Fn2] when taking

pictures.

4 Press 4 to select [Exit] and then press [MENU/SET].

• You can also press the shutter button halfway to finish.

∫ Changing settings

[Multi Exp.]

> [Rec] > [Multi Exp.]

– [Next]: Advance to the next picture.

– [Retake]: Return to the first picture.

– [Exit]: Record the image of the first picture, and

finish the multiple exposure picture-taking

session.

[Auto Gain]

If you select [OFF], all exposure results are superimposed as they are.

Compensate the exposure as necessary.

[Overlay]

If you select [ON], you can apply Multi Exposure to previously recorded

images. After [Start] is selected, images on the card will be displayed.

Select a RAW image, and press [MENU/SET] to proceed to recording.

• The recording information displayed for pictures taken with multiple exposures is the

recording information for the last picture taken.

• You can perform [Overlay] only for RAW images recorded with the camera.

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following cases:

– When using [Time Lapse Shot]

– When using [Stop Motion Animation]

– When recording with Live View Composite

([LW

5HWDNH

1H[W

([LW

5HWDNH

9. Menu Guide

210

[Motion Picture] menu

¢ Menu items common to the [Rec] menu and [Motion Picture] menu. Setting changes will be

applied to the settings of both menus.

Applicable modes:

Select the luminance range to match the use of motion picture.

Preparation:

Set [Rec Format] to [MP4].

Settings: [0-255]/[16-255]

Applicable modes:

The shutter speed can be fixed to reduce the flicker or striping in the motion picture.

Settings: [1/50]/[1/60]/[1/100]/[1/120]/[OFF]

• [Rec Format] (P171)

• [Rec Quality] (P171)

• [Snap Movie] (P176)

• [AFS/AFF] (P95)

• [Continuous AF] (P172)

• [AF Custom Setting(Video)] (P173)

• [Photo Style] (P196)

• [Filter Settings] (P199)

• [Luminance Level] (P210)

• [Metering Mode] (P201)

• [Highlight Shadow] (P201)

• [i.Dynamic] (P202)

• [i.Resolution] (P203)

• [ISO Sensitivity (video)] (P181)

• [Diffraction Compensation] (P205)

• [Stabilizer] (P148)

• [Flkr Decrease] (P210)

• [Ex. Tele Conv.] (P154)

• [Digital Zoom] (P156)

• [Picture Mode in Rec.] (P175)

• [Sound Rec Level Disp.] (P179)

• [Sound Rec Level Adj.] (P179)

• [Sound Rec Level Limiter] (P179)

• [Wind Noise Canceller] (P211)/

[Wind Cut] (P317)

• [Lens Noise Cut] (P211)

• [Special Mic.] (P316)

• [Sound Output] (P212)

[Luminance Level]

> [Motion Picture] > [Luminance Level]

• This will be fixed at [16-255] when the [Rec Format] is [AVCHD].

• The setting is fixed at [0-255] in the following cases:

– When taking pictures (including picture-taking during motion picture recording)

– When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log L]

[Flkr Decrease]

> [Motion Picture] > [Flkr Decrease]

211

9. Menu Guide

Applicable modes:

This will reduce the wind noise coming into the built-in microphone while maintaining

sound quality.

Settings: [HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[OFF]

Applicable modes:

This can reduce the power zoom operational sound produced during motion picture

recording.

• This function works only when an interchangeable lens that supports power zoom is used.

Settings: [ON]/[OFF]

[Wind Noise Canceller]

> [Motion Picture] > [Wind Noise Canceller]

• [HIGH] effectively reduces the wind noise by minimising the low-pitched sound when a strong

wind is detected.

• [STANDARD] extracts and reduces only the wind noise without deteriorating the sound

quality.

• You may not see the full effect depending on the recording conditions.

• This function works only with the built-in microphone.

When an external microphone is connected, [Wind Cut] is displayed.

[Lens Noise Cut]

> [Motion Picture] > [Lens Noise Cut]

• When this function is used, the sound quality may differ from that during normal operation.

9. Menu Guide

212

Applicable modes:

You can record motion pictures while hearing the sounds that are being recorded by

connecting a commercially available headphones to this unit.

A Headphone socket

B Commercially available headphone

• Do not use the headphone cables with the length of 3 m (9.8 feet) or more.

• When headphones are connected, electronic sounds and electronic shutter sounds are muted.

∫ Switch the sound output method

• [Sound Output] is fixed to [REC SOUND] in the following cases:

– When in Recording Mode

– During HDMI output

– When using an external microphone

∫ Adjusting the headphone volume

1 Select the menu.

2 Connect headphones, and rotate the control dial while the recording screen is

displayed or a motion picture is being played back.

• You can also adjust the volume by touching [ ] or [ ] during playback.

To adjust the volume using the menu:

[Sound Output]

> [Motion Picture] > [Sound Output]

[REALTIME]

Actual sound without time lag.

It may be different to the audio recorded in the motion picture.

[REC SOUND]

Sound that is being recorded in motion pictures.

The audio may be output slower than the actual audio.

[Custom] > [Operation] > [Dial Set.] > [Control Dial

Assignment] > [ ]

: Reduce volume level : Increase volume level

> [Setup] > [Headphone Volume]

213

9. Menu Guide

[Custom] menu

[Exposure]

• [ISO Increments] (P214)

• [Extended ISO] (P114)

• [Exposure Comp. Reset] (P214)

[Focus / Release Shutter]

• [AF/AE Lock] (P110)

• [AF/AE Lock Hold] (P214)

• [Shutter AF] (P214)

• [Half Press Release] (P214)

• [Quick AF] (P214)

• [Eye Sensor AF] (P215)

• [Pinpoint AF Setting] (P215)

• [AF Assist Lamp] (P215)

• [Direct Focus Area] (P216)

• [Focus/Release Priority] (P216)

• [Focus Switching for Vert / Hor] (P216)

• [Loop Movement Focus Frame] (P216)

• [AF Area Display] (P217)

•[AF+MF] (P217)

• [MF Assist] (P217)

• [MF Assist Display] (P218)

[Operation]

• [Fn Button Set] (P60)

• [WB/ISO/Expo. Button] (P218)

• [ISO Displayed Setting] (P45)

• [Exposure Comp. Disp. Setting] (P46)

• [Q.MENU] (P218)

• [Dial Set.] (P47)

• [Operation Lock Setting] (P218)

• [Focus Ring Lock] (P218)

• [Video Button] (P218)

• [Video Rec. Button (Remote)] (P315)

• [Touch Settings] (P219)

[Monitor / Display]

• [Auto Review] (P219)

• [Monochrome Live View] (P219)

• [Constant Preview] (P220)

• [Live View Boost] (P220)

• [Peaking] (P220)

• [Histogram] (P221)

• [Guide Line] (P221)

• [Center Marker] (P221)

• [Highlight] (P222)

• [Zebra Pattern] (P222)

• [Expo.Meter] (P223)

• [MF Guide] (P223)

• [LVF/Monitor Disp. Set] (P49)

• [Monitor Info. Disp.] (P223)

• [Rec Area] (P223)

• [Remaining Disp.] (P223)

• [Menu Guide] (P223)

[Lens / Others]

• [Lens Position Resume] (P224)

• [Power Zoom Lens] (P157)

• [Lens Fn Button Setting] (P224)

• [Face Recog.] (P225)

• [Profile Setup] (P227)

9. Menu Guide

214

This changes the increments used to set the ISO sensitivity.

Settings: [1/3 EV]/[1 EV]

An exposure value can be reset when the Recording Mode is changed or the camera is

turned off.

When [ON] is selected, focus and exposure stays locked even if you press and release

[AF/AE LOCK].

To clear the lock, press [AF/AE LOCK] again.

Set whether or not the focus is adjusted automatically when the shutter button is pressed

halfway.

The shutter will immediately fire when the shutter button is pressed halfway.

The camera automatically adjusts the focus when the amount of camera blur becomes

small.

This will speed up the focusing that takes place when you press the shutter button.

> [Custom] > [Exposure]

[ISO Increments]

[Exposure Comp. Reset]

> [Custom] > [Focus / Release Shutter]

[AF/AE Lock Hold]

[Shutter AF]

[Half Press Release]

[Quick AF]

• The battery will be consumed faster than usual.

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following cases:

– In Preview Mode

– In low light situations

215

9. Menu Guide

The camera automatically adjusts the focus when the eye sensor is active.

This changes the setting for an enlarged display that appears when the Auto Focus Mode

is set to [ ].

This lights the AF Assist Lamp for easier focusing when you press the shutter button

halfway while recording in a dark location.

[Eye Sensor AF]

• [Eye Sensor AF] may not work in dimly lit conditions.

[Pinpoint AF Setting]

[Pinpoint AF Time]

Sets the time for which the enlarged screen is displayed when the

shutter button is pressed halfway.

Settings: [LONG]/[MID]/[SHORT]

[Pinpoint AF Display]

Sets the display mode of the enlarged screen (windowed screen/full

screen).

Settings: [FULL] (full screen)/[PIP] (windowed screen)

[AF Assist Lamp]

• The effective range of the AF Assist Lamp is different depending on the lens used.

– When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is attached and at Wide:

Approx. 1.0 m (3.3 feet) to 3.0 m (9.8 feet)

– When the interchangeable lens (H-FSA14140) is attached and at Wide:

Approx. 1.0 m (3.3 feet) to 3.0 m (9.8 feet)

– When the interchangeable lens (H-FS1442A) is attached and at Wide:

Approx. 1.0 m (3.3 feet) to 3.0 m (9.8 feet)

• Remove the lens hood.

• The AF Assist Lamp gets slightly blocked when the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060/

H-FSA14140/H-FS1442A) is used, but it does not affect the performance.

• The AF Assist Lamp may be greatly blocked, and it may become harder to focus when a lens

with large diameter is used.

• [AF Assist Lamp] is fixed to [OFF] in the following case:

– [Distinct Scenery]/[Bright Blue Sky]/[Romantic Sunset Glow]/[Vivid Sunset Glow]/[Glistening

Water]/[Clear Nightscape]/[Cool Night Sky]/[Warm Glowing Nightscape]/[Artistic

Nightscape]/[Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

– When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON]

9. Menu Guide

216

This moves the AF area or MF Assist using the cursor button when recording.

Set whether to give priority to focus or shutter release during AF.

• Different settings can be applied to different Focus Mode settings ([AFS/AFF], [AFC]).

Focus positions are stored separately for the camera's horizontal and vertical orientations.

When setting the AF area position or the MF Assist display position, you can now loop the

position from one edge to the other edge of the screen.

[Direct Focus Area]

• You can move the positions below with the cursor button.

– When [š]/[ ]/[ ]/[Ø] is selected: AF area

– When [ ] is selected: lock-on position

– When [ ] is selected: enlarged area

• Use the Quick Menu (P58) or Fn buttons (P60) to use the functions assigned to the cursor

button, such as AF Mode selection.

• [Direct Focus Area] is fixed to [OFF] in the following case:

– [Glistening Water] (Scene Guide Mode)

– Creative Control Mode

– When [4K Live Cropping] is set

[Focus/Release Priority]

[FOCUS] Disables recording when focus is not achieved.

[BALANCE]

Performs recording while controlling the balance between focusing and

shutter release timing.

[RELEASE] Enables recording even when focus is not achieved.

[Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]

[ON]

Memorises separate positions for horizontal

and vertical orientations (two vertical

orientations, left and right, are available).

• The following last-specified positions will be

memorised.

– The last AF area position (when [ ], [Ø] or [ ] is used)

– The last MF Assist display position

[OFF] Sets the same setting for both horizontal and vertical orientations.

[Loop Movement Focus Frame]

217

9. Menu Guide

This changes the AF area display setting for when the Auto Focus Mode is set to [ ]

([49-Area]) or [ ], etc. ([Custom Multi]).

You can fine-adjust the focus manually during AF lock (when the following conditions are

met).

– When the Focus Mode is set to [AFS] and the shutter button is pressed halfway

– When [AF/AE LOCK] is pressed

Sets the display method of MF Assist (enlarged screen).

• Available settings vary depending on the lens used.

When an interchangeable lens having a focus ring (H-FS12060/H-FSA14140/H-FS1442A)

is used

When an interchangeable lens with no focus ring is used

Settings: [ON]/[OFF]

[AF Area Display]

[ON]

Displays AF areas on the recording screen.

• AF areas are not displayed when the default AF area setting is applied to

[ ] ([49-Area]) or [ ], [ ] or [ ] in [Custom Multi].

[OFF]

Displays AF areas on the recording screen for just a few seconds after you

start using them.

• Even when [ON] is set, the same operation as [OFF] is performed in the following cases:

– When recording motion pictures

– When recording 4K photos

– Creative Video Mode

[AF+MF]

[MF Assist]

[]The screen is enlarged by operating the lens or by pressing [ ] (2).

[]The screen is enlarged by operating the lens.

[] The screen is enlarged by pressing [ ] (2).

[OFF] The screen is not enlarged.

Not available in these cases:

• MF Assist is not displayed in the following cases:

– When recording motion pictures

– When recording with [4K Pre-Burst]

– When using the Digital Zoom

ヤヒヤビ

ヤピ

9. Menu Guide

218

Sets the display method of MF Assist (enlarged screen).

Settings: [FULL] (full screen)/[PIP] (windowed screen)

This sets the operation to be performed when [ ] (White Balance), [ ] (ISO

sensitivity) or [ ] (Exposure Compensation) is pressed.

If you select [CUSTOM], you can customise the Quick Menu settings. (P59)

This sets which control functions will be disabled when [Operation Lock] is set in [Fn

Button Set] (P60) of the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu.

This disables the focus ring operation of the interchangeable lens during MF to lock the

focus.

• [MFL] is displayed on the recording screen while the focus ring is locked.

Enables/disables the motion picture button.

[MF Assist Display]

> [Custom] > [Operation]

[WB/ISO/Expo. Button]

[WHILE

PRESSING]

Allows you to change the setting while pressing and holding the button.

Release the button to confirm the settings value, and to return to the

recording screen.

[AFTER

PRESSING]

Press the button to change settings. Press the button again to confirm the

settings value, and to return to the recording screen.

[Q.MENU]

[Operation Lock Setting]

[Cursor] Disables the functions of the cursor button and the [MENU/SET] button.

[Touch Screen] Disables the touch functions of the touch panel.

[Dial] Disables the functions of the control dial.

[Focus Ring Lock]

[Video Button]

219

9. Menu Guide

Enables/disables the Touch operation.

Displays a picture immediately after it is taken.

You can display the recording screen in black and white.

This is convenient for focusing with MF.

[Touch Settings]

[Touch Screen] All touch operations.

[Touch Tab]

Operations of tabs, such as [ ] on the right side of the screen.

[Touch AF]

[AF]: Operation to optimise focus for a touched subject. (P102)

[AF+AE]:Operation to optimise focus and brightness. (P106)

[Touch Pad AF]

Operation to move the AF area by touching the monitor when the

viewfinder is in use. (P105)

> [Custom] > [Monitor / Display]

[Auto Review]

[Duration Time

(photo)]

Sets the display time of the recorded images after picture-taking.

[Duration Time

(4K PHOTO)]

Sets whether to display/hide the recorded images after 4K photo

recording.

[Duration Time

(Post Focus)]

Sets whether to display/hide the recorded images after recording with the

Post Focus function.

[Playback

Operation Priority]

Allows you to change or delete the playback image during Auto Review.

• When [Duration Time (photo)] is set to [HOLD], the images are displayed until the shutter

button is pressed halfway. [Playback Operation Priority] will be fixed to [ON].

• When [Grain Effect] is selected for [Photo Style], [Auto Review] is not displayed during [Time

Lapse Shot] and [Stop Motion Animation] recording.

[Monochrome Live View]

• Even if you use the HDMI output during recording, this function will not work for the connected

device.

• Recorded images will not be affected.

9. Menu Guide

220

You can check the effects of the chosen aperture and shutter speed on the recording

screen in Manual Exposure Mode.

Preview also operates in the MF Assist screen when [Preview While MF Assist] is set to

[ON] in [SET].

Displays the screen brighter to make it easier to check subjects and compositions even in

low-light environment.

• You can change the Recording Mode in which [Live View Boost] works by using [SET].

In-focus portions (portions on the screen with clear outlines) are highlighted when focus is

being adjusted manually.

• When [Detect Level] in [SET] is set to [HIGH], portions to be highlighted are reduced, allowing

you to achieve a more precise focus.

• Changing the [Detect Level] setting also changes the [Display Color] setting as follows.

[Constant Preview]

• This function does not work when using the flash.

[Live View Boost]

[MODE1] Setting for low brightness, with priority given to a soft display.

[MODE2] Setting for high brightness, with priority given to image visibility.

• This mode does not affect recorded images.

• Noise may be more noticeable in the screen than in the recorded image.

Not available in these cases:

• [Live View Boost] does not work in the following cases:

– When adjusting the exposure (when the shutter button is pressed halfway, for example)

– When recording a motion picture or 4K photo

– When using [Filter Settings]

– When using [Constant Preview]

[Peaking]

[Detect Level] [HIGH] [LOW]

[Display Color]

[ ] (Light blue) [ ] (Blue)

[ ] (Yellow) [ ] (Orange)

[ ] (Yellow-green) [ ] (Green)

[ ] (Pink) [ ] (Red)

[ ] (White) [ ] (Grey)

221

9. Menu Guide

Display the histogram.

You can set the position by pressing 3/4/2/1.

• Direct touch operation is also possible from the recording screen.

• A histogram is a graph that displays brightness along the horizontal axis (black

to white) and the number of pixels at each brightness level on the vertical axis.

It allows you to easily check a picture’s exposure.

A dark

B bright

This will set the pattern of guide lines displayed when taking a picture.

When [ ] is set, guideline positions can be set by pressing 3/4/2/1.

• You can also set the position directly by touching [ ] on the guideline of the recording screen.

The centre of the recording screen will be displayed as [+].

• Each time [ ] in [ ] is touched, the setting is switched in order of [ ] ([Detect Level]:

[LOW])

> [ ] ([Detect Level]: [HIGH]) > [OFF].

Not available in these cases:

• [Peaking] is not available for [Rough Monochrome] of Creative Video Mode.

• When [Live View Boost] is being used, [Peaking] is not available.

[Histogram]

• When the recorded picture and the histogram do not match each other under the

following conditions, the histogram is displayed in orange.

– During Exposure Compensation

– When the flash is activated

– When the correct exposure is not achieved, such as when the lighting is low.

• The histogram is an approximation in the Recording Mode.

[Guide Line]

Not available in these cases:

• The guide lines are not displayed in [Panorama Shot] in Scene Guide Mode.

[Center Marker]

9. Menu Guide

222

When the Auto Review function is activated or when playing back,

white saturated areas appear blinking in black and white.

Indicates parts that may become white saturated through overexposure in a zebra pattern.

Select [SET] to set the brightness to be processed as a zebra pattern.

• You can select a brightness value between [50%] and [105%]. In [Zebra 2], you can select

[OFF]. If you select [100%] or [105%], only the areas that are already white saturated are

displayed in a zebra pattern. The smaller the value is, the wider the brightness range to be

processed as a zebra pattern will be.

[Highlight]

• If there are any white saturated areas, we recommend compensating the exposure towards

negative referring to the histogram and then taking the picture again.

• This does not affect the recorded images.

Not available in these cases:

• The highlight display does not work in the following cases:

– During 4K photo playback

– During playback of images recorded with the Post Focus function

– When thumbnails are displayed

– During Calendar Playback

– When the display is enlarged

[Zebra Pattern]

[ZEBRA1] [ZEBRA2]

• If there are any white saturated areas, we recommend compensating the exposure towards

negative referring to the histogram and then taking the picture.

• Displayed zebra patterns will not be recorded.

• If you assign [Zebra Pattern] to [Fn Button Set] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu, each time

you press the Fn button to which the setting is assigned, the zebra pattern toggles as follows:

[Zebra 1]

> [Zebra 2] > [OFF].

If you set [Zebra 2] to [OFF], the pattern toggles in the order of [Zebra 1]

> [OFF]

223

9. Menu Guide

Display the exposure metre.

When you set the focus manually, an MF guide that allows

you to check the direction to achieve focus is displayed.

A Indicator for ¶ (infinity)

Display the recording information screen. (P49, 321)

This changes the angle of view during motion picture recording and still picture recording.

This will switch display between the number of recordable pictures and available recording

time.

This displays a selection screen when you set the mode dial to [] or [].

[Expo.Meter]

• Set to [ON] to display the Exposure metre when performing

Programme Shift, setting aperture, and setting shutter speed.

• Unsuitable areas of the range are displayed in red.

• When the Exposure metre is not displayed, switch the display

information for screen by pressing [DISP.].

• If no operations are performed for approximately 4 seconds, the Exposure metre disappears.

[MF Guide]

[Monitor Info. Disp.]

[Rec Area]

Displays the recording area according to the angle of view for still picture

recording.

Displays the recording area according to the angle of view for motion picture

recording.

• The recording area indicated is an approximation.

• When recording with the 4K Photo function or Post Focus function, [Rec Area] is fixed to [ ].

[Remaining Disp.]

Displays the number of recordable pictures.

Displays the available recording time for motion pictures.

[Menu Guide]

4.0

250 125 60 30 15

4.0 5.6 8.0

9. Menu Guide

224

Saves the focus position when you turn off the camera. When an interchangeable lens that

is compatible with power zoom is in use, the zoom position is also saved.

When an interchangeable lens with a focus selector switch and a focus button is being

used, this sets the function to be assigned to the focus button of that lens.

• You can call up the set function by setting the focus selector switch of the lens to [Fn] and then

pressing the focus button of the lens.

> [Custom] > [Lens / Others]

[Lens Position Resume]

[Lens Fn Button Setting]

Settings: [Focus Stop]/[AF/AE LOCK]/[AF-ON]/[Stabilizer]/[Focus Area Set]/

[AF Mode/MF]/[Preview]/[Focus Ring Lock]/[Off]/[Restore to Default]

• When [Focus Stop] is used, the focus is locked while the focus button is pressed and held.

225

9. Menu Guide

Face Recognition is a function which finds a face resembling a registered face and

priorities focus and exposure automatically. Even if the person is located towards the back

or on the end of a line in a group photo, the camera can still take a clear picture.

[Face Recog.]

[ON] Enables the Face Recognition function.

[OFF] Disables the Face Recognition function.

[MEMORY]

Allows you to register face images, or edit or delete registered information.

Face Settings

You can register information such as names and birthdays for face images of up to

6 people.

1 Press 3/4/2/1 to select the Face Recognition

frame that is not registered, and then press

[MENU/SET].

2 Take the picture adjusting the face with the guide.

• The faces of subjects other than people (pets, etc.)

cannot be registered.

• To display the description of the face registration,

press 1 or touch [ ].

3 Set the item.

• You can register up to 3 face images.

[Name]

It is possible to register names.

• For information on how to enter characters, refer to P64.

[Age] It is possible to register the birthday.

[Add

Images]

(Add

Images)

To add additional face images.

• Select a blank face image frame to register a new

image.

(Delete)

To delete one of the face images.

• Select the face image you want to delete.

Change or delete the information for a registered person

1 Press 3/4/2/1 to select the face image to edit or delete and then press

[MENU/SET].

2 Set the item.

[Info Edit]

Changing the information of an already registered person.

• Perform step 3 in “Face Settings”.

[Priority]

The focus and exposure are preferentially adjusted for

higher-priority faces.

• Rearrange and set the face priority.

[Delete] Deleting information of a registered person.

KEN

1HZ

9. Menu Guide

226

• The following functions will also work with the Face Recognition function.

In Recording Mode

– Display of corresponding name when camera detects a registered face

In Playback Mode

– Display of name and age

¢ Names of up to 3 people are displayed.

Precedence for the names displayed when taking pictures is determined according to the

order of registration.

Point of recording when registering the face images

• Face front with eyes open and mouth closed, making

sure the outline of the face, the eyes, or the eyebrows

are not covered with hair when registering.

• Make sure there is no extreme shading on the face when

registering.

(Flash will not flash during registration.)

(Good example for registering)

When face is not recognised during recording

• Register the face of same person indoors and outdoors, or with different expressions or

angles.

• Additionally register at the location of recording.

• When a person who is registered is not recognised, correct by re-registering.

• Face Recognition may not be possible or may not recognise faces correctly even for

registered faces, depending on the facial expression and environment.

• [Face Recog.] only works when the AF Mode is set to [š].

• During the Burst Mode, [Face Recog.] picture information can be attached to only the first

picture.

• When group pictures are played back, the name of the first picture of the set is displayed.

Not available in these cases:

• [Face Recog.] does not work in the following cases.

– When recording motion pictures

• [Face Recog.] cannot be set in the following cases:

– [Panorama Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

– [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)

– When recording 4K photos

– When recording with the Post Focus function

– When using [Time Lapse Shot]

227

9. Menu Guide

If you set the name and birthday of your baby or pet in advance, you can record their name

and age in months and years in the images.

You can display these at playback or stamp the recorded images using [Text Stamp].

Settings: [ ] ([Baby1])/[ ] ([Baby2])/[ ] ([Pet])/[OFF]/[SET]

∫ Setting [Age] or [Name]

1 Press 3/4 to select [SET] and then press [MENU/SET].

2 Press 3/4 to select [Baby1], [Baby2] or [Pet] and then press [MENU/SET].

3 Press 3/4 to select [Age] or [Name] and then press

[MENU/SET].

4 Press 3/4 to select [SET] and then press [MENU/

SET].

∫ To cancel the display of [Age] and [Name]

Select [OFF] in [Profile Setup].

[Profile Setup]

Enter [Age] (birthday).

Enter [Name].

• For information on how to enter characters, refer to P64.

• You can print out ages and names with “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.

Not available in these cases:

• [Profile Setup] is not available in the following cases:

– In Creative Video Mode

– When recording 4K photos

– When recording with the Post Focus function

• Ages and names are not recorded in the following cases:

– When recording motion pictures

– Still pictures recorded during motion picture recording ([ ] (Video Priority))

9. Menu Guide

228

[Setup] menu

Settings: [URL display]/[QR Code display]

Sets the times for the region where you live and your holiday destination.

• [Destination] can be set after setting up [Home].

After selecting [Destination] or [Home], press 2/1 to select an area, and press

[MENU/SET] to set.

“ [Destination]:

Travel destination area

A Current time of the destination area

B Time difference from home area

– [Home]:

Your home area

C Current time

D Time difference from GMT (Greenwich Mean Time)

• [Online Manual] (P228)

• [Cust.Set Mem.] (P80)

• [Clock Set] (P39)

•[World Time] (P228)

• [Travel Date] (P229)

•[Wi-Fi] (P230)

• [Bluetooth] (P230)

• [Wireless Connection Lamp] (P230)

• [Beep] (P230)

• [Headphone Volume] (P212)

• [Economy] (P231)

• [Monitor Display Speed] (P232)

• [Monitor Display]/[Viewfinder] (P232)

• [Monitor Luminance] (P232)

• [Eye Sensor] (P233)

• [Battery Use Priority] (P315)

• [USB Mode] (P233)

• [USB Power Supply] (P233)

• [TV Connection] (P234)

• [Language] (P234)

• [Version Disp.] (P234)

• [Folder / File Settings] (P235)

• [No.Reset] (P236)

•[Reset] (P236)

• [Reset Network Settings] (P237)

• [Pixel Refresh] (P237)

• [Sensor Cleaning] (P237)

• [Level Gauge Adjust.] (P237)

• [Demo Mode] (P237)

• [Format] (P33)

> [Setup]

[Online Manual]

[World Time]

229

9. Menu Guide

• If you are using Daylight Savings [ ], press 3. (The time will move forward by 1 hour.)

To return to the normal time, press 3 again.

• Set to [Home] when you have returned from your travel destination.

• If you cannot find the travel destination in the areas displayed on the screen, set by the time

difference from the home area.

[Travel Date]

[Travel Setup]

If you set your travel schedule and record images, elapsed days (how

many days after) of the travel will be recorded.

[Location]

When [Travel Setup] is set, you can set your travel destination.

• For information on how to enter characters, refer to P64.

• You can display the elapsed days and travel destination during playback or stamp them on

recorded pictures in [Text Stamp].

• The elapsed days and travel destination can be printed out using the software

“PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.

• The travel date is calculated using the date in the clock setting and the departure date you set.

If you set [World Time] to the travel destination, the travel date is calculated using the date in

the clock setting and the travel destination setting.

• When [Travel Setup] is set to [OFF], the number of days elapsed is not recorded. It is not

displayed even if [Travel Setup] is set to [SET] after recording.

• When the current date passes the return date, [Travel Setup] is automatically cancelled.

• [Travel Date] cannot be recorded for AVCHD motion pictures.

• [Location] cannot be recorded in the following cases:

– When recording motion pictures

– When recording 4K photos

– When recording with the Post Focus function

9. Menu Guide

230

∫ [Wi-Fi Function] (P256)

∫ [Wi-Fi Setup] (P298)

∫ [Bluetooth] (P260)

∫ [Remote Wakeup] (P266)

∫ [Returning from Sleep Mode] (P269)

∫ [Auto Transfer] (P271)

∫ [Location Logging] (P273)

∫ [Auto Clock Set] (P274)

∫ [Wi-Fi network settings]

Registers the Wi-Fi access point. (P293)

Wireless access points used to connect the camera to Wi-Fi networks will be registered

automatically.

This enables/disables the WIRELESS connection lamp.

If you select [OFF], they will not light/flash.

This allows you to set the electronic sound and the electronic shutter sound.

Settings: [Beep Volume]/[E-Shutter Vol]/[E-Shutter Tone]

[Wi-Fi]

[Bluetooth]

• Up to 17 wireless access points can be registered. If you try to register more than 17 access

points, the oldest registered access points will be deleted.

• Performing [Reset Network Settings] will delete registered wireless access points.

[Wireless Connection Lamp]

[Beep]

Not available in these cases:

• [Beep] is not available when [Silent Mode] is set to [ON].

231

9. Menu Guide

This is a function to automatically turn the camera to sleep (power save) status or turn off

the viewfinder/monitor if no operation is performed for a set time. Reduces battery

consumption.

[Economy]

[Sleep Mode] Sets the amount of time until the camera is put into sleep.

[Sleep

Mode(Wi-Fi)]

Sets the camera to sleep 15 minutes after being disconnected from Wi-Fi.

[Auto LVF/

Monitor Off]

Sets the amount of time it takes for the viewfinder/monitor to turn off.

(The camera is not turned off.)

[Power Save LVF

Shooting]

Puts the camera into sleep when the recording screen is displayed using

automatic viewfinder/monitor switching.

• [Power Save LVF Shooting] does not operate when [Time] is set to [OFF].

[Time] Sets the amount of time until the camera is put into sleep.

[Display]

Sets the screen where the camera is put to sleep.

[Only Monitor Info.]:

Puts the camera into sleep only when the on-monitor recording

information screen is displayed. (P49)

[All Live View]:

Puts the camera into sleep from any screen during recording

standby.

• To recover from [Sleep Mode], [Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)], or [Power Save LVF Shooting], perform

one of the following operations:

– Press the shutter button halfway.

– Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF] and then [ON] again.

• To recover from [Auto LVF/Monitor Off], press one of the buttons.

• When using the AC Adaptor (optional) and the DC Coupler (optional):

– [Sleep Mode], [Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)] and [Power Save LVF Shooting] do not operate.

– [Auto LVF/Monitor Off] is fixed to [5MIN.].

Not available in these cases:

• [Economy] does not work in the following cases.

– When connecting to a PC or a printer

– When recording or playing back motion pictures

– During a slide show

– When recording with [4K Pre-Burst]

– When recording in [Multi Exp.]

– When using [Time Lapse Shot]

– When using [Stop Motion Animation] (when [Auto Shooting] is set)

– When recording with Live View Composite

– When using the HDMI output during recording

9. Menu Guide

232

This sets the monitor frame rate.

Brightness, colour, or red or blue tint of the monitor/viewfinder is adjusted.

1 Select the settings by pressing 3/4, and adjust with 2/1.

2 Press [MENU/SET] to set.

[Monitor Display Speed]

[30fps] Reduces the power consumption, extending the operating time.

[60fps] Displays movements smoother.

• The settings of [Monitor Display Speed] do not affect the recorded images.

• The setting for the viewfinder is fixed at [60fps].

[Monitor Display]/[Viewfinder]

• It will adjust the monitor when the monitor is in use, and the viewfinder when the viewfinder is

in use.

• Some subjects may appear differently from actuality on the monitor. However, this does not

affect the recorded pictures.

[Monitor Luminance]

„ (Auto)

During recording, this automatically adjusts the brightness depending on

how bright it is around the camera.

During playback, it adjusts the brightness to the level of the last recording.

(If recording has never been performed since the camera was turned on,

the brightness will be set to the standard level.)

(Mode1) Make the monitor brighter.

(Mode2) Make the monitor darker.

• Some subjects may appear differently from actuality on the monitor. However, this does not

affect the recorded pictures.

• When [„] or [ ] is set, the usage time is reduced.

…

233

9. Menu Guide

Sets the communication method when connecting using the USB connection cable

(supplied).

Supplies power via the USB connection cable when the camera is connected to a PC.

[Eye Sensor]

[Sensitivity] This will set the sensitivity of the eye sensor.

[LVF/Monitor

Switch]

This will set the method for switching between the monitor and viewfinder.

[LVF/MON AUTO] (automatic switching between the monitor and

viewfinder)

[LVF] (viewfinder)

[MON] (monitor)

• If you press [LVF] to switch the display, the [LVF/Monitor Switch] setting will

also switch.

[USB Mode]

y [Select on

connection]

Select this setting to select the USB communication system when

connecting to another device.

z [PC(Storage)] Select this setting to export images to a connected PC.

{ [PictBridge(PTP)] Select this setting when connecting to a printer supporting PictBridge.

[USB Power Supply]

• Even if this item is set to [OFF], power will be supplied when the AC adaptor (supplied) is

connected.

9. Menu Guide

234

[HDMI Mode (Play)]:

This sets the video format to be used for output in Playback Mode when the camera and a TV or

monitor is connected with an HDMI micro cable.

[HDMI Info Display (Rec)]:

Select whether or not to output the information display of the camera to an external device

connected via HDMI. (P302)

[VIERA Link]:

If you select [ON], operations of the camera and the VIERA Link compatible equipment

connected to the camera with an HDMI micro cable are automatically linked, enabling you to

control the camera with the remote control of the VIERA Link compatible equipment.

Set the language displayed on the screen.

This enables the firmware versions of the camera and lens to be checked.

[TV Connection]

[AUTO]

Outputs images at an output resolution suited to the

connected TV.

[4K/25p]/[1080p]/[1080i]/[720p]/

[576p]

Outputs images at the selected resolution.

• Even when [4K/25p] is set, MP4 motion pictures

recorded with [4K/100M/30p] will be output at a

resolution of [4K/30p].

• Even when [576p] is set, depending on the connected

TV, images will be output at a resolution of [480p].

• If no image appears on your TV when [AUTO] is set, switch to a setting other than [AUTO] that

can display images on the TV. (Please read the operating instructions for the TV.)

[Language]

• If you set a different language by mistake, select [~] from the menu icons to set the desired

language.

[Version Disp.]

• To display information about the software on the unit, press [MENU/SET] on the version

display screen.

235

9. Menu Guide

Set the folder and file name patterns in which images are to be saved.

[Folder / File Settings]

Folder name File name

Folder number (3-digits, 100–999)

Colour space ([P]: sRGB, [ _ ]:

AdobeRGB)

5-digit user-defined segment

3-digit user-defined segment

File number (4-digits, 0001–9999)

File extension

[Select Folder]

Specifies the folder to which images are to be saved.

• The folder name is indicated with the number of files that can be stored.

[Create a New

Folder]

[OK]

Creates a new folder with the same 5-digit user-defined

segment as the current folder name setting.

[Change]

Allows you to redefine the 5-digit user-defined segment

before creating a new folder.

• Available characters: alphabet (upper case characters),

numbers, and [ _ ]

• For information on how to enter characters, refer to P64.

• A new folder with an incremented folder number is created.

• If there are no recordable folders in the card, a screen for resetting the

folder number is displayed.

[File Name

Setting]

[Folder

Number Link]

Uses the folder number of the folder name as the file

name’s 3-digit user-defined segment.

[User Setting]

Allows you to define and set the 3-digit user-defined

segment of the file name.

• Available characters: alphabet (upper case characters),

numbers, and [ _ ]

• For information on how to enter characters, refer to P64.

100ABCDE

 

PABC0001.JPG

  

9. Menu Guide

236

Reset the file number of the next recording to 0001.

The following settings are reset to the default:

– Recording settings

– Setup settings ([Wi-Fi Setup] and [Bluetooth] settings)

– Custom settings ([Face Recog.] and [Profile Setup] settings)

– Setup/custom settings (except for [Wi-Fi Setup], [Bluetooth], [Face Recog.] and [Profile

Setup])

• Each folder can store up to 1000 files.

• File numbers are assigned sequentially from 0001 to 9999 in the order of recording. If you

change the storage folder, a continuing number from the last file number will be assigned.

• In the following cases, a new folder with an incremented folder number will be created

automatically when the next file is saved:

– The current folder contains 1000 files

– The current folder contains a file with the file number “9999”

• New folders cannot be created when there are folders numbered from 100 all the way up to

999. In this case, we recommend saving their data to a computer or similar device and

formatting the card.

[No.Reset]

• When recording is performed after resetting this item, the folder number is updated and the

file number starts from 0001.

• A folder number between 100 and 999 can be assigned.

The folder number should be reset before it reaches 999. We recommend formatting the card

after saving the data on a PC or elsewhere.

• To reset the folder number to 100:

1 Perform [Format] to format the card.

2 Perform [No.Reset] to reset the file number.

3 Select [Yes] on the folder number reset screen.

[Reset]

• When the setup/custom settings are reset, the following settings are also reset.

– The [World Time] setting

– The settings of [Travel Date] (departure date, return date, location)

– The settings of [Rotate Disp.], [Picture Sort] and [Delete Confirmation] in the [Playback]

• Folder numbers and clock settings are not reset.

• When requesting a repair or transferring/disposing of the camera, refer to “About the personal

information” on P341.

237

9. Menu Guide

The following network settings are reset to the default:

– [Wi-Fi Setup] (Excluding [LUMIX CLUB])

– Registered device information in [Bluetooth] and values in [Wi-Fi network settings]

It will perform optimisation of imaging device and image processing.

Dust reduction to blow off the debris and dust that have affixed to the front of the imaging

device is performed.

You can try Post Focus operations, such as focusing and Peaking, with the image picture.

[Reset Network Settings]

• When requesting a repair or transferring/disposing of the camera, refer to “About the personal

information” on P341.

[Pixel Refresh]

• Imaging device and image processing is optimised when the camera is purchased. Use this

function when bright spots that do not exist in the subject get recorded.

• Turn the camera off and on after the pixels are corrected.

[Sensor Cleaning]

• The dust reduction function will operate automatically if you set the camera on/off switch to

[ON]. Use this function if the dust is particularly noticeable.

[Level Gauge Adjust.]

[Adjust.]

Hold the camera in a horizontal position, and press [MENU/SET]. The

level gauge will be adjusted.

[Level Gauge

Value Reset]

Restores the default level gauge setting.

[Demo Mode]

9. Menu Guide

238

[My Menu] menu

23 menus.

[My Menu Setting]

> [My Menu] > [My Menu Setting]

[Add] Specifies the menu to be displayed in My Menu to register it.

[Sorting]

Rearranges the menus displayed in My Menu. Select the menu you want to

move and set the destination.

[Delete]

Deletes registered menus.

[Delete Item]: Deletes selected menus.

[Delete All]: Deletes all of the menus.

[Display from

My Menu]

Sets the first menu to be displayed when the menu screen is displayed.

[ON]: Displays My Menu.

[OFF]: Displays the last-used menu.

239

9. Menu Guide

[Playback] menu

∫ How to select an image(s) after selecting [Single] or [Multi]

• When [Single] and [Multi] are not available, select an image in the same way as when [Single]

is selected.

• [Slide Show] (P240)

• [Playback Mode] (P241)

• [Protect] (P242)

• [Rating] (P242)

• [Title Edit] (P243)

• [Face Rec Edit] (P243)

• [RAW Processing] (P244)

• [4K PHOTO Bulk Saving] (P128)

• [Light Composition] (P247)

• [Sequence Composition] (P248)

• [Clear Retouch] (P249)

• [Text Stamp] (P250)

•[Resize] (P251)

• [Cropping] (P252)

• [Rotate] (P253)

• [Video Divide] (P253)

• [Time Lapse Video] (P254)

• [Stop Motion Video] (P254)

• [Rotate Disp.] (P254)

•[Picture Sort] (P255)

• [Delete Confirmation] (P255)

• The camera may not play back images recorded on other devices correctly, and the functions

of the camera may not be available for the images.

[Single] setting

1 Press 2/1 to select the picture.

2 Press [MENU/SET].

• If [Set/Cancel] is displayed at the right bottom of the

screen, the setting is cancelled when [MENU/SET] is

pressed again.

[Multi] setting

When a screen similar to the one on the right is displayed:

1 Press 3/4/2/1 to select the picture and then press

[MENU/SET] (repeat).

• The setting is cancelled when [MENU/SET] is pressed

again.

2 Press [DISP.] to execute.

When a screen similar to the one on the right is displayed:

Press 3/4/2/1 to select the picture, and then press

[MENU/SET] to set (repeat).

• The setting is cancelled when [MENU/SET] is pressed again.

6HW

ュリヴヱハ

6HW&DQFHO

9. Menu Guide

240

You can play back the pictures you have taken in synchronisation with music, and you can

do this in sequence while leaving a fixed interval between each of the pictures.

You can also put together a slide show composed of only still pictures, only motion

pictures, etc.

We recommend this feature when you view your pictures by connecting the camera to a

TV.

1 Select the group to play back by pressing 3/4, and then press [MENU/SET].

• If you select [Picture Only], 4K burst files and images recorded with the Post Focus

function will also be played back.

• For images recorded with the Post Focus function, only an in-focus representative image

will be chosen and played back.

2 Press 3/4 to select [Start] and then press [MENU/SET].

∫ Operations during a slide show

[Slide Show]

> [Playback] > [Slide Show]

Button

operation

Touch

operation

Description of

operation

Button

operation

Touch

operation

Description of

operation

3 Play/Pause 4 Exit slide show

Back to previous

picture

1 Ahead to next picture

Reduce volume level

Increase volume

level

241

9. Menu Guide

∫ Changing the slide show settings

You can change the settings for slide show playback by selecting [Effect] or [Setup] on the

slide show menu screen.

Playback in [Normal Play], [Picture Only] or [Video Only] can be selected.

Select the group to play back by pressing 3/4, and then press [MENU/SET].

• If you select [Picture Only], 4K burst files and images recorded with the Post Focus function will

also be played back.

[Effect]

This allows you to select the screen effects when switching from one

picture to the next.

[Setup]

[Duration]

• [Duration] can be set only when [OFF] has been selected

as the [Effect] setting.

[Repeat] [ON]/[OFF]

[Sound]

[AUTO]:

Music is played when the still pictures are played back,

and audio is played when the motion pictures are played

back.

[Music]:

Music is played back.

[Audio]:

Audio of motion pictures is played back.

[OFF]:

There will be no sound.

Not available in these cases:

• The [Effect] setting does not work while the following images are played back in a slide show:

– 4K burst files

– Images recorded with the Post Focus function

– Group Pictures

• The [Duration] setting does not work while the following images are played back in a slide

show:

– Motion pictures

– 4K burst files

– Images recorded with the Post Focus function

– Panorama pictures

– Group Pictures

[Playback Mode]

> [Playback] > [Playback Mode]

9. Menu Guide

242

You can set protection for pictures you do not want to delete by mistake.

Select the picture. (P239)

• [999+] is displayed on the screen, if the total number of protects you set for a group pictures is

more than 1000 pictures.

∫ Cancelling all the [Protect] settings

Press 3/4 to select [Cancel], and then press [MENU/SET].

You can set five different rating levels for images to do the following:

• Delete all the pictures not set as ratings.

• Check the JPEG image rating level in the file details display in operating systems such as

Windows 10, Windows 8.1, and Windows 8.

1 Select the picture. (P239)

2 Press 2/1 to set the rating level (1–5), and press [MENU/SET] to set.

• When [Multi] has been selected, repeat steps 1 and 2 for each picture.

(It is not possible to use the same setting for a multiple number of pictures.)

• The number of a group pictures will be displayed, if you set for a group pictures. [999+] is

displayed, if the group pictures is more than 1000 pictures.

∫ Cancelling all the [Rating] settings

Press 3/4 to select [Cancel], and then press [MENU/SET].

• [Cancel] cannot be selected when [Playback Mode] is set to [Picture Only] or [Video Only].

[Protect]

> [Playback] > [Protect]

If you set the Write-Protect switch on the card to [LOCK], images will not be

deleted even when protection is not set for them.

• Be aware that the [Protect] setting may not work on other devices.

• Even if you protect pictures on a card, they will be deleted if the card is formatted.

[Rating]

> [Playback] > [Rating]

• [AVCHD] motion pictures can only be set to [¡5].

243

9. Menu Guide

You can add text (comments) to pictures. After text has been registered, it can be stamped

in prints using [Text Stamp].

1 Select the picture. (P239)

•[’] is displayed for pictures with titles already registered.

2 Enter the text. (P64)

You can clear and replace all information relating to face recognition in selected images.

1 Press 3/4 to select [REPLACE] or [DELETE], and then press [MENU/SET].

2 Press 2/1 to select the picture and then press [MENU/SET].

3 Press 2/1 to select the person and then press [MENU/SET].

4 (When [REPLACE] is selected)

Press 3/4/2/1 to select the person to replace and then press [MENU/SET].

[Title Edit]

> [Playback] > [Title Edit]

• To delete the title, erase all the text in the text input screen.

• You can print out texts (comments) using the software “ PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.

• You can set up to 100 pictures at one time with [Multi].

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following cases:

– Motion pictures

– 4K burst files

– Images recorded with the Post Focus function

– Images recorded with [Quality] set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]

[Face Rec Edit]

> [Playback] > [Face Rec Edit]

• Cleared information regarding the [Face Recog.] cannot be restored.

• The Face Recognition information of pictures in a group has to be edited at once.

(You cannot edit one picture at a time.)

• Editing of group pictures can be performed only on the first picture of each set.

9. Menu Guide

244

You can process the pictures taken in RAW format. The processed pictures will be saved

in JPEG format.

1 Select RAW images with 2/1, and then press

[MENU/SET].

2 Press 3/4 to select an item.

• You can set the following items. The settings you used for

the recording are selected when you start setting these

items.

[RAW Processing]

> [Playback] > [RAW Processing]

[White Balance]

Allows you to select a White Balance preset and adjust it. If you

select an item with [ ], you can process the image with the setting

at the time of recording.

[Brightness

correction]

Allows you to correct the brightness within the range between j2EV

and i2EV.

[Photo Style]

Allows you to select a photo style effect.

• You cannot select [V-Log L] for pictures taken with effects other

than [V-Log L].

• The effect for pictures taken with [V-Log L] will be fixed to [V-Log L].

[i.Dynamic] Allows you to select an [i.Dynamic] setting.

[Contrast] Allows you to adjust the contrast.

[Highlight] Allows you to adjust the brightness of bright portions.

[Shadow] Allows you to adjust the brightness of dark portions.

[Saturation]/

[Color Tone]

Allows you to adjust the saturation. (When [Monochrome],

[L.Monochrome] or [L.Monochrome D] is selected in [Photo Style],

you can adjust the colour tone.)

[Filter Effect]

Allows you to select a filter effect. (Only when [Monochrome],

[L.Monochrome] or [L.Monochrome D] is selected in [Photo Style].)

[Grain Effect]

You can set the graininess. (Only when [Monochrome],

[L.Monochrome] or [L.Monochrome D] is selected for [Photo Style].)

[Noise Reduction] Allows you to adjust the noise reduction setting.

[i.Resolution] Allows you to select an [i.Resolution] setting.

[Sharpness] Allows you to adjust the resolution effect.

245

9. Menu Guide

3 Press [MENU/SET] and set.

• Refer to “How to set each item” on P245.

4 Press [MENU/SET].

• This operation returns you to the screen in step 2. To set other items, repeat steps 2

through

5 Select [Begin Processing] with 3/4, and then press [MENU/SET].

∫ How to set each item

• When [Noise Reduction], [i.Resolution] or [Sharpness] is selected, the comparison screen

cannot be displayed.

• Each time you touch the screen twice, the display switches between enlarged and normal view.

[More Settings]

Use 3/4 to select items and press [MENU/SET] to perform the

following operations.

[Reinstate Adjustments]:

Returns the settings to the ones you used during the recording.

[Color Space]:

Allows you to select a [Color Space] setting from [sRGB] or [Adobe

RGB].

[Picture Size]:

Allows you to select the size in which the image will be saved in

JPEG format.

Button

operation

Touch

operation

Description of operation

2/1//

Dragging Selects a setting.

[WB K

Set]

Displays the screen that lets you

set the colour temperature. (When

[ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ] is

selected in [White Balance])

4 [Adjust.]

Displays the screen that lets you

fine-adjust the White Balance.

(only when [White Balance] is set)

[DISP.] [DISP.] Displays the comparison screen.

[MENU/SET] [Set]

Sets the adjusted level and returns

you to the item selection screen.

+1 +2

DISP.

WBWBWBWBWBWBWBWBWBWBWB

AWBc

WAWBw

AWB

AWBAWB

9. Menu Guide

246

On the comparison screen, you can use the following operations to make adjustments:

A Current setting

• If you touch the picture at the centre, it will be enlarged.

If you touch [ ], the picture will be reduced to the original size.

Button

operation

Touch

operation

Description of operation

2/1//

Dragging Selects a setting.

[DISP.] [DISP.] Returns you to the setting screen.

[MENU/SET] [Set]

Sets the adjusted level and returns

you to the item selection screen.

• The effects applied through the RAW processing on the camera and those applied through the

RAW processing on the software “SILKYPIX Developer Studio” are not completely identical.

• RAW images recorded with the camera are always recorded in the [4:3] (5184k3888) aspect

ratio. When you process them with [RAW Processing] in the [Playback] menu, however, their

aspect ratio and [Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Rec]) settings at the time of recording will be applied to

them.

• (When setting [Picture Size] in [More Settings])

When images enlarged with [Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Rec]) are processed, their picture size cannot

be set larger than the size at the time of recording.

• The [White Balance] setting of pictures taken with multiple exposures is fixed to the setting at

the time of recording.

• Edit group images one by one. The edited images will be saved as new images separate from

the original group images.

Not available in these cases:

• [RAW Processing] is not available when an HDMI micro cable is connected.

• RAW processing cannot be performed on RAW images recorded with other devices.

DISP.

247

9. Menu Guide

Select multiple frames from 4K burst files that you wish to combine. Parts of the image that

are brighter than the preceding frame will be superimposed on the preceding frame to

combine the frames into one picture.

1 Press 2/1 to select the 4K photo burst files and press [MENU/SET].

2 Choose the combining method, and then press [MENU/SET].

3 Select [Yes] at the confirmation screen, and then press [MENU/SET].

[Light Composition]

> [Playback] > [Light Composition]

[Composite Merging] setting

Select the frames you want to combine to superimpose brighter parts.

1 Drag the slide bar or use

3/4/2/1 to select the

frames to combine.

2 Press [MENU/SET].

• The selected frames are remembered, and the display

goes to the preview screen.

• Press 3/4 to select items and press [MENU/SET] to

perform the following operations.

– [Next]:

Lets you select more frames for combining.

– [Reselect]:

Discards the frame selected immediately before and lets you select a different image.

3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select more frames to combine.

• You can select up to 40 frames.

4 Press 3/4 to select [Save], and then press [MENU/SET].

[Range Merging] setting

Select the first and last frames to superimpose the brighter parts of the frames

between them.

1 Select the frame of the first picture, and press [MENU/SET].

• The selection method is the same as in step 1 of [Composite Merging] setting.

2 Select the frame of the last picture, and press [MENU/SET].

• Pictures are saved in JPEG format. Recording information (Exif information) of the first frame

such as shutter speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity are also registered.

9. Menu Guide

248

Select multiple frames from a 4K burst file to create a sequence composition of a moving

subject into one picture.

1 Press 2/1 to select the 4K photo burst files and press [MENU/SET].

2 Select frames to combine.

[Sequence Composition]

> [Playback] > [Sequence Composition]

Select the frames so that the moving subject will not overlap on the preceding or

subsequent frames. (The sequence composition may not be created properly if the

subject overlaps.)

1 Drag the slide bar or use

3/4/2/1 to select the

frames to combine.

2 Press [MENU/SET].

• The selected frames are remembered, and the display

goes to the preview screen.

• Press 3/4 to select items and press [MENU/SET] to

perform the following operations.

– [Next]:

Lets you select more frames for combining.

– [Reselect]:

Discards the frame selected immediately before and lets you select a different image.

3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select more frames to combine.

• You can select 3 to 40 frames.

4 Press 3/4 to select [Save], and then press [MENU/SET].

• Pictures are saved in JPEG format. Recording information (Exif information) of the first frame

such as shutter speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity are also registered.

Tips for [Sequence Composition]

We recommend using a tripod to take pictures for [Sequence Composition].

249

9. Menu Guide

• [Clear Retouch] is a setting to be used through

touch operations and automatically enables

touch operation.

1 Press 2/1 to select a picture, and

then press [MENU/SET].

2 Drag your finger over the part you want to delete.

• The parts to be erased are coloured.

• To return the coloured part back to its previous state, touch

[Undo].

3 Touch [Set].

4 Touch [Save] or press [MENU/SET].

[Clear Retouch]

[Playback]

[Clear Retouch]

Erasing details (enlarging the display)

1 Touch [SCALING].

• Pinching out/pinching in the screen allows you to

enlarge/reduce it.

• Dragging the screen allows you to move the

enlarged part.

2 Touch [REMOVE].

• This will bring you back to the operation of dragging

your finger over the part you want to delete. The part

you want to delete can be dragged even while the picture is enlarged.

• Pictures may appear unnatural because the background of deleted parts is artificially created.

• For group pictures, perform [Clear Retouch] on each picture.

(They cannot be edited at once.)

• When [Clear Retouch] is performed on group pictures, they are saved as new pictures

separate from the original ones.

Not available in these cases:

• [Clear Retouch] is not available in the following cases:

– When the viewfinder display is in use

– When an HDMI micro cable is connected

• This function is not available in the following types of images:

– Motion pictures

– 4K burst files

– Images recorded with the Post Focus function

– Panorama pictures

– Pictures taken with [ ]

6&$/,1*

5(029(

6HW8QGR

6&$/,1*

5(029(

6HW8QGR

9. Menu Guide

250

You can stamp recording information on recorded images.

1 Select the picture. (P239)

•[‘] appears on screen if the picture is stamped with text.

2 Press 3/4 to select [Set], and then press [MENU/SET].

3 Press [ ] to return to the previous screen.

4 Press 3 to select [OK], and then press [MENU/SET].

[Text Stamp]

> [Playback] > [Text Stamp]

[Shooting Date] Stamps the recording date.

[Name]

[] (Face Recognition):

Name registered in [Face Recog.] will be stamped.

[] (Baby/Pet):

Name registered in [Profile Setup] will be stamped.

[Location] Stamps the travel destination name set under [Location].

[Travel Date] Stamps the travel date set under [Travel Date].

[Title] Title input in the [Title Edit] will be stamped.

• When you print pictures stamped with text, the date will be printed over the stamped text if you

specify printing of the date at the photo shop or on the printer.

• You can set up to 100 pictures at one time in [Multi].

• The picture quality may deteriorate when text stamping is carried out.

• When you stamp pictures in a group, the stamped ones are saved separately from the original

ones in the group.

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following cases:

– Motion pictures

– 4K burst files

– Images recorded with the Post Focus function

– Panorama pictures

– Pictures recorded without setting the clock and title

– Pictures stamped with [Text Stamp]

– Pictures recorded with [Quality] set to [ ]

LISA

251

9. Menu Guide

To allow easy posting to web pages, attachment to e-mail etc., picture size (number of

pixels) is reduced.

[Resize]

> [Playback] > [Resize]

Select the picture and size.

[Single] setting

1 Press 2/1 to select the picture, and then press

[MENU/SET].

2 Press 3/4 to select the size, and then press

[MENU/SET].

[Multi] setting

1 Press 3/4 to select the size, and then press

[MENU/SET].

2 Press 3/4/2/1 to select the picture, and then

press [MENU/SET] to set (repeat).

• The setting is cancelled when [MENU/SET] is pressed

again.

3 Press [DISP.] to execute.

• You can set up to 100 pictures at one time in [Multi].

• The picture quality of the resized picture will deteriorate.

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following cases:

– Motion pictures

– 4K burst files

– Images recorded with the Post Focus function

– Panorama pictures

– Group Pictures

– Pictures stamped with [Text Stamp]

– Pictures recorded with [Quality] set to [ ]

4:3

6HW

ュリヴヱハ

9. Menu Guide

252

You can enlarge and then clip the important part of the recorded picture.

1 Press 2/1 to select the picture, and then press [MENU/SET].

2 Use the rear dial and press 3/4/2/1 to select the parts to be cropped.

3 Press [MENU/SET].

[Cropping]

> [Playback] > [Cropping]

Button operation

Touch

operation

Description of operation

Enlarges the picture

Reduces the picture

3/4/2/1 Drag Moves the enlarged area

• The picture quality of the cropped picture will deteriorate.

• Crop one picture at a time when you want to crop the pictures in a picture group.

(You cannot edit all pictures in a group at once.)

• When you crop pictures in a group, the cropped ones are saved separately from the original

ones in the group.

• Information regarding the Face Recognition in the original picture will not be copied to images

having undergone [Cropping].

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following cases:

– Motion pictures

– 4K burst files

– Images recorded with the Post Focus function

– Panorama pictures

– Pictures stamped with [Text Stamp]

– Pictures recorded with [Quality] set to [ ]

253

9. Menu Guide

Rotate pictures manually in 90o steps.

• The [Rotate] function is disabled when [Rotate Disp.] is set to [OFF].

1 Press 2/1 to select the picture and then press [MENU/SET].

2 Select the rotation direction.

[]:

The picture rotates clockwise in steps of 90o.

[]:

The picture rotates counter-clockwise in steps of 90o.

Recorded motion picture and 4K burst files can be divided in two. It is recommended for

when you want to divide a part you need with a part you do not need.

Dividing a file is permanent. Decide before you divide!

1 Press 2/1 to select the file to divide, and then press [MENU/SET].

[Rotate] (The picture is rotated manually.)

> [Playback] > [Rotate]

[Video Divide]

> [Playback] > [Video Divide]

2 Press 3 at the location to divide.

• You can finely adjust the location for division by pressing

2/1 while the file is paused.

3 Press 4.

• The file may be lost if the card or battery is removed while

processing the dividing.

Not available in these cases:

• It may not be possible to divide a file at a point near the beginning or end.

• This function is not available in the following cases:

– When the recording time is short.

9. Menu Guide

254

This function allows you to create a motion picture from a picture group recorded with

[Time Lapse Shot].

1 Select the [Time Lapse Shot] picture group with 2/1, and then press [MENU/

SET].

2 Create a motion picture by selecting the methods for creating it.

• Refer to P142 for details.

A Motion picture is created from group pictures taken with [Stop Motion Animation].

1 Select the Stop Motion Animation group with 2/1, and then press [MENU/SET].

2 Create a motion picture by selecting the methods for creating it.

• Refer to P142 for details.

This mode allows you to display pictures vertically if they were recorded holding the

camera vertically.

[Time Lapse Video]

> [Playback] > [Time Lapse Video]

[Stop Motion Video]

> [Playback] > [Stop Motion Video]

[Rotate Disp.] (The picture is automatically rotated and displayed.)

> [Playback] > [Rotate Disp.] > [ON]

Not available in these cases:

• When you play back pictures on a PC, they cannot be displayed in the rotated direction unless

the OS or software is compatible with Exif.

Exif is a file format for still pictures which allows recording information etc. to be added. It was

established by “JEITA (Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries

Association)”.

255

9. Menu Guide

You can set the order in which the camera displays images during playback.

This sets which option, [Yes] or [No], will be highlighted first when the confirmation screen

for deleting a picture is displayed.

It is set to [“No” first] at the time of purchase.

[Picture Sort]

> [Playback] > [Picture Sort]

[FILE NAME]

Displays images by folder name/file name. This display format allows you

to locate images in the card easily.

[DATE/TIME]

Displays images by recording date. If the card contains pictures taken with

more than one camera, this display format is convenient for looking for

images.

• When you insert another card, images may not be displayed by [DATE/TIME] first.

The images will be displayed by [DATE/TIME] if you wait for a while.

[Delete Confirmation]

> [Playback] > [Delete Confirmation]

[“Yes” first] [Yes] is highlighted first, so deletion can be done quickly.

[“No” first] [No] is highlighted first. Accidental deletion of pictures is avoided.

256

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

What you can do with the Wi-Fi

/Bluetooth

function

• These operating instructions refer to both smartphones and tablets as smartphones from this

point on unless noted otherwise.

Controlling with a Smartphone

• Remote shooting (P267)

• Playing back/saving recorded images

and sending them to social media sites

(P270)

• Editing motion pictures recorded with

Snap Movie (P275)

Connect to a smartphone that supports

Bluetooth Low Energy to expand the

scope of applications

• Pairing (connection setup) (P260)

• Camera power operations (P266)

• Shutter Remote Control (Bulb recording)

(P268)

• Sending recorded images to a

smartphone automatically (P271)

• Recording location information of a

smartphone on recorded images (P273)

• Synchronising the camera’s clock with a

smartphone (P274)

Displaying pictures on a TV (P276)

Printing Wirelessly (P281)

Sending images to AV device (P282)

Sending images to PC (P283)

Using Web services (P285)

257

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

Wi-Fi function/Bluetooth function

∫ Before Use

• Set the clock. (P39)

• To use the Wi-Fi function on this unit, a wireless access point or a destination device equipped

with the wireless LAN function is required.

∫ About the WIRELESS connection lamp

• In [Wireless Connection Lamp] in the [Setup] menu, you can set

the lamp so that it will not light/flash. (P230)

∫ About the [Wi-Fi] button

In these operating instructions, a Fn button to which [Wi-Fi] is assigned is referred to as

the [Wi-Fi] button.

(By default, [Wi-Fi] is assigned to [Fn4] when the camera is in Recording Mode, while it is

assigned to [Fn1] when the camera is in Playback Mode.)

• For information about the Fn button, refer to P60.

Steps for pressing [Wi-Fi] (in Recording Mode)

1 Touch [ ].

2 Touch [ ].

∫ Operations that can be performed by pressing [Wi-Fi]

When the camera is not connected to Wi-Fi, press [Wi-Fi]. The camera will then be

ready to be connected to the smartphone. You can connect the camera directly to

the smartphone. (P262)

• When the camera is ready to be connected, you can press [DISP.] to connect with the same

settings as used previously. This is a convenient and quick way to establish a connection.

(P296)

Lit blue

When the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function is ON or

connected

Blinking blue

When sending image data by operating the

camera

Fn5

Fn4

Fn6

Fn8

Fn7

Fn4

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

258

After connecting to a Wi-Fi network, you can perform the following operations by

pressing [Wi-Fi]:

• Depending on the Wi-Fi function being used or the connection destination, you may not be able

to perform some of these operations.

∫ Describing method

When “select [Select a destination from History]”, etc. is

described in a step, perform any of the following operations.

[Terminate the Connection] Terminates the Wi-Fi connection.

[Change the Destination]

Terminates the Wi-Fi connection, and allows you to select

a different Wi-Fi connection.

[Change Settings for Sending

Images]

(P279)

[Register the Current Destination

to Favorite]

Registering the current connection destination or the

connection method, you can easily connect with the same

connection method next time.

[Network Address] (P299)

Button operation: Select [Select a destination from History]

with the cursor button, and then press

[MENU/SET].

Touch operation: Touch [Select a destination from History].

• Do not remove the memory card or battery or move to an area without any reception

while sending images.

• The camera cannot be used to connect to a public wireless LAN connection.

• We strongly recommend that you set an encryption to maintain information security.

• It is recommended to use a fully charged battery when sending images.

• When sending images on a mobile network, high packet communication fees may be incurred

depending on the details of your contract.

• Pictures may not be completely sent depending on radio wave conditions. If the connection is

terminated while sending pictures, pictures with missing sections may be sent.

259

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

Connecting to a smartphone

You can use a smartphone to operate the camera from a remote location.

You need to install “Panasonic Image App” (referred to as “Image App” from this point on)

on your smartphone.

“Panasonic Image App ” is an application for smartphones provided by Panasonic.

•OS

• Use the latest version.

• Supported OSs are current as of April 2019 and are subject to change.

• The service may not be able to be used properly depending on the type of smartphone being

used.

Refer to the support site below for details about the “Image App”.

https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/

(This Site is English only.)

• When downloading the app on a mobile network, high packet communication fees may be

incurred depending on the details of your contract.

• Read the [Help] in the “Image App” menu for further details on how to operate.

• When you operate the “Image App” on the smartphone that is connected to the camera via

Wi-Fi, [Help] in the “Image App” may not be displayed depending on the smartphone. In this

case, after terminating the connection to the camera, reconnect the smartphone to a mobile

phone network such as the 3G or LTE network or to a Wi-Fi router, and then display [Help] in

the “Image App”.

• Some of the screens and information provided in these operating instructions may differ from

your device depending on the supported OS and “Image App” version.

Installing “Panasonic Image App”

App for Android

Android 4.4 or higher

(Android 5.0 or higher is required to use the Bluetooth function)

App for iOS:

iOS 9.3 or higher

(The Bluetooth function cannot be used with the iPad 2)

1 Connect the smartphone to a network.

2 (Android) Select “Google Play

Store”.

(iOS) Select “App Store”.

3 Enter “Panasonic Image App” or “LUMIX” into the search box.

4 Select “Panasonic Image App” and install it.

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

260

Follow a simple connection setup procedure (pairing) to connect to a smartphone that

supports Bluetooth Low Energy. When pairing is set up, the camera also automatically

connects to the smartphone via Wi-Fi.

• Supported smartphones

∫ First-time connection

You need to set up pairing (connection) for the first time only.

When pairing is set up, a Wi-Fi connection is made automatically.

• The camera enters pairing standby mode and displays its device

name.

1 Start “ Image App”.

• If a message is displayed indicating that the smartphone is searching for cameras, close

the message.

2 Select [Bluetooth].

3 Turn on the Bluetooth.

4 Select the device name displayed on the camera’s screen from the [Camera

enable to be registered] list.

• Bluetooth connection between the camera and the smartphone will be made.

(For Android devices) A Wi-Fi connection will be made by selecting [Connection].

5 Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the setup menu.

6 On the Wi-Fi setting screen, select the SSID displayed on

the camera. (The device name selected in step

• If the SSID is not displayed, it may be displayed after the Wi-Fi

function is turned off and on.

• When you need to change the connected device, follow the

on-screen message to change the setting.

Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection)

Android: Android 5.0 or higher equipped with Bluetooth 4.0 or higher

(excluding those that do not support Bluetooth Low Energy)

iOS: iOS 9.3 or higher (excluding the iPad 2)

On the camera

> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Bluetooth] >

[SET] > [Pairing]

On your smartphone

If you are using an Android device, follow the steps up to here to complete the setup.

Proceed to the steps below only if you are using an iOS device (iPhone/iPod touch/iPad).

• If [Wi-Fi Password] (P298) is set to [OFF] on the camera, select [Wi-Fi Setup]. (At the time

of purchase, [Wi-Fi Password] is set to [OFF])

• If [Wi-Fi Password] is set to [ON] on the camera, you need to install the profile.

1 Install the profile.

• If a pass code is set on the smartphone, you need to enter it.

2 Press the home button to close the browser.

Wi-Fi

0123456789ABC

261

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

7 Start “ Image App”.

• The paired smartphone will be registered as a paired device after connected via Wi-Fi.

∫ Connecting to a Paired Smartphone

1 Start “Image App” and then select [Bluetooth].

• If a message is displayed indicating that the smartphone is searching for cameras, close

the message.

2 Turn on the Bluetooth.

3 Select the camera (device name) you want to connect to from the [Camera

registered] list.

• Even if you set up pairing with more than one smartphone, you can only connect to one

smartphone at a time.

∫ End Bluetooth Connection

• The connection will be terminated and the camera’s Bluetooth function will be deactivated.

• Even if you terminate the connection, the pairing information for it will not be deleted.

∫ Cancelling Pairing

1 Select the menu.

2 Select the smartphone you want to delete.

Select the camera (device name) for which to delete the pairing information from the [Camera

registered] list.

On the camera

> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Bluetooth] > [ON]

On your smartphone

> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Bluetooth] > [OFF]

On the camera

> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Bluetooth] > [SET] > [Delete]

On your smartphone

• [ ] is displayed on the recording screen during Bluetooth connection. When the Bluetooth

function is enabled, but a connection is not established, [ ] appears translucent.

• When it takes time to set up pairing between a smartphone and a camera, delete the pairing

information of both devices and register them again. This may enable the devices to be

recognised properly.

• Up to 16 smartphones can be registered. If you try to register more than 16 devices, the

smartphone with the oldest registration history will be replaced.

• Performing [Reset Network Settings] will delete registered device information.

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

262

Use Wi-Fi to connect the camera and a smartphone that does not support Bluetooth Low

Energy.

• You can also connect via Wi-Fi to a smartphone that supports Bluetooth Low Energy by

following the same steps.

You can easily connect to the camera via Wi-Fi without entering a password on your

smartphone.

A SSID

• The information required for directly connecting your

smartphone to this unit (SSID) is displayed.

• You can also display the information by pressing [Wi-Fi] on the

camera.

1 Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the setup menu.

2 On the Wi-Fi setting screen, select the SSID displayed on

the camera.

3 Start “ Image App”.

• When the connection confirmation screen is displayed on the

camera, select [Yes] to connect. (For first time connection only)

Connecting to a Smartphone (Wi-Fi connection)

Connecting Without Entering a Password

On the camera

> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] >

[New Connection] > [Remote Shooting &

View]

On your smartphone

At the time of purchase, [Wi-Fi Password] is set to [OFF].

Before connecting to a Wi-Fi network, ensure that the device displayed on the connection

confirmation screen is the one you actually want to connect to. When a wrong device is

displayed, if you select [Yes], the camera will automatically connect to that device.

We recommend that you set [Wi-Fi Password] (P298) to [ON] if, for example, there is

another Wi-Fi device nearby.

Wi-Fi

0123456789ABC

263

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

When [Wi-Fi Password] is set to [ON], you can enhance security by using manual entry or

a QR code for password authentication.

Preparations: (On the camera) Set [Wi-Fi Password] to [ON]. (P298)

∫ Scanning QR code to connect

A SSID and password

B QR code

• The information (QR Code, SSID and Password) required for

directly connecting your smartphone to the camera is displayed.

• You can also display the information by pressing [Wi-Fi] on the

camera.

1 Start “ Image App”.

2 Select [QR code].

• When the smartphone is connected to a wireless access point, it may take time to display

[QR code].

• (For iOS devices) A confirmation screen will be displayed. Select [OK] to proceed.

3 Use the “Image App” to scan the QR code displayed on the screen of the

camera.

• To enlarge the QR code, press [MENU/SET] on the camera.

4 Install the profile.

• If a pass code is set on the smartphone, you need to enter it.

5 Press the home button to close the browser.

6 Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the smartphone’s setting menu.

7 On the Wi-Fi setting screen, select the SSID displayed on

the camera.

8 Start “ Image App”.

• (iOS devices) Steps 1 through 5 are not required from the second time

on.

Using Password Authentication to Connect

On the camera

> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] >

[New Connection] > [Remote Shooting &

View]

On your smartphone

If you are using an Android device, follow the steps up to here to complete the setup.

Proceed to the steps below only if you are using an iOS device (iPhone/iPod touch/iPad).

Wi-Fi

0123456789ABC

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

264

∫ Manually entering a password to connect

A SSID and password

B QR code

• The information (QR Code, SSID and Password) required for

directly connecting your smartphone to the camera is displayed.

• You can also display the information by pressing [Wi-Fi] on the

camera.

1 Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the setup menu.

2 On the Wi-Fi setting screen, select the SSID displayed on

the camera.

3 Enter the password displayed on the camera into the

smartphone. (For first time connection only)

4 Start “ Image App”.

To change the connection method, follow the steps below:

On the camera

> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] >

[New Connection] > [Remote Shooting &

View]

On your smartphone

Changing the Wi-Fi connection method

> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] >

[New Connection] > [Remote Shooting &

View] > [DISP.] button

> [DISP.] button > [New Connection] >

[Remote Shooting & View] > [DISP.] button

Wi-Fi

0123456789ABC

Wi-Fi

265

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

∫ Connecting via network

1 Select [Via Network].

• Follow the connection procedure described on P293 to connect the camera to a wireless

access point.

2 Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the setup menu.

3 Connect the smartphone to the wireless access point to which the camera is

connected.

4 Start “ Image App”.

∫ Connecting directly

1 Select [Direct].

• Select [WPS Connection], and follow the connection procedure described on P295 to

connect the camera to the smartphone.

2 Start “ Image App”.

1 Set the camera to Recording Mode.

• Press the shutter button halfway to return to recording mode.

2 Select the camera’s menu items to terminate the

Wi-Fi connection.

• You can also terminate the connection by pressing [Wi-Fi]

on the camera.

3 On the smartphone, close “Image App”.

On the camera

On your smartphone

On the camera

On your smartphone

Terminating the Wi-Fi connection

> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function]

> [Yes]

• When recording with [4K Pre-Burst] with the smartphone, terminate the connection only after

switching to 4K Burst recording by pressing [ ] on the camera.

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

266

Operating the Camera with a Smartphone

∫ Required wireless connectivity mode

The wireless connectivity mode required varies depending on the function to be used after

connecting to a smartphone.

Even when the camera is turned off, it can be started

up remotely and operated on your smartphone. You

can turn on the camera to record from a remote

location or view images even when the camera is in

your bag.

1 Make a Bluetooth connection to the smartphone. (P260)

2 Select the camera’s menu.

3 Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].

4 On the smartphone, start up the “Image App”, and set the Bluetooth function to

a state in which a connection can be made (standby state).

5 Operate the smartphone.

• The camera automatically turns on, allowing it to make a Wi-Fi connection automatically.

– (iOS devices) Depending on the connection status of the smartphone, you may need to

change the connected device on the Wi-Fi setup screen. Follow the on-screen message

on the smartphone to change the setting.

Wireless connectivity

required

Support for Bluetooth Low Energy

Indicates that the function can be used with smartphones that

support Bluetooth Low Energy.

Indicates that the function can be used with smartphones that do not

support Bluetooth Low Energy.

Indicates that the function can be used with smartphones that

support Bluetooth Low Energy.

• Indicates that the function requires you to connect to a smartphone

using both Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.

Camera power operations

Wireless connectivity required:

> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Remote Wakeup] > [ON]

1 Select [ ].

2 Select [Remote operation].

Bluetooth

Wi-Fi

Wi-FiBluetooth

267

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

∫ Turning off the camera

Operate the smartphone.

You can use the smartphone to record from a remote location while viewing the live view

images from the camera.

1 Connect to a smartphone. (P262)

2 Operate the smartphone.

∫ Operation Method During Remote Recording

Set either the camera or the smartphone as the priority control device to be used during

remote recording.

• The setting of this function cannot be changed while the connection is active.

1 Select [ ].

2 Select [ OFF].

• When [Remote Wakeup] is set to [ON], the Bluetooth function continues to operate even after

the camera is turned off, thus causing the battery to drain.

Remote shooting

Wireless connectivity required:

If the camera is already connected to the smartphone via Bluetooth, select [ ] →

[Remote operation].

(iOS devices) If you need to change the connected device on the Wi-Fi setup screen, follow

the on-screen message to change the setting.

1 Select [ ].

2 Record an image.

• The recorded images are saved in the camera.

• Some settings are not available.

> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Setup] > [Priority of Remote Device]

[Camera]

Allows you to perform operations with both the camera and the smartphone.

• The camera’s dial settings, etc. cannot be changed with the smartphone.

[Smartphone]

Allows you to perform operations only with the smartphone.

• The camera’s dial settings, etc. can be changed with the smartphone.

• To end remote recording, press any of the buttons on the camera to turn on

the screen, and select [End].

Wi-Fi



10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

268

You can use the smartphone as a remote control for the shutter.

1 Make a Bluetooth connection to the smartphone. (P260)

2 Operate the smartphone.

Not available in these cases:

• In the following cases, remote recording does not work:

– [Panorama Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

– When using [Time Lapse Shot]

¢ When [Priority of Remote Device] is set to [ ] ([Smartphone]), you can temporarily switch

to Programme AE Mode for remote recording. The camera returns to normal operation after

the remote recording has finished.

[Shutter Remote Control]

Wireless connectivity required:

1 Select [ ].

2 Select [Shutter Remote Control].

3 Take pic tures.

About [B] (Bulb)

You can perform [B] (Bulb) recording by setting the shutter speed to [B]

(Bulb) in Manual Exposure Mode. (Up to 30 minutes)

This function is useful when you take pictures of stars in the night sky or

a night scene, since the shutter can be kept open from start of recording

to end of recording.

Operate the smartphone

1 Press [ ] to start recording (Press and hold [ ])

2 Release your finger from [ ] to end recording

• Slide [ ] in the direction of [LOCK] to record with the shutter button fixed

in the fully pressed condition. (Slide [ ] back in the opposite direction or press the shutter

button of the camera to end recording.)

• If Bluetooth is disconnected during the [B] (Bulb) recording, reconnect Bluetooth and perform

the operation to end recording using the smartphone.

Bluetooth

269

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

∫ Reducing the time to recover from [Sleep Mode]

Select the smartphone function to be used as a priority function when waking the camera

from [Sleep Mode] with a smartphone.

Preparation:

Set [Bluetooth] and [Remote Wakeup] to [ON]. (P266)

• Refer to [Help] in the “Image App” for more details about the [Shutter Remote Control]

operation of the “Image App”.

• [Shutter Remote Control] is available when the camera on/off switch is set to [ON].

• The live view image of the camera cannot be monitored on the smartphone.

• When the camera turns off after [Sleep Mode] is activated during recording, you can reselect

[Shutter Remote Control] on the smartphone to turn it on again. (The following settings are

required.)

– [Remote Wakeup]: [ON]

– [Auto Transfer]: [OFF]

• The camera cannot be turned on by using [Shutter Remote Control].

> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Returning from Sleep Mode]

[Remote / Transfer

Priority]

Shortens the time required to wake the camera with

[Remote operation] or [Transfer image].

[Shutter Remote Priority]

Shortens the time required to wake the camera with

[Shutter Remote Control].

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

270

1 Connect to a smartphone. (P262)

2 Operate the smartphone.

Playing back/saving recorded images and sending them to social media

sites

Wireless connectivity required:

If the camera is already connected to the smartphone via Bluetooth, select [ ] →

[Remote operation].

(iOS devices)

Depending on the connection status of the smartphone, you may need to change the

connected device on the Wi-Fi setup screen. Follow the on-screen message on the

smartphone to change the setting.

1 Select [ ].

• You can switch the images to be displayed by

selecting the icon (A) on the top left of the screen.

To display images stored in the camera, select

[LUMIX].

(To play back the image)

2 Touch the image to enlarge it.

• When you play a motion picture, image quality

differs from that of the actual recorded motion

picture. In addition, depending on the smartphone

or conditions of use, the image quality may

deteriorate or the sound may skip during motion

picture or picture playback.

(To save the image or upload it on a social media site

or other web service)

3 Touch and hold and then drag the image.

• An OS version of Android 7.0 or higher or iOS 10.0 or higher is required to save pictures in

RAW format.

• Depending on the smartphone or its OS version, pictures in RAW format may not be displayed

correctly.

• You cannot save the following types of images:

– Motion pictures in AVCHD and 4K formats

– 4K burst files

– Images recorded with the Post Focus function

Wi-Fi









271

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

The camera automatically transfers recorded images to a Bluetooth-connected

smartphone via Wi-Fi.

1 Make a Bluetooth connection to the smartphone. (P260)

2 Select the camera’s menu.

• If a confirmation screen is displayed on the camera asking you to terminate the Wi-Fi

connection, select [Yes] to terminate it.

3 On the smartphone, select [Yes] (Android devices) or [Wi-Fi Setup] (iOS

devices).

• The camera automatically makes a Wi-Fi connection.

– (iOS devices) Follow the on-screen message on the smartphone to change the

connected device on the Wi-Fi setup screen.

4 Check the send settings on the camera, and select [Set].

• To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (P279)

• The camera will enter a mode where it can automatically transfer images and [ ] will be

displayed on the recording screen. (If it is not displayed, images cannot be transferred

automatically. Check the status of the Wi-Fi connection to the smartphone.)

5 Take pictures on the camera.

• Every time you take a picture, it is automatically sent to a specified device.

• While sending a file, [ ] is displayed on the recording screen.

∫ To stop the automatic transfer of images

Select [OFF] in step 2.

• A confirmation screen is displayed, asking you to terminate the Wi-Fi connection.

Transferring recorded images automatically

Wireless connectivity required:

> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Auto Transfer] > [ON]

If you set [Auto Transfer] to [ON], the camera and the smartphone will be

connected via Wi-Fi/Bluetooth and automatic transfer will be enabled the next time

you turn on the camera and start “Image App” on the smartphone.

Wi-FiBluetooth

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

272

• When [Auto Transfer] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] in [Wi-Fi] in the [Setup] menu

cannot be used.

• If the camera turns off during image transfer and the file transfer is cancelled, it will resend the

files as soon as it is turned on again.

– You may not be able to resend the files that did not get delivered if there is a change in their

storage status. For example, if you replace the card before turning on the camera again, the

files may not be resent.

– If the number of files that did not get delivered is large, it may not be possible to resend all of

the files.

• An OS version of Android 7.0 or higher or iOS 10.0 or higher is required to save pictures in

RAW format.

• Depending on the smartphone or its OS version, pictures in RAW format may not be displayed

correctly.

• You cannot automatically transfer the following types of images:

– Motion pictures

– 4K burst files

– Images recorded with the Post Focus function

273

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

The smartphone sends its location information to the camera via Bluetooth, and the

camera performs recording while writing the acquired location information.

Preparations:

Enable the GPS function on the smartphone.

1 Make a Bluetooth connection to the smartphone. (P260)

2 Select the camera’s menu.

• The camera will enter a mode where location information can be recorded and [ ] will

be displayed on the recording screen.

3 Take pictures on the camera.

• Location information will be written to the recorded pictures.

Recording location information

Wireless connectivity required:

A The smartphone acquires

location information.

B The smartphone sends the

location information.

C The camera performs recording

while writing the location

information.

> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Location Logging] > [ON]

When [ ] appears translucent

Location information is not acquired, so data cannot be written. Positioning with the GPS on the

smartphone may not be possible if the smartphone is in a location such as a building or a bag.

• Move the smartphone to a location where positioning performance can be optimised, such as

one that offers a wide view of the sky, to try positioning.

• Refer to the operating instructions of your smartphone.

• Images with location information are indicated with [ ].

• The smartphone drains its battery faster while acquiring location information.

• Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy, the likeness rights, etc. of the subject

when you use this function. Use at your own risk.

Not available in these cases:

• Location information is not written to AVCHD motion pictures.

Bluetooth

GPS

Bluetooth



10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

274

Synchronise the [Clock Set] setting and the [Home] or [Destination] setting in [World

Time], which are all located in the [Setup] menu of the camera, with the corresponding

settings of a smartphone.

1 Make a Bluetooth connection to the smartphone. (P260)

2 Select the camera’s menu.

Automatically setting the clock

Wireless connectivity required:

> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Auto Clock Set] > [ON]

Bluetooth

275

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

Using a smartphone, you can combine motion pictures recorded with the camera’s [Snap

Movie] function (P176). Music can be added to motion pictures to be combined. In

addition, you can save the combined motion picture or upload it on a web service.

A Record motion pictures with [Snap Movie].

B Send the recorded motion pictures.

C Edit the motion pictures.

D Combine the motion pictures, save the combined motion picture, and send it to a web

service.

E Combine the motion pictures, and save the combined motion picture.

∫ Combining motion pictures by operating a smartphone

1 Connect to a smartphone. (P262)

2 Operate the smartphone.

Editing motion pictures recorded with Snap Movie

Wireless connectivity required:

If the camera is already connected to the smartphone via Bluetooth, select [ ] →

[Remote operation].

(iOS devices)

Depending on the connection status of the smartphone, you may need to change the

connected device on the Wi-Fi setup screen. Follow the on-screen message on the

smartphone to change the setting.

1 Select [ ].

2 Select [ ].

• Follow the message displayed on the smartphone to send the motion pictures

recorded with [Snap Movie] to the smartphone.

3 Operate the smartphone to edit the motion pictures.

• Read the [Help] in the “Image App” menu for further details on how to operate.

Wi-Fi

  







10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

276

Displaying pictures on a TV

You can display pictures on a TV that supports DLNA (DMR).

Select the menu.

Select [Via Network] or [Direct], and connect. (P292, 293)

Select a device you want to connect.

• When the connection is established, the screen is displayed.

Take or play back still pictures on this unit.

• Set the menu to terminate the connection.

(You can also terminate the connection by pressing [Wi-Fi].)

> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [New Connection] >

[Playback on TV]

> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [Yes]

• Pictures displayed using the Wi-Fi function cannot be output in 4K resolution. To output them

in 4K resolution, connect the camera and TV with an HDMI micro cable. (P300)

• When a TV is connected to the camera, the TV screen may temporarily return to the status

before the connection. Pictures are displayed again on the TV if you take or play back

pictures.

• The [Effect] and [Sound] settings for slide shows are not applied to the TV.

Not available in these cases:

• Motion pictures and 4K burst files cannot be played back.

• Images displayed on certain screens of the camera (thumbnail display screens, etc.) are not

displayed on the TV.

• When [Auto Transfer] in [Bluetooth] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] is not available.

277

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

Sending images from the camera

When sending pictures, first select [New Connection], then

select the method of sending pictures.

∫ Images that can be sent

¢1 Sending by [Send Images While Recording] is not available.

¢2 Cannot be sent if the file size is over 4 GB.

¢3 An OS version of Android 7.0 or higher or iOS 10.0 or higher is required.

¢4 Excluding 4K motion pictures

• Some images may not be played back or sent depending on the device.

• For details about playback of images, refer to the operating instructions for the destination

device or the Web service.

> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] >

[New Connection] > [Send Images While

Recording] or [Send Images Stored in the

Camera]

Destination JPEG RAW MP4

¢1

AVCHD

¢1, 2

4K Burst File

¢1

Images recorded with the Post

Focus function

¢1

[Smartphone] ±±

¢3

¢4

——

[PC] ±± ± ± ±

[Cloud Sync. Service] ± — ±

¢4

——

[Web service] ± — ±

¢4

——

[AV device] ± —— — —

[Printer]

¢1

± —— — —

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

278

∫ Send Images While Recording

A picture can be automatically sent to a specified device every time you take it.

• While sending a file, [ ] is displayed on the recording screen.

• Set the menu to terminate the connection.

• You cannot change the sending settings while sending pictures.

> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [Yes]

• Since the camera gives priority to recording, sending may take longer during the recording.

• If you turn off the camera or terminate the Wi-Fi connection before the transmission is

completed, unsent files will not be resent.

• You may not be able to delete files or use the playback menu while sending.

Not available in these cases:

• If you set [Time Lapse Shot], the Wi-Fi connection is terminated and you cannot use this

function.

279

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

∫ Send Images Stored in the Camera

Images can be selected and sent after recording.

∫ Image send settings

Pressing [DISP.] after completing a connection allows you to change the settings for

sending such as the image size for sending.

[Single Select] setting

1 Select the picture.

2 Select [Set].

[Multi Select] setting

1 Select the picture. (repeat)

• The setting is cancelled when the picture is selected

again.

2 Select [OK].

• To close the connection, select [Exit].

Not available in these cases:

• Images recorded with another device and images modified or edited on a PC may not be sent.

[Size]

Resize the image to send.

[Original]/[Auto]/[Change] ([M], [S] or [VGA])

• You can set this to [Auto] if the destination is [Web service].

It changes the image size according to the status of the destination.

[File Format]

(Destination:

[Smartphone], [PC])

[JPG]/[RAWiJPG]/[RAW]

[Delete Location

Data]

(Destination: [Cloud Sync.

Service], [Web service])

Deletes the location information from images before sending them.

[ON]/[OFF]

[Cloud Limit]

(Destination: [Cloud Sync.

Service])

Sets the operation to be performed when the Cloud Folder runs out of

free space.

[ON]: Do not send images.

[OFF]: Delete images from the oldest ones, then send new images.

6HW

ュリヴヱハ

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

280

Sending images to a smartphone

Preparations:

Install the “Image App” in advance. (P259)

Select the menu.

Select [Via Network] or [Direct], and connect. (P292, 293)

Select a device you want to connect.

Check the send settings, and select [Set].

• To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (P279)

> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [New Connection] >

[Send Images While Recording] or [Send Images Stored in the

Camera] > [Smartphone]

(On your smartphone)

When connecting with [Via Network]:

1 Turn on the Wi-Fi function.

2 Select the wireless access point.

3 Start “Image App”.

When connecting with [WPS Connection] in [Direct]:

1 Start “Image App”.

• Refer to the operating instructions for your smartphone for information about whether

it supports WPS.

When connecting with [Manual Connection] in [Direct]:

1 Turn on the Wi-Fi function.

2 Select the SSID that matches the one displayed on the screen of this unit.

3 Start “Image App”.

When [Send Images While Recording] has been selected

Take pictures. (P278)

When [Send Images Stored in the Camera] has been selected

Select the picture. (P279)

Not available in these cases:

• When [Auto Transfer] in [Bluetooth] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] is not available.

281

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

Printing Wirelessly

You can print pictures on printers that support PictBridge (wireless LAN)

¢ Compliant with the DPS over IP standards.

• For details on the PictBridge (wireless LAN-compatible) printer, contact the respective

company.

Select the menu.

Select [Via Network] or [Direct], and connect. (P292, 293)

Select a printer you want to connect.

Select pictures, and then print.

• The procedure for selecting pictures is the same as the one for when the USB

connection cable is connected. (P310)

• To terminate the connection, press [ ].

(You can also terminate the connection by pressing [Wi-Fi].)

> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [New Connection] >

[Send Images Stored in the Camera] > [Printer]

Not available in these cases:

• When [Auto Transfer] in [Bluetooth] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] is not available.

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

282

Sending images to AV device

You can send pictures and motion pictures to an AV device (home AV device) that

supports DLNA, such as a recorder.

Select the menu.

Select [Via Network] or [Direct], and connect. (P292, 293)

Select a device you want to connect.

Check the send settings, and select [Set].

• To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (P279)

A Wireless access point B Home AV device

> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [New Connection] >

[Send Images While Recording] or [Send Images Stored in the

Camera] > [AV device]

When [Send Images While Recording] has been selected

Take pictures. (P278)

When [Send Images Stored in the Camera] has been selected

Select the picture. (P279)

• Sending may fail depending on the operational status of the AV device. Also, sending may

take a while.

Not available in these cases:

• When [Auto Transfer] in [Bluetooth] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] is not available.

283

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

Sending images to PC

Preparations:

• Turn the computer on.

• Prepare folders for receiving images on the PC. (P283)

• If the workgroup of the destination PC has been changed from the standard setting, change the

setting of this unit in [PC Connection]. (P298)

∫ To create a folder that receives images

• Create a PC account name (up to 254 characters) and password (up to 32 characters)

consisting of alphanumeric characters. An attempt to create a receive folder may fail if the

account name includes non-alphanumeric characters.

1 Install “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” to the PC. (P305)

2 Create a folder that receives images with “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.

• For details, refer to the operating instructions of “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (PDF).

(For Windows)

Supported OS: Windows 10/Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows 7

Example: Windows 7

1 Select a folder you intend to use for receiving, then right-click.

2 Select [Properties], then enable sharing of the folder.

• For details, refer to the operating instructions of your PC or Help on the OS.

(For Mac)

Supported OS: OS X v10.5 to v10.11, macOS 10.12 to 10.14

Example: OS X v10.8

1 Select a folder you intend to use for receiving, then click on the items in the

following order.

[File] > [Get Info]

2 Enable sharing of the folder.

• For details, refer to the operating instructions of your PC or Help on the OS.

When using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”

When not using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

284

∫ Sending images to the PC

1 Select the menu.

2 Select [Via Network] or [Direct], and connect. (P292, 293)

3 Enter the computer name of the PC (NetBIOS name for Mac) you want to

connect to.

4 Select the folder you want to send.

5 Check the send settings, and select [Set].

• To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (P279)

> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [New Connection] >

[Send Images While Recording] or [Send Images Stored in the

Camera] > [PC]

6 When [Send Images While Recording] has been selected

Take pictures. (P278)

When [Send Images Stored in the Camera] has been selected

Select the picture. (P279)

• Folders sorted by sent date will be created in the destination folder, and images will be saved

there.

• If the screen for a user account and password entry appears, enter the one you set on your

PC.

• When the computer name (NetBIOS name for Mac) contains a space (blank character), etc., it

may not be recognised.

In that case, we recommend changing the name to one consisting only of 15 or less

alphanumeric characters.

• When the firewall of the OS, security software, etc. is enabled, connecting to the PC may not

be possible.

Not available in these cases:

• When [Auto Transfer] in [Bluetooth] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] is not available.

285

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

Using Web services

You can send pictures and motion pictures to an social media site, etc. via “LUMIX CLUB”.

By selecting settings so that pictures and motion pictures are automatically transferred to

a cloud sync service you can receive the transferred pictures and motion pictures on a PC

or smartphone.

Preparations:

• Register to “LUMIX CLUB”. (P289)

• To send images to a web service, register the web service. (P286)

A Wireless access point B Web service C Cloud Sync Service

When sending images to web service

• Images uploaded to the web service cannot be displayed or deleted with this camera.

• If sending images fails, a report email outlining the failure will be sent to the email address

registered with “LUMIX CLUB”.

• Images may contain personal information that can be used to identify the user, such as

a title, the time and date when the images was taken, and the location where the image

was taken. Check this information before uploading images to web services.

• Panasonic assumes no responsibility for the damages resulting from the leakage, loss, etc. of

images uploaded on web services.

• When uploading images to the web service, do not delete images from this camera, even

after they have finished sending, until you have checked that they have been properly

uploaded to the web service. Panasonic assumes no responsibility for the damages resulting

from the deletion of images stored in this unit.

LUMIX CLUB

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

286

Check the “FAQ/Contact us” on the following site for compatible web services.

https://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/lumix_faqs/

Preparation:

Make sure that you have created an account on the web service you want to use, and

have the login information available.

1 Connect to the “LUMIX CLUB” site using a smartphone or computer.

https://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/

2 Enter your “LUMIX CLUB” login ID and password and log in to the service.

3 If your email address has not been registered to the “LUMIX CLUB” yet, register

it.

4 Select and register the cloud storage service you want to use in Web service

link settings.

• Follow the on-screen instructions to operate.

1 Select the menu.

2 Select [Via Network], and connect. (P292)

3 Select a web service.

4 Check the send settings, and select [Set].

• To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (P279)

Registering the WEB service to “LUMIX CLUB”

When sending images to web service

> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [New Connection] >

[Send Images While Recording] or [Send Images Stored in the

Camera] > [Web service]

5 When [Send Images While Recording] has been selected

Take pictures. (P278)

When [Send Images Stored in the Camera] has been selected

Select the picture. (P279)

Not available in these cases:

• When [Auto Transfer] in [Bluetooth] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] is not available.

287

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

∫ Sending images in the camera to a web service with simple operations

1 Display an image.

2 Press 4.

(When group pictures are selected, press 3, and select

[Upload(Wi-Fi)] or [Upload All(Wi-Fi)].)

• The same operation can be performed by touching [ ].

(When group pictures are selected, select [Upload(Wi-Fi)]

or [Upload All(Wi-Fi)] after touch [ ], [ ], [ ], or

[ ], and then touch [ ].)

• If a screen is displayed asking you to select the connection method: (P293)

• If a screen is displayed asking you to acquire a new login ID: (P289)

3 Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen.

4 Select a web service.

5 Check the send settings, and select [Set].

•Step 4, 5 are not necessary when you continue to send another image.

• To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (P279)

• To terminate the connection, press [MENU/SET] or operate other controls to exit the

playback screen. You can also terminate the connection by pressing [Wi-Fi]. (P258)

To change the settings for sending images or web service

Terminate the Wi-Fi connection, and follow step

1 and onwards again.

• You can also change the send settings by pressing [Wi-Fi] while using a Wi-Fi connection.

(P258)

• When there are no available connections to wireless access points in History:

Select the connection method and connect the camera to a wireless access point. (P293)

• When you are not registered to the “LUMIX CLUB”:

Acquire a login ID and set a password. (P289)

• When group pictures are displayed continuously, all pictures in the group will be sent. When

group pictures are displayed one by one, the currently displayed picture will be sent.

SUB

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

288

Preparation:

• Register to the “LUMIX CLUB”. (P289)

• Set up cloud synchronisation. (Use “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” on a PC or “Image App” on a

smartphone.)

1 Select the menu.

2 Select [Via Network], and connect. (P292)

3 Check the send settings, and select [Set].

• To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (P279)

When sending images to [Cloud Sync. Service]

∫ Using [Cloud Sync. Service] (As of April 2019)

• Sent images are temporarily saved in the cloud folder so that they can be synchronised with

your device, such as a PC or a smartphone.

• A Cloud Folder stores transferred images for 30 days (up to 1000 pictures).

Be aware that images will be deleted automatically in the following cases:

– When over 30 days have passed since the transfer

(Images may be deleted even within 30 days if downloaded to all of the specified

devices.)

– When the number of images exceeds 1000 (This applies depending on the [Cloud Limit]

(P279) setting.)

> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [New Connection] >

[Send Images While Recording] or [Send Images Stored in the

Camera] > [Cloud Sync. Service]

When [Send Images While Recording] has been selected

Take pictures. (P278)

When [Send Images Stored in the Camera] has been selected

Select the picture. (P279)

Not available in these cases:

• When [Auto Transfer] in [Bluetooth] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] is not available.

289

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

Refer to the “LUMIX CLUB” site for details.

https://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/

From the camera menu, acquire a “LUMIX CLUB” login ID.

1 Select the menu.

• Connect to the network.

Proceed to the next page by selecting [Next].

2 Select the method for connecting to a wireless access point, and set. (P293)

• Proceed to the next page by selecting [Next].

3 Read through the “LUMIX CLUB” terms of use and select [Agree].

• Switch pages: 3/4

• Enlarge the display: (reset the enlarged display: )

• Move the position of the enlarged display: 3/4/2/1

• Cancel without registering information: [ ]

4 Enter a password.

• Enter any combination of 8 to 16 characters and numbers for the password.

• For information on how to enter characters, refer to P64.

5 Check the login ID and select [OK].

• Be sure to make a note of the login ID and password.

• The login ID (12-digit number) will be displayed automatically.

When logging in to the “LUMIX CLUB” with a computer, you only need to enter the

numbers.

“LUMIX CLUB”

• The service may be suspended due to regular maintenance or unexpected troubles, and the

service contents may be changed or added, without prior notice to the users.

The service may be stopped in whole or in part with a reasonable period of advance notice.

Obtain a new login ID from the camera

> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Setup] > [LUMIX CLUB] >

[Set/Add Account] > [New account]

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

290

Preparation:

When using the acquired login ID, check the ID and password.

To change the “LUMIX CLUB” password on the camera, access the “LUMIX CLUB”

website from your smartphone or PC and change the “LUMIX CLUB” password in

advance.

1 Select the menu.

• The login ID and password are displayed.

• The password is displayed as “ ”.

2 Select the item to change.

3 Enter the login ID or password.

• For information on how to enter characters, refer to P64.

• Enter the new password you have created on your smartphone or PC into the camera.

4 Select [Exit].

Setting the same login ID on the camera and your smartphone is convenient for sending

images on the camera to other devices or web services.

∫ When either the camera or the smartphone has acquired the login ID:

1 Connect the camera to the smartphone. (P262)

2 From the “Image App” menu, set the common login ID.

• A screen for setting a common login ID may be displayed after the camera and the smartphone

are connected.

∫ When the camera and the smartphone have acquired different login IDs:

Change the login ID and password of either device.

• To change the camera’s login ID and password:

Refer to “Confirm/Change Login ID or Password” (above).

Confirm/Change Login ID or Password

> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Setup] > [LUMIX CLUB] >

[Set/Add Account] > [Set Login ID]

To set the same login ID for the camera and the smartphone

291

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

Check the details if the terms of use have been updated.

Delete the login ID from the camera when transferring it to another party or disposing of it.

You can also delete your “LUMIX CLUB” account.

1 Select the menu.

• The message is displayed. Select [Next].

2 Select [Yes] in the login ID delete confirmation screen.

• The message is displayed. Select [Next].

3 Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen for deleting the “LUMIX CLUB”

account.

• The message is displayed. Select [Next].

• To continue without deleting the account, select [No]. The login ID will be deleted.

4 Select [OK].

Check the “LUMIX CLUB” terms of use

> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Setup] > [LUMIX CLUB] >

[Terms of use]

Deleting your login ID/“LUMIX CLUB” account

> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Setup] > [LUMIX CLUB] >

[Delete account]

• You can only change or delete the login ID acquired with the camera.

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

292

Wi-Fi connections

The following types of connections are available.

> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function]

[New

Connection]

This makes a connection after a Wi-Fi function and send destination is

selected. When a screen similar to the one below is displayed, select the

connection method.

Wireless access point

•[Via Network] (P293):

Makes a connection via a wireless access point.

• [Direct] (P295):

Connects your device and the camera directly.

[Select a

destination

from History]/

[Select a

destination

from Favorite]

Connection is made using the same settings as the previous time. (P296)

293

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

Select a connection method to the wireless access point.

• Except for the first-time connection, the camera will connect to the previously-used wireless

access point.

To change the connection destination, press [DISP.].

• WPS refers to a function that allows you to easily configure the settings related to the

connection and security of wireless LAN devices.

Refer to the operating instructions for the wireless access point for details about how to operate

the WPS function and whether it is supported.

[Via Network]

[WPS (Push-Button)]

Save push button type wireless access point that is compatible with

Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ with a WPS mark.

Press the wireless access point

WPS button until it switches to WPS

mode.

e.g.:

[WPS (PIN code)]

that supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup.

1 Select the wireless access point on the camera.

2 Enter the PIN code displayed on the camera screen

into the wireless access point.

3 Press [MENU/SET] of the camera.

[From List]

Select this option when you are not sure about the WPS

compatibility, or when you want to search for and connect to a

wireless access point. (P294)

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

294

Search for available wireless access points.

• Confirm encryption key of the wireless access point if the network authentication is encrypted.

1 Select the wireless access point.

• To search for wireless access points again, press [DISP.].

• If no wireless access point is found, refer to “Connecting

by Manual Input” on P294.

2 (If network authentication is encrypted)

Enter the encryption key.

• For information on how to enter characters, refer to P64.

∫ Connecting by Manual Input

• Check the SSID, network authentication type, encryption type, and encryption key of the

wireless access point to be connected.

1 On the screen displayed in step 1 of “[From List]”, select [Manual Input].

2 Enter the SSID of the wireless access point you are connecting to, then select [Set].

• For information on how to enter characters, refer to P64.

3 Select the network authentication type.

4 (When an option other than [No Encryption] is selected)

Enter the encryption key.

[From List]

[WPA2-PSK]

Supported encryption methods: [TKIP], [AES]

[WPA2/WPA-PSK]

[No Encryption] —

• Check the wireless access points instruction manual and settings when saving a wireless

access point.

• If no connection can be established, the wireless access point’s radio waves may be too

weak.

Refer to “Message Display” (P325) and “Troubleshooting” (P328) for details.

• Depending on your environment, transmission speed between the camera and wireless

access point may decrease. In addition, the wireless access point may not be available for

use.

295

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

• Please also refer to the operating instructions of the device to be connected.

[Direct]

[WPS Connection]

[WPS (Push-Button)]

1 On the camera, select [WPS (Push-Button)].

2 Set the device to WPS mode.

• You can wait longer for a connection by pressing [DISP.] on this

unit.

[WPS (PIN code)]

1 On the camera, select [WPS (PIN code)].

2 Enter the PIN code of the device into this camera.

[Manual Connection]

Enter the SSID and password

displayed on the camera.

• The password will not be displayed

when [Wi-Fi Password] is set to [OFF]

and the device to be connected is set

to [Smartphone].Select the SSID to

connect. (P262)

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

296

Wi-Fi connection history is saved in History when the Wi-Fi function is used. Connecting

from History allows you to easily connect with the same Wi-Fi settings as used previously.

• If the settings of the device to connect to have been changed, it may not be possible to connect

to the device.

1 Select the menu.

2 Select item.

• You can display details of the connection by pressing [DISP.].

∫ Register to favourite

1 Select the menu.

2 Select the item you wish to register and press 1.

3 Enter a registration name.

• For information on how to enter characters, refer to P64.

• A maximum of 30 characters can be entered. A two-byte character is treated as two

characters.

Connect to Wi-Fi Using Previously Saved Settings

> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function]

[Select a destination from

History]

Connects with previously-used settings.

[Select a destination from

Favorite]

Connects with settings registered as favourites.

> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] >

[Select a destination from History]

297

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

∫ Editing items registered in favourite

1 Select the menu.

2 Select the Favourites item you wish to edit and press 1.

> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] >

[Select a destination from Favorite]

[Remove from Favorite] —

[Change the Order in

Favorite]

Select the destination.

[Change the Registered

Name]

• How to enter text (P64)

• Because the number of items that can be saved in History is limited, register frequently-used

connection settings to Favourites.

• Performing [Reset Network Settings] deletes data registered in History and Favourites.

• If the device you want to connect to (smartphone, etc.) is connected to a wireless access point

other than the camera, you cannot connect the device to the camera using [Direct]. Change

the Wi-Fi settings of the device you want to connect to so that the access point to be used is

set to the camera.

You can also select [New Connection] and reconnect the devices. (P259)

• It may be difficult to establish a connection to a network used by many devices. In that case,

connect by [New Connection].

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

298

[Wi-Fi Setup] Menu

Configure the settings required for the Wi-Fi function.

The settings cannot be changed when connected to Wi-Fi.

This sets the higher priority between the camera and smartphone to perform operations

during remote recording. (P267)

You can improve security by enabling password entry for a direct connection to a

smartphone.

• When [ON] is selected, you can also set up a connection by scanning a QR code.

Acquires or changes the “LUMIX CLUB” login ID. (P289)

You can set the workgroup.

To send images to a PC, a connection to the same workgroup as the destination PC is

required.

(The default setting is “WORKGROUP”.)

1 Press [MENU/SET].

2 Enter the workgroup of the connecting PC.

• For information on how to enter characters, refer to P64.

• To reset to the default setting, press [DISP.].

You can change the name (SSID) of this unit.

1 Press [DISP.].

2 Enter the desired device name.

• For information on how to enter characters, refer to P64.

• A maximum of 32 characters can be entered.

> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Setup]

[Priority of Remote Device]

[Wi-Fi Password]

[ON] Connects the camera and a smartphone using an SSID and password. (P263)

[OFF] Connects the camera and a smartphone using an SSID. (P262)

[LUMIX CLUB]

[PC Connection]

[Device Name]

299

10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function

To prevent incorrect operation and use of the Wi-Fi function by a third party and to protect

saved personal information, we recommend protecting the Wi-Fi function with a password.

• Once a password is set, you are required to enter it each time you use the Wi-Fi function.

• If you forget the password, you can reset it with [Reset Network Settings] in the [Setup] menu.

Displays the MAC address and IP address of this unit.

• A MAC Address is a unique address that is used to identify network equipment.

• IP address refers to a number that identifies a PC connected to a network such as the Internet.

Usually, the addresses for homes are automatically assigned by the DHCP function such as a

wireless access point. (Example: 192.168.0.87)

[Wi-Fi Function Lock]

[Setup]

Enter any 4-digit numbers as the password.

• For information on how to enter characters, refer to P64.

[Cancel] Cancel the password.

[Network Address]

300

11. Connecting to other devices

Watching/Saving 4K Motion Pictures on an

External Device

∫ Playing Back on a TV Screen

You can enjoy finely-detailed 4K motion pictures by connecting the camera and a TV that

supports 4K motion picture and playing back 4K motion pictures recorded with the camera.

Although the output resolution will be lower, you can also play them back by connecting to

a device that does not support 4K motion picture, such as a high-definition TV.

Preparation:

• Set [HDMI Mode (Play)] (P234) to [AUTO] or a resolution of [4K/25p].

• When connecting to a TV that does not support 4K motion picture,

select [AUTO].

Connect the camera and a 4K-compatible TV with an HDMI micro cable,

and display the playback screen. (P301)

• The TV input will switch automatically and the playback screen will be displayed when you set

[VIERA Link] to [ON] and connect to a VIERA Link compatible TV. Refer to P303 for details.

• Read the operating instructions for the TV.

∫ Watching on a PC

To play back 4K motion pictures on a PC, use the software

“PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.

• To play back and edit motion pictures in 4K, you need a high-performance PC

environment.

• Refer to the operating instructions of “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (PDF).

∫ Storing on a PC

Use the software “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” to import 4K motion pictures to a PC.

• Refer to the operating instructions of “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (PDF).

Watching motion pictures in 4K

Storing 4K motion pictures

301

11. Connecting to other devices

Playing Back Pictures on a TV Screen

Preparations: Turn off the camera and TV.

Connect the camera and the TV with an HDMI micro cable.

• Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the plug.

(It may result in malfunction by the deforming of the terminal if it is plugged in obliquely

or in wrong direction.)

Do not connect devices to incorrect terminals. Doing so may cause malfunction.

Turn on the TV and select the input to match the connector in use.

Turn the camera on and then press [(].

A [HDMI] socket

B HDMI micro cable

C HDMI socket (on the TV)

• Use a “High Speed HDMI micro cable” with the HDMI logo.

Cables that do not comply with the HDMI standards will not work.

“High Speed HDMI micro cable” (Type D–Type A plug, up to 2 m (6.6 feet) long)

• Depending on the [Aspect Ratio], black bands may be displayed on the top and bottom or the

left and right of the pictures.

• Change the screen mode on your TV if the picture is displayed with the top or bottom cut off.

• Check the [HDMI Mode (Play)]. (P234)

• To play back 24p motion pictures, set [HDMI Mode (Play)] to [AUTO]. Otherwise, the picture is

not output at 24 frames per second.

• Depending on the TV to be connected, 4K burst files may not be played back correctly.

• No image will be displayed on the monitor/viewfinder of the camera. In addition, no audio will

be output from the speaker of the camera.

• HDMI output will be cancelled if a USB connection cable (supplied) is connected

simultaneously.

• Read the operating instructions for the TV.

HDMI

11. Connecting to other devices

302

When using the HDMI output, you can record pictures and

motion pictures while monitoring the camera image on an

external monitor, TV or similar device.

∫ Setting the information display during HDMI output

Select whether or not to output the information display of the camera to an external device

connected via HDMI.

Settings: [ON]/[OFF]

Recording while monitoring camera images

> [Setup] > [TV Connection] > [HDMI Info Display (Rec)]

• When using the HDMI output during recording, the image quality is automatically switched in

accordance with the connecting device. However, in the following cases, images will be output

in accordance with the [Rec Quality] in the menu. (If the setting is not supported by the

connecting device, the camera will switch the image quality in accordance with the device.)

– When recording motion pictures

– In Creative Video Mode

– When [Rec Area] is set to [ ]

• [Aspect Ratio] in the [Rec] menu is fixed to [16:9].

• If the camera is connected to an external monitor or TV that supports 4K motion picture, using

the following settings will cause the angle of view to become even narrower than usual:

– [4K/100M/30p]/[4K/100M/25p]/[4K/100M/24p] in [Rec Quality]

– [4K Live Cropping]

• When [ ] is selected for the AF Mode or during MF Assist, the enlarged display is not

output.

• Ex. Tele Conv. (motion picture) does not work (excluding Creative Video Mode).

• Electronic sounds and electronic shutter sounds are muted.

• When you check the image and sound from the TV connected to the camera, the microphone

of the camera may pick up the sound from the speakers of the TV, producing an abnormal

sound (audio feedback). If this occurs, move the camera away from the TV or lower the

volume on the TV.

• If you connect to a Wi-Fi network during HDMI output, no image will be displayed on the

monitor of the camera.

• Some setting screens are not output via HDMI.

• There is no output via HDMI in the following cases:

– During panorama picture recording

– When recording 4K photos

– When recording with the Post Focus function

303

11. Connecting to other devices

Preparations:

1 Connect this unit to a Panasonic TV compatible with VIERA Link with an HDMI

micro cable (P301).

2 Turn the camera on and then press [(].

3 Operate with the remote control for the TV.

Turning this unit off:

If you use the remote control for the TV to turn the TV off, this unit is also turned off.

Automatic input switching:

• If you connect with an HDMI micro cable and then turn this unit on, and then press [(], the

input channel on the TV automatically switches to this unit’s screen. If the TV’s power is in

standby status, it will turn on automatically (if [Set] has been selected for the TV’s [Power on

link] setting).

Using VIERA Link (HDMI)

What is the VIERA Link (HDMI) (HDAVI Control™)?

• This function allows you to use your remote control for the Panasonic TV for easy operations

when this unit has been connected to a VIERA Link compatible device using an HDMI micro

cable for automatic linked operations.

(Not all operations are possible.)

• VIERA Link is a unique Panasonic function built on an HDMI control function using the

standard HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) specification.

Linked operations with HDMI CEC compatible devices made by other companies are not

guaranteed. When using devices made by other companies that are compatible with

VIERA Link, refer to the operating instructions for the respective devices.

• This unit supports “VIERA Link Ver.5” function. “VIERA Link Ver.5” is the standard for

Panasonic’s VIERA Link compatible equipment. This standard is compatible with Panasonic’s

conventional VIERA Link equipment.

> [Setup] > [TV Connection] > [VIERA Link] > [ON]

• Operation using the buttons on this unit will be limited.

• To play back the sound of a film during a slide show, set [Sound] to [AUTO] or [Audio] on the

Slide Show setting screen.

• Use a “High Speed HDMI micro cable” with the HDMI logo.

Cables that do not comply with the HDMI standards will not work.

“High Speed HDMI micro cable” (Type D–Type A plug, up to 2 m (6.6 feet) long)

• Refer to P335 if VIERA Link is not operating correctly.

11. Connecting to other devices

304

Importing images to a PC

You can acquire recorded pictures to a PC by connecting the camera and the PC.

• Some PCs can read directly from the card removed from the camera. For details, refer to the

operating instructions of your PC.

∫ PC that can be used

The unit can be connected to any PC capable of recognising a mass storage device.

• Windows support: Windows 10/Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows 7

• Mac support: OS X v10.5 to v10.11, macOS 10.12 to 10.14

AVCHD motion pictures may not be imported correctly when copied as files or

folder

• When using Windows, import AVCHD motion pictures with “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.

• When using Mac, you can copy motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD] using “iMovie”.

Note, however, that it may not be possible to copy pictures depending on the picture quality

settings.

(For details about iMovie, please contact Apple Inc.)

305

11. Connecting to other devices

• To download the software, you need to connect the PC to the Internet.

• It may take some time to download the software depending on the communication

environment.

• Supported OSs are current as of April 2019 and are subject to change.

This software allows you to manage images. For example, you can send pictures and

motion pictures to a PC and sort them by recording date or model name. You can also

perform operations such as writing images to a DVD, processing and correcting images,

and editing motion pictures.

Check the site below to download and install the software.

Download the software while it is available for download.

• Download expiration: April 2024

https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/soft/download/d_pfs10ae.html

(This Site is English only.)

• Operating environment

• Refer to the operating instructions for “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (PDF file) for details about the

operating environment required to use the playback and editing functions for 4K motion

pictures and the picture cropping function for 4K photos.

• “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” is not compatible with Mac.

Downloading software

PHOTOfunSTUDIO 10.0 AE

Windows

10 (32bit/64bit),

Windows

8.1 (32bit/64bit),

Windows

7 (32bit/64bit) SP1

• For 4K motion pictures and 4K photos, a 64 bit OS version of

Windows 10 / 8.1 / 7 is required.

CPU Pentium

4 (2.8 GHz or higher)

Display 1024k768 pixels or more (1920k1080 pixels or more recommended)

RAM 1 GB or more (32bit), 2 GB or more (64bit)

Free hard disk

space

450 MB or more for installing software

11. Connecting to other devices

306

This is software to edit RAW format images.

Edited images can be saved in a format (JPEG, TIFF, etc.) that can be displayed on a

personal computer.

Check the site below to download and install the software.

http://www.isl.co.jp/SILKYPIX/english/p/

• Operating environment

• For details on how to use the “SILKYPIX Developer Studio”, refer to the Help or the Ichikawa

Soft Laboratory’s support website.

(Windows 10 / 8.1 / 8 / 7)

This software allows you to edit motion pictures with ease.

Check the site below to download and install the software.

http://loilo.tv/product/20

• For more information about the operating environment of and how to use LoiLoScope,

download the LoiLoScope manual available for download at the website.

• “LoiLoScope” is not compatible with Mac.

SILKYPIX Developer Studio SE

Windows

10,

Windows

8.1,

Windows

Mac OS X v10.10, v10.11, macOS 10.12 to 10.14

LoiLoScope 30 day full trial version

307

11. Connecting to other devices

Preparations:

Install “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” on PC. (P305)

1 Turn on the camera and the PC, and then connect these with the USB

connection cable (supplied).

• Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the plug.

(It may result in malfunction by the deforming of the terminal if it is plugged in obliquely or

in wrong direction.)

Do not connect devices to incorrect terminals. Doing so may cause malfunction.

• Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one.

A [USB/CHARGE] socket

B USB connection cable (supplied)

2 Press 3/4 to select [PC(Storage)], and then press [MENU/SET].

• If [USB Mode] is set to [PC(Storage)] in the [Setup] menu in advance, the camera will be

automatically connected to the PC without displaying the [USB Mode] selection screen.

• A message about charging may be displayed. Wait until the display disappears.

3 Copy the images to a PC using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.

• Do not delete or move copied files or folders in Windows Explorer.

When viewing in “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”, you will not be able to play back or edit.

Copying images to a PC

• Before removing or inserting the card, turn off the camera and disconnect the USB connection

cable. Otherwise, damage may be caused to the recorded data.

• Use a sufficiently charged battery, or the AC adaptor (optional) and the DC coupler (optional).

• If the remaining battery power becomes low while the camera and the PC are communicating,

the alarm beeps.

Disconnect the USB connection cable safely. Otherwise, damage may be caused to the

recorded data.

11. Connecting to other devices

308

∫ Folder structure inside card

You can drag and drop the folders and files containing the images you want to transfer into

separate folders on your PC to save them.

For Windows: A drive ([LUMIX]) is displayed in [Computer]

For Mac: A drive ([LUMIX]) is displayed on the desktop

Card

DCIM: Still/motion pictures

1 Folder number

2 Colour space P: sRGB

_: AdobeRGB

3 File number

4 JPG: Still pictures

RW2: Pictures in RAW files

MP4: [MP4] Motion pictures

4K burst file

AVCHD: Motion pictures in AVCHD

AVCHD

DCIM

100XXXXX

101XXXXX

999XXXXX

PXXX0001.JPG

PXXX0002.JPG

PXXX1000.JPG

PRIVATE

309

11. Connecting to other devices

Storing on a Recorder

You can connect the camera to a Panasonic Blu-ray disc recorder or DVD recorder and

store pictures and motion pictures on it.

Preparations:

Turn on the camera and the recorder.

Connect the recorder and camera with the USB connection cable

(supplied).

• Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the plug.

(It may result in malfunction by the deforming of the terminal if it is plugged in obliquely

or in wrong direction.)

Do not connect devices to incorrect terminals. Doing so may cause malfunction.

• Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one.

A [USB/CHARGE] socket

B USB connection cable (supplied)

Press 3/4 to select [PC(Storage)], and then press [MENU/SET].

• If you set the [USB Mode] to [PC(Storage)] in the [Setup] menu, the [USB Mode]

selection screen will not be displayed and the camera will automatically connect to the

recorder.

• A message about charging may be displayed. Wait until the display disappears.

Operate the recorder to copy.

• See the operating instructions for the recorder about the details about copying and

playing back.

• Modes such as 4K motion picture may not be supported depending on the recorder

being used.

• Use a sufficiently charged battery or an AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional). If the

remaining battery power becomes low while the camera and the recorder are communicating,

the alarm beeps. In that case, cancel copying immediately. Otherwise. damage may be

caused to the data.

• Before removing or inserting the card, turn off the camera and disconnect the USB connection

cable. Otherwise, damage may be caused to the recorded data.

11. Connecting to other devices

310

Printing the Pictures

You can directly connect the camera to a PictBridge-supported printer for printing.

Preparations:

• Perform the print quality and other settings at the printer before printing the pictures.

• Turn on the camera and the printer.

Connect the printer and camera with the USB connection cable

(supplied).

• Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the plug.

(It may result in malfunction by the deforming of the terminal if it is plugged in obliquely

or in wrong direction.)

Do not connect devices to incorrect terminals. Doing so may cause malfunction.

• Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one.

A [USB/CHARGE] socket

B USB connection cable (supplied)

• Do not disconnect the USB connection cable while [å] (Cable disconnect prohibit icon)

is displayed.

(May not be displayed depending on the type of printer used.)

Press 3/4 to select [PictBridge(PTP)], and then press [MENU/SET].

• A message about charging may be displayed. Wait until the display disappears.

Press 2/1 to select the picture and then press [MENU/SET].

Press 3/4 to select [Print start] and then press [MENU/SET].

311

11. Connecting to other devices

1 Press 3 to select the multiple printing setting in step 3 of “Printing the

Pictures”. (P310)

2 Press 3/4 to select an item and then press [MENU/SET].

3 Press 3/4 to select [Print start] and then press [MENU/SET].

Selecting multiple pictures and printing them

[Multi Select]

Multiple pictures are printed at one time.

•Press 3/4/2/1 to select the pictures and then press [MENU/

SET].

(Press [MENU/SET] again to cancel the setting.)

• After the pictures have been selected, press [DISP.].

[Select All] Prints all the stored pictures.

[Rating] Prints all images with [Rating] levels between [¿1] and [¿5].

• Group pictures will not be displayed as group pictures but as single pictures.

• Disconnect the USB connection cable after printing.

• Use a sufficiently charged battery or an AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional). If the

remaining battery power becomes low while the camera and the printer are connected, the

alarm beeps. If this happens during printing, stop printing at once. If not printing, disconnect

the USB connection cable.

• Before removing or inserting the card, turn off the camera and disconnect the USB connection

cable. Otherwise, damage may be caused to the recorded data.

• Some printers can print directly from the card removed from the camera. For details, refer to

the operating instructions of your printer.

• The camera is receiving an error message from the printer when the [¥] indication lights

yellow during printing. After finishing printing, make sure there are no problems with the

printer.

• If the number of prints is high, the pictures may be printed several times. In this case, the

remaining number of prints indicated may differ from the number set.

• When you print RAW images, JPEG images that were recorded at the same time will be

printed. If JPEG images were not recorded, printing is not possible.

Not available in these cases:

• Motion pictures, 4K burst files, and images recorded with the Post Focus function cannot be

printed.

11. Connecting to other devices

312

∫ Making print settings on the camera

Setting options include the number of printed pictures and their size. Make settings before

selecting [Print start].

• If the printer does not support date printing, the date cannot be printed on the picture.

• Depending on the printer, the date print settings of the printer may take precedence so check if

this is the case.

• Items not supported by the printer are not displayed.

• When you want to print pictures on a paper size or a layout which is not supported by the

camera, set [Paper Size] or [Page Layout] to [{] and then set the paper size or the layout on

the printer.

(For details, refer to the operating instructions of the printer.)

You can use [Text Stamp] in the [Playback] menu to stamp date and time on pictures.

∫ Printing date without using [Text Stamp]

In-store printing:

Only recording date can be printed. Order date printing at a store.

The characters entered using the following menus cannot be printed at a store.

• [Age] and [Name] in [Face Recog.] or [Profile Setup]

• [Location] in [Travel Date]

•[Title Edit]

Printing at home:

When using a printer that supports date printing, you can print recording date and time by

setting [Print with Date] (P312) to [ON].

You can use the software “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” to set the print settings for recording date

and text information.

[Print with Date] [ON]/[OFF]

[Num.of prints] Sets number of pictures (up to 999 pictures).

[Paper Size] Sets the paper size.

[Page Layout]

Sets whether or not to add borders and how many pictures to be

printed on each sheet of paper.

Adding date and text to pictures

313

12. Others

Optional accessories

• Some optional accessories may not be available in some countries.

After attaching the flash (DMW-FL580L, DMW-FL360L,

DMW-FL200L: optional), the effective range will be increased when

compared to the camera’s built-in flash.

Preparations:

• Close the built-in flash and set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].

• To change the settings for external flashes on the camera, refer to P161.

• Refer to P166 about the settings for the wireless flash.

External Flash (optional)

Removing the Hot Shoe Cover

The camera comes with a hot shoe cover attached to the hot

shoe.

Remove the hot shoe cover by pulling it in the direction

indicated by arrow

while pressing it in the direction

indicated by arrow

• Keep the Hot Shoe Cover out of reach of children to prevent

swallowing.

When using other commercially available external flashes without

communication functions with the camera

• It is necessary to set the exposure on the external flash. If you want to use the external flash

in Auto Mode, use an external flash that allows you to set the aperture value and the ISO

sensitivity to match the settings on the camera.

• Set to Aperture-Priority AE Mode or Manual Exposure Mode on the camera and then set the

same aperture value and ISO sensitivity on the external flash. (The exposure cannot be

compensated adequately due to the change on the aperture value in Shutter-Priority AE

Mode and the external flash cannot control the light adequately in Programme AE Mode

because the aperture value cannot be fixed.)

12. Others

314

When mounted on the camera, the Battery Grip (DMW-BGG1:

optional) improves ease of operation and grip when the camera is

held vertically.

Also, inserting a battery into the Battery Grip provides a stable

supply of power even for long periods of recording.

A Battery Grip (DMW-BGG1: optional) is supplied with a battery

pack (DMW-BLC12).

∫ Battery Grip button operations

When the Battery Grip is attached to the camera, the Battery Grip

buttons operate as follows:

A [ ] (Exposure compensation) button/[Fn] button:

Operates as the exposure compensation button. The Fn button

function does not operate.

B Function button:

Operates the same as the Fn button (Fn1).

• If you attach an external flash, you can use the following functions even when recording with

the flash:

– Aperture Bracket

– Focus Bracket

• You can set the aperture value, the shutter speed and the ISO sensitivity on the camera even

when attaching the external flash.

• If you record at close range with a wide angle, light from the flash may be blocked by the lens,

darkening the lower part of the screen.

• When using a commercially available external flash, do not use one with reversed polarity or

function for communicating with a camera.

It may cause the camera to malfunction, or it may not operate correctly.

• When attaching the external flash, do not hold only the external flash because it may detach

from the camera.

• Read the operating instructions of the external flash for details.

Battery Grip (optional)





315

12. Others

∫ Selecting battery usage priority

Preparations:

• Turn the camera off, and remove the cover for the Battery Grip connector.

1 Attach the Battery Grip to the camera.

2 Turn on the camera.

3 Select the menu.

When connected to the [REMOTE] socket on the camera, the

Shutter Remote Control (DMW-RS2: optional) can be used for the

following purposes:

– Fully pressing the shutter button without camera shake

– Securing the shutter button during bulb recording and burst

recording

– Start/end the motion picture recording

∫ Shutter Remote Control Motion picture button

You can disable the Motion picture button when not recording a motion picture to prevent

erroneous operation.

Settings: [ON]/[OFF]

> [Setup] > [Battery Use Priority]

[BODY]: The battery in the camera is used first.

[BG]: The battery in the Battery Grip is used first.

• When the battery in the Battery Grip is used, [ ] is displayed on the screen.

• When the cover for the Battery Grip connector is difficult to remove, move the corner of the

camera with a groove towards the centre when removing.

• Read the operating instructions of the Battery Grip for details.

Shutter Remote Control (optional)

> [Custom] > [Operation] > [Video Rec. Button (Remote)]

• Read the operating instructions of the Shutter Remote Control for details.

Not available in these cases:

• You cannot use the Shutter Remote Control for the following operation.

– Cancelling [Sleep Mode], [Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)] or [Power Save LVF Shooting]

12. Others

316

Using a Stereo Shotgun Microphone (DMW-MS2: optional) or stereo microphone

(VW-VMS10: optional), you can record sounds with quality superior to those recorded with

the built-in microphone.

Preparations:

• Close the built-in flash and set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].

A Hot shoe

B [MIC] socket

C Stereo Shotgun Microphone (DMW-MS2: optional)

Stereo microphone (VW-VMS10: optional)

• Do not use the stereo microphone cables with the length of 3 m (9.8 feet) or more.

• When attaching to the camera, remove the hot shoe cover. (P313)

∫ [Special Mic.]

When the Stereo Shotgun Microphone (DMW-MS2: optional) is attached, you can set the

microphone sound pickup range in [Special Mic.].

1 Attach the Stereo Shotgun Microphone to the camera.

2 Turn on the camera.

3 Select the menu.

4 (When [MANUAL] is selected)

Press 2/1 to select a range, and press [MENU/SET].

External Microphone (optional)

> [Motion Picture] > [Special Mic.]

[STEREO] Allows stereo recording of sound over a wide area.

[LENS AUTO]

Picks up sound from a range that matches the lens angle of view.

[SHOTGUN]

Allows recording from one direction by shutting out background and

surrounding noise.

[S.SHOTGUN]

Picks up sound from a specific direction narrower than the range of

[SHOTGUN].

[MANUAL] Picks up sound from a manually set range.

317

12. Others

∫ [Wind Cut]

This can reduce wind noise when an external microphone is being used.

Settings: [HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/[OFF]

• This is available when an external microphone is connected.

• Setting [Wind Cut] may alter the usual sound quality.

By using the AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional), you can record and play

back without worrying about the remaining battery charge.

The optional DC coupler can only be used with the designated Panasonic AC adaptor

(optional).

> [Motion Picture] > [Wind Cut]

• While the external microphone is connected, [ ] is displayed on the screen.

• When the external microphone is connected, [Sound Rec Level Disp.] is automatically set to

[ON], and the sound rec level is displayed on the screen.

• When an external microphone is attached to the camera, do not hold only the external

microphone to prevent the camera from falling.

• When an external microphone is attached to the camera, do not open the built-in flash.

• If the noises are recorded when you use an AC adaptor (optional), use a battery.

• When a stereo microphone (VW-VMS10: optional) is used, [Special Mic.] is fixed to

[STEREO].

• When [Special Mic.] is set to [LENS AUTO], [S.SHOTGUN] or [MANUAL], [Sound Output] in

the [Motion Picture] menu is fixed to [REC SOUND].

• When [Special Mic.] is set to [MANUAL], you can use the Fn button function [Mic. Directivity

Adjust]. Press the set Fn button to display the range setting screen.

• For details, refer to the operating instructions of the external microphone.

AC adaptor (optional)/DC coupler (optional)

• Always use a genuine Panasonic AC adaptor (optional).

• When using an AC adaptor (optional), use the AC cable supplied with the AC adaptor.

• When the DC coupler is being mounted, the DC coupler cover opens, so the structure

ceases to be dust and splash resistant.

Be careful not to allow sand, dust and water etc. to adhere to or enter the structure. After use,

check that there is no foreign matter attached to the DC coupler cover, and close it firmly.

• For details, refer to the operating instructions of the AC adaptor and DC coupler.

12. Others

318

Monitor Display/Viewfinder Display

Display example: When [ ] (monitor style) is set and the monitor display is in use

• The information displayed, such as histograms, magnifications, and numeric values, are only

for the purpose of reference.

In recording

3.5

AFS

BKT

4:3

BKT

AEL

BKT

AWB

ラュン

BKT

Fn8

Fn8Fn8

Fn5

Fn5Fn5

Fn4

Fn4Fn4

Fn6

Fn6Fn6

Fn7

Fn7Fn7

MINI

MINIMINI

ISO













Recording Mode (P44)

Custom settings (P80)

Motion picture recording mode

(P169)

Photo Style (P196)

‰Œ

Flash Mode (P162)

Flash (P164, 167)

Extra Tele Conversion

(when recording motion

pictures) (P154)

Recording format/Recording

quality (P171)

Snap Movie (P176)

Aspect Ratio (P194)/

Picture size (P194)

Extra Tele Conversion (when

taking still pictures) (P154)

Image size

([Panorama Settings])

Image effect (filter) adjustment

display (P90, 199)

Image effect (filter) setting

(P199)

Loop Recording (P124)

EXPS

SNAP

4SEC

4:3

EXM

4:3

STD.

WIDE

EXPS

Card (displayed only during

recording) (P31)

Elapsed recording time

¢1

(P169)

Simultaneous recording

indicator (P175)

Automatic viewfinder/monitor

switching (P42)

Peaking (P220)

Highlight Shadow (P201)

HDR (P208)/iHDR (P68)

Multi exposure (P209)

Digital Zoom (P156)

Electronic shutter (P206)

High speed video (P181)

Picture-taking during motion

picture recording (Photo

Priority) (P175)

Overheat indicator (P328)

ラュン

120fps

319

12. Others

A ›

Quality (P195)

Focus Mode (P95, 107)

Focus Bracket (P146)

Post Focus (P133)

AF Mode (P97)

Pull Focus (P178)

Face Recognition (P225)

AF Lock (P110)

Burst (P119)

4K Photo (P122)

Self-timer (P143)

Battery indication (P26)

Power is being supplied (P25)

Battery Grip (P314)

Image Stabiliser (P148)

Jitter alert (P149)

4K Pre-Burst/Pre-Burst

Recording (P123)

Focus (Lights green.) (P43)/

Recording state (Lights red.)

(P169)

Focus (Under low illumination)

(P93)

Focus (Starlight AF) (P93)

Connected to Wi-Fi

Connected to Bluetooth (P261)

Location Logging (P273)

Histogram (P221)

AFS

AFF AFC MF

AFS

BKT

LOW

STAR

Name

¢2

(P227)

Number of days that have passed since the

departure date

¢3

(P229)

Age

¢2

(P227)

Location

¢3

(P229)

Current date and time/

Travel destination setting

¢3

: “ (P229)

Exposure metre (P223)

Focal distance display (P157)

Step zoom (P157)

AF area (P102)

Spot metering target (P201)

Centre marker display (P221)

Self-timer (P143)

Sound Rec level display (P179)

Sound Rec Level Limiter (OFF)

(P179)

Silent Mode (P206)

External Microphone (P316)

AE Lock (P110)

Metering Mode (P54, 201)

Programme Shift (P71)

F3.5

Aperture value (P43)

Aperture Bracket (P146)

Shutter speed (P43)

Exposure compensation value

(P111)

Exposure Bracket (P145)

Brightness (P69, 92)

Manual Exposure Assistance

(P74)

ISO sensitivity (P113)

LMT

OFF

F3.5

BKT

12. Others

320

¢1 h: hour, m: minute, s: second

¢2 This is displayed for about 5 seconds when the camera is turned on if the [Profile Setup]

setting is set.

¢3 This is displayed for about 5 seconds when the camera is turned on, after setting the clock

and after switching from Playback Mode to Recording Mode.

White Balance Bracket (P147)

White Balance Fine Adjustment

(P117)

VÐîÑ

White Balance (P115)

Colour (P69)

Number of recordable pictures

(P33)

r20

Maximum number of pictures

that can be taken continuously

(P120)

Available recording time

¢1

(P33)

BKT

AWB

AWBc

WBw

R 8

Touch tab (P219)

Touch zoom (P158)

Touch Shutter (P53)

Touch AF (P53)

Touch AE (P54)

Peaking (P220)

Fn button (P60)

(P180)

Colour (P69)

Defocus control function

(P69, 92)

Brightness (P69, 92)

Type of defocus ([Miniature

Effect]) (P89)

One point colour (P89)

Position of the light source

(P90)

Image effect (filter)

adjustment (P92, 199)

Image effect ON/OFF (P199)

Image effect (filter) (P199)

Aperture value (P180)

Shutter speed (P180)

ISO sensitivity (P180)

Sound Rec level adjustment

(P180)

Fn4

MINIMINI

ISO

321

12. Others

On-monitor recording information

¢ h: hour, m: minute, s: second

In recording

Recording Mode (P44)

Motion picture recording mode

(P169)

F3.5

Aperture value (P43)

1/60

Shutter speed (P43)

Battery indication (P26)

Power is being supplied (P25)

Card (displayed only during

recording) (P31)

ISO sensitivity (P113)

Exposure compensation value

(P111)

Brightness (P69)

Manual Exposure Assistance

(P74)

‰Œ

Flash Mode (P162)

Flash (P164, 166)

AWB

0 0

ISO

AUTO

OFF

4:3

AFS

1/60 F3.5









EXPSEXPS

ISO

AUTO

Single (P118)

Burst (P119)

4K Photo (P122)

Post Focus (P133)

Self-timer (P143)

Focus Mode (P95, 107)

AF Mode (P97)

A ›

Quality (P195)

Aspect Ratio (P194)/

Picture size (P194)

Wi-Fi/Bluetooth (P256)

Fn button setting (P60)

Photo Style (P196)

VÐîÑ

White Balance (P115)

Intelligent Dynamic Range

Control (P202)

Metering Mode (P201)

Number of recordable pictures

(P33)

r20

Maximum number of pictures

that can be taken continuously

(P120)

Available recording time

(P33)

----

No card

AFS

AFF

AFC

4:3

AWB

AWBc

AWBw

12. Others

322

In playback

Playback Mode (P241)

Protected picture (P242)

Location Logging (P273)

Ü3

Rating (P242)

Cable disconnect prohibit icon

(P310)

Motion picture playback (P185)

Save pictures from the 4K burst file

(P128)

Create pictures from an image

recorded with the Post Focus

function (P135)

Play panorama (P86)

Continuous group picture playback

(P190)

Focus Bracket (P146, 189)

‘

Stamped with text indication (P250)

Elapsed playback time

¢1

(P185)

Icon indicating the presence of a

marker (P129, 131)

4K Photo (4K burst file) (P122)

Post Focus (P133)

Focus Stacking (P136)

Aspect Ratio (P194)/

Picture size (P194)

Recording format/Recording quality

(P171)

F3.5

F3.560

AWB

1/98

pic.



pic.

4:3











4:3

Snap Movie (P176)

High speed video (P181)

A ›

Quality (P195)

Battery indication (P26)

Power is being supplied (P25)

Battery Grip (P314)

1/98

Picture number/Total pictures

Connected to Wi-Fi

Number of group pictures

Motion picture recording time

¢1

(P185)

Clear Retouch completed icon

(P249)

Currently retrieving information icon

Playback (Motion Pictures) (P185)

Upload (Wi-Fi) (P287)

Group Display (P189)

Sub Menu (P287)

Silent Mode (P206)

Number of days that have passed

since the departure date (P229)

Thumbnail display (P187)

Delete (P191)

120fps

SLF

SUB

67'$<

323

12. Others

¢1 h: hour, m: minute, s: second

¢2 It is displayed in order of [Title], [Location], [Name] ([Baby1]/[Baby2], [Pet]),

[Name] ([Face Recog.]).

Name

¢2

(P225, 227)

Location

¢2

(P229)

Title

¢2

(P243)

Age (P225, 227)

Recording information

12. Others

324

In playback

Detailed information display Histogram display

Photo style, Highlight shadow display White balance display

Lens information display

RGB

1/5

AFS

200

4:3

100-0001

5500

ISOISO

F3.5

10:00 1.DEC.2019

STD.









2/5

200

100-0001

ISOISO

F3.5

10:00 1.DEC.2019

3/5

200

100-0001

ISOISO

F3.5

10:00 1.DEC.2019

4/5

200

100-0001

ISOISO

10:00 1.DEC.2019

F3.5

5500K

5/5

200

100-0001

ISOISO

F3.5

10:00 1.DEC.2019

Recording information (basic)

Recorded date and time/World Time (P228)

100-0001

Folder/File number (P308)

Recording information (advanced)

5500

White Balance Colour Temperature

(P116)

Intelligent Dynamic Range Control

(P202)

HDR (P208)/iHDR (P68)

Intelligent Resolution (P203)

325

12. Others

Message Display

Meanings of main messages displayed on the camera screen, and response methods.

∫ Card

• It is a format that cannot be used with the camera.

Either insert another card, or back up any necessary data before formatting. (P33)

• Use a card compatible with the camera. (P32)

• Unable to access the card. Reinsert the card.

• Insert a different card.

• Failure to read or write data.

Turn off the camera, reinsert the card, and then turn it on again.

• The card may be broken.

• Insert a different card.

• Insufficient SD card write speed for motion picture, 4K photo, or Post-Focus recording.

Use an SD card of a supported Speed Class. (P32)

• If the recording stops even when you are using an SD card that meets the specified Speed

Class rating, the data writing speed of the SD card is getting slow.

We recommend backing up data, and formatting (P33).

• Depending on the type of card, recording may stop part way.

[Memory Card Error]/[Format this card?]

[Memory Card Error]/[This memory card cannot be used]

[Insert SD card again]/[Try another card]

[Read Error]/[Write Error]/[Please check the card]

[Recording was cancelled due to the limitation of the writing speed of the card]

12. Others

326

∫ Lens

• Remove the lens once, and then attach it again without pressing the lens release button. (P35)

Turn on the camera again, and if it is still displaying, contact the dealer.

• Remove the lens from the camera body and gently wipe the contacts on the lens and the

camera body using a dry cotton swab.

Attach the lens, turn on the camera again, and if it is still displaying, contact the dealer.

∫ Battery

• Use a genuine Panasonic battery.

If this message is displayed even when a genuine Panasonic battery is used, contact the

dealer.

• If the terminal of the battery is dirty, remove the dirt and dust from them.

∫ Wi-Fi

• The wireless access point information set on the camera is wrong.

Check the authentication type and encryption key. (P294)

• Radio waves from other devices may block the connection to a wireless access point.

Check the status of other devices that are connected to the wireless access point as well as the

status of other wireless devices.

• Radio waves from the wireless access point are getting weak.

Perform the connection closer to the wireless access point.

• Depending on the wireless access point, connection may be automatically disconnected after

specific time has passed.

Reconnect the connection again.

• Change the access point to connect to in the smartphone Wi-Fi settings to the camera.

[The lens is not attached properly. Do not push lens release button while lens is

attached.]

[Lens attachment failed. Please make sure the lens is attached correctly.]

[This battery cannot be used]

[Failed to connect wireless access point]/[Connection failed]/[No destination

found]

[Connection failed. Please retry in a few minutes.]/[Network disconnected.

Transfer stopped.]

[Connection failed]

327

12. Others

∫ Others

• Images that do not comply with the DCF standard cannot be deleted.

Back up any necessary data before formatting the card. (P33)

• Images that do not comply with the DCF standard cannot be edited.

• The maximum number of folder numbers has been reached, so new folders cannot be created.

Back up any necessary data before formatting the card. (P33)

After formatting, execute [No.Reset] in the [Setup] menu to reset the folder number to 100.

(P236)

• Turn off and on the camera.

If the message is displayed even when doing this several times, contact the dealer.

[Some pictures cannot be deleted]/[This picture cannot be deleted]

[Cannot be set on this picture]

[A folder cannot be created]

[Please turn camera off and then on again]/[System Error]

12. Others

328

Troubleshooting

First, try out the following procedures (P328 to P336).

• Charging is being performed in a place with extremely high or low temperature.

– Reconnect the USB connection cable (supplied) and retry charging in a place where ambient

temperature is 10 °C to 30 °C (50 oF to 86 oF) (temperature conditions also apply to the

battery itself).

• Charging is not possible if the power supply capacity of the computer is low.

• The battery is exhausted. Charge the battery. (P21)

• [Economy] is enabled. (P231)

• When [4K Pre-Burst] or [Pre-Burst Recording] is set, the battery drains faster.

Set these settings only when recording.

• When connected to Wi-Fi, the battery drains quickly.

Turn the camera off frequently such as by using [Economy]. (P231)

• In high ambient temperatures or if the camera is used for continuous recording, the

temperature of the camera will rise.

To protect the camera against a rise in temperature, after [ ] is displayed, recording will be

stopped, and the following functions will not be available for a time.

Wait until the camera cools down.

–[4K PHOTO]

– Post Focus

– Motion picture recording

– Power supply via the USB connection cable

If the problem is not resolved, it may be improved by selecting [Reset] (P236) on

the [Setup] menu.

Power, Battery

The charging lamp blinks.

Camera does not work even if the camera is turned on.

Camera switches off as soon as the camera is turned on.

The camera turns off automatically.

The battery becomes flat too quickly.

Recording

Recording stops before finishing.

Cannot record.

Cannot use some functions.

329

12. Others

• If [Focus/Release Priority] is set to [FOCUS], then recording will not take place until focus is

achieved. (P216)

• Images may look whitish when the lens or image sensor gets dirty with fingerprints or similar.

If the lens is dirty, turn the camera off, then wipe the lens surface with a soft, dry cloth.

For information about how to clean the image sensor, refer to P338.

• Ensure AE Lock is not set where it is not appropriate. (P110)

• When drive mode is set to [ ] (Burst), pressing and holding the shutter button will take burst

pictures. (P118)

• When bracketing is set, then pressing the shutter button records multiple images while

automatically changing the settings. (P144)

• Confirm the following details:

– Is the subject outside of the focus range?

– Is [Shutter AF] set to [OFF]? (P214)

– Is [Focus/Release Priority] set to [RELEASE]? (P216)

– Is AF Lock (P110) set where it is not appropriate?

• If there are fingerprints or dirt on the lens, the focus may be set to the lens and, as a result, the

subject may not be brought into focus.

• The shutter speed will become slower and the stabiliser function may not work properly when

recording in dark places.

In these cases, use a tripod and the self-timer when recording.

• Try the following:

– Reduce the ISO sensitivity. (P113)

– Increase [Noise Reduction] of [Photo Style] to the positive direction, or adjust each item other

than [Noise Reduction] to the negative direction. (P197)

– Set [Long Shtr NR] to [ON]. (P204)

Cannot record images.

The shutter will not operate immediately when the shutter button is pressed.

The recorded image is whitish.

The recorded image is too bright or dark.

Multiple images are recorded at once.

The subject is not focused properly.

The recorded image is blurred.

The stabiliser is not effective.

The recorded image looks rough.

Noise appears on the picture.

12. Others

330

• When a moving subject is recorded while using the following functions, the subject may appear

distorted in the picture:

– [ESHTR]

– Motion picture recording

–[4K PHOTO]

This is a characteristic of the MOS sensor that is the image sensor of the camera, and is not a

malfunction.

• This is characteristic of MOS sensors which serve as the camera’s

pickup sensors.

This is not a malfunction.

• When using the electronic shutter (P206), lowering the shutter speed

may reduce the effect of the horizontal stripes.

• If flicker or horizontal stripes are noticeable when recording motion

picture, this can be mitigated by fixing the shutter speed.

Either set [Flkr Decrease] (P210), or record in Creative Video Mode (P180).

• Stripes may appear in high ISO sensitivity or depending on the lens you use.

Decrease the ISO sensitivity. (P113)

• When recording under fluorescent or LED lighting fixture, etc., increasing the shutter speed

may introduce slight changes to brightness or colouring.

These are a result of the characteristics of the light source and do not indicate a malfunction.

• When recording subjects in extremely bright locations or recording under fluorescent lighting,

LED lighting fixture, mercury lamp, sodium lighting, etc., the colouring or screen brightness

may change or horizontal striping may appear on the screen.

• Pixels may be missing from the image sensor.

Perform [Pixel Refresh]. (P237)

• When using a large capacity card, you may not be able to record for a while after turning on the

camera.

The subject appears distorted on the image.

Striping or flicker may appear under lighting such as fluorescent lighting and

LED lighting fixture.

Stripes appear in high ISO sensitivity.

The brightness or colouring of the recorded image is different from the actual

scene.

Bright spot not in subject is recorded.

Motion pictures

Cannot record motion pictures.

331

12. Others

• Recording motion picture using the SD card requires an SD card of a supported speed class.

Use a compatible SD card. (P32)

• This may occur when taking a picture by reducing the AF speed in order to adjust the focus at

high precision. This is not a malfunction.

• Depending on the recording conditions or the lens used, the sound of aperture and focus

actions may be recorded in motion pictures.

You can set the focus operation during motion picture recording to [OFF] in [Continuous AF]

(P172).

• Do not block the microphone hole during motion picture recording.

• We recommend setting the Creative Video Mode and recording with touch operation if you are

bothered about the operation sounds during recording. (P180)

• When you are using a [Photo Style] setting which uses an adjusted gamma curve, such as

[V-Log L], the camera may incorrectly detect noise on images as contrast and indicate it with

Peaking. We recommend checking focus with MF Assist before recording.

• This camera records motion pictures in 4:2:0/8 bit, so luminance and colour unevenness or

noise may appear in areas such as blue skies, people's skin, and white walls.

We recommend performing trial recording in advance and editing and checking post-production

images before proceeding to actual recording.

• Folders and images processed on a PC cannot be played on the camera.

We recommend using the software “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” to write images from the PC to the

card.

• Set [Playback Mode] to [Normal Play]. (P241)

Motion picture recording stops in the middle.

Sometimes focus adjustment with AF mode is difficult while recording 4K

motion pictures.

In motion pictures, abnormal clicking and buzzing sounds are recorded.

The recorded audio is very quiet.

An operation sound is recorded in a motion picture.

Parts that are not in focus are indicated with Peaking.

When motion pictures recorded with the Photo Style set to [V-Log L] are edited

post-production, luminance and colour unevenness or noise appears.

Playback

Cannot play back.

There are no recorded pictures.

12. Others

332

• When Red-Eye Removal ([ ] or [ ]) is performed, red parts may be corrected to black.

We recommend recording images with the flash mode set to [‰] or [Red-Eye Removal] set to

[OFF]. (P203)

• If no operations are performed during the set time period, [Auto LVF/Monitor Off] (P231) is

activated, and the Monitor/Viewfinder turns off.

• When an object or your hand is positioned near the eye sensor, the Monitor display may switch

to the Viewfinder display.

• This occurs when the shutter button is pressed halfway, or when the subject brightness

changes, making the lens aperture change.

This is not a malfunction.

• When the camera is connected to a PC or printer, it is not possible to switch to the viewfinder

display.

• Monitor/viewfinder of this unit adopts OLED. Screen burn-in may occur on the monitor/

viewfinder when a same image is displayed for a long period of time, but it does not affect the

recorded images.

– Change the on-screen images frequently by using [Economy] (P231), [Eye Sensor] function

(P42), or turning off the screen light (P49).

• This is a characteristic of this unit’s monitor, and this is not a malfunction.

• This is characteristic of the viewfinder of the camera and not a malfunction.

It does not affect the recorded images.

Red part of the recorded image has changed colour to black.

Monitor/Viewfinder

The monitor/viewfinder turns off when the camera is turned on.

It may flicker for an instant or the brightness of the screen may change

significantly for an instant.

Cannot switch between the monitor and viewfinder even when [LVF] is pressed.

Unevenly bright parts or irregular colours appear on the Monitor/Viewfinder.

Monitor appears to be coloured when you see it from an angle.

The colouring of the viewfinder differs from the actual tone.

333

12. Others

• Open the flash if it is closed. (P159)

• The flash does not fire when [Œ] (forced flash off) is selected. (P162, 163)

General tips for using a Wi-Fi connection

• Use within the communication range of the device to be connected.

• Usage near devices that utilise the 2.4 GHz frequency such as microwave ovens and cordless

telephones may result in the radio wave being lost.

Use the camera at a sufficient distance from these devices.

• When the remaining battery level is low, it may not be possible to connect to or maintain

communication with other devices.

(A message such as [Communication error] is displayed.)

• If you place the camera on a metal table or shelf, the radio waves may be adversely affected. In

such cases, you may not be able to establish a connection.

Move the camera away from the metal surface.

Wireless access point

• Confirm that the connected wireless access point can be used.

• Confirm the radio wave conditions of the wireless access point.

– Move the camera closer to the wireless access point.

– Change the location and angle of the wireless access point.

• Depending on the wireless access point, the radio wave may not be displayed even though it is

present.

– Turn off and then on the wireless access point.

– If the wireless channel of the wireless access point cannot be set automatically, manually set

the channel supported by the camera.

– If the wireless access point SSID is set not to broadcast, it may not be detected.

Enter the SSID, and then connect. (P294)

• From the Wi-Fi setting menu on the smartphone, turn off and then on the Wi-Fi function.

Flash

The flash does not fire.

Wi-Fi Function

A Wi-Fi connection cannot be established.

Radio waves get disconnected.

Wireless access point is not displayed.

The camera is not displayed in the Wi-Fi setting screen of the smartphone.

12. Others

334

• Depending on the version of the OS, there are two types of user account (local account/

Microsoft account).

Ensure you use the local account user name and password.

• At the time of purchase, this camera is set to use a workgroup name of “WORKGROUP”.

If you have changed the workgroup name of the PC, this will not be recognised.

In the [Wi-Fi Setup] menu, [PC Connection], change the workgroup name of the PC to which to

connect. (P298)

• Check that the login name and password are correctly typed.

• When the clock settings of the PC connected to the camera differs considerably from those of

the camera, the camera cannot be connected to the PC depending on the OS.

– Confirm that the [Clock Set]/[World Time] settings of the camera match the time, date, and

time zone settings of the Windows or Mac.

If there are considerable differences, correct them.

• Confirm that the login information (login ID/user name/email address/password) is correct.

• Is the size of the image too large?

– Reduce the image size at [Size] (P279), and then send.

– Transmit after dividing the motion picture with [Video Divide] (P253).

• It may take longer time to transmit when distance to the wireless access point is far.

Transmit closer to the wireless access point.

• File format of the motion picture that can be sent differs depending on the destination. (P277)

• In the [Setup] menu, [Reset], reset network settings. (P237)

However, all information set in [Wi-Fi Setup] and [Bluetooth] will also be reset.

(With the exception of [LUMIX CLUB])

When trying to connect to a PC by Wi-Fi, this does not recognise the user name

and password, and connection is not possible.

The PC is not recognised when I use a Wi-Fi connection.

The camera cannot be connected to the PC using the Wi-Fi function.

Images cannot be transmitted to the web service.

It takes time to transmit an image to the web service.

Transmission of the image fails midway.

Some images cannot be transmitted.

I have forgotten the password for the Wi-Fi.

335

12. Others

• Confirm the connection with the TV. (P301)

• Set the TV input to HDMI input.

• Check that the [VIERA Link] of the camera is set to [ON]. (P234)

• Check the VIERA Link setting on the connected device.

• Turn off and on the camera.

• Set the [USB Mode] of the camera to [PC(Storage)]. (P233)

• Turn the camera off and on.

• Check if your PC supports SDXC memory cards.

• When connecting the camera to the PC, a message recommending that the card be formatted

may be displayed. Do not format the card.

• If the [Access] displayed on the monitor does not disappear, turn off the camera and disconnect

the USB connection cable, and then connect again.

• Pictures cannot be printed using a printer that does not support PictBridge.

• Set to [PictBridge(PTP)] in [USB Mode]. (P233)

• If the printer has trimming or borderless printing functions, cancel these settings before printing.

(Refer to the operating instructions for your printer.)

• Depending on the photo studio, images recorded with their aspect ratio set to 16:9 can be

printed at sizes in 16:9 aspect ratio. Ask the photo studio in advance.

TV, PC, Printer

No image on the TV.

The TV screen is blurry or not coloured.

VIERA Link is not working.

Cannot communicate with the PC.

The card is not recognised by the PC.

(SDXC memory card is used.)

Cannot print when the camera is connected to a printer.

The ends of the images are cut at printing.

12. Others

336

• The sound is caused by the in-body stabiliser. This is not a malfunction.

• Depending on the lens you attach, it may move inside and create a sound. This is not a

malfunction.

• This is the noise of the dust reduction function working (P338); it is not a malfunction.

• The lens movement and aperture operation emit sound when turning the camera on or off; this

is not a malfunction.

• This is the sound of aperture operation when brightness changes; this is not a malfunction.

• In dark places, the AF Assist Lamp (P215) lights red to make it easier to focus on a subject.

• Reselect the language from the menu using the following procedure:

• During use, the camera may get warm, but this does not affect performance or quality.

• When the camera is left for a long time, the clock may reset.

Reset the clock. (P39)

Others

When I shake the camera, I hear a rattling sound from the camera.

When I shake the camera, I hear a rattling sound from the attached lens.

The camera makes a noise when it is turned on.

There is a sound from the lens unit.

A red lamp sometimes lights when the shutter button is pressed halfway.

An unreadable language was selected by mistake.

> [Setup] > [~] > Select desired language (P234)

The camera becomes warm.

The clock is wrong.

337

12. Others

Cautions for Use

Keep this unit as far away as possible from electromagnetic equipment (such as

microwave ovens, TVs, video games etc.).

• If you use this unit on top of or near a TV, the pictures and/or sound on this unit may be

disrupted by electromagnetic wave radiation.

• Do not use this unit near cell phones because doing so may result in noise adversely affecting

the pictures and/or sound.

• Recorded data may be damaged, or pictures may be distorted, by strong magnetic fields

created by speakers or large motors.

• Electromagnetic wave radiation may adversely affect this unit, disturbing the pictures and/or

sound.

• If this unit is adversely affected by electromagnetic equipment and stops functioning properly,

turn this unit off and remove the battery or disconnect AC adaptor. Then reinsert the battery or

reconnect AC adaptor and turn this unit on.

Do not use this unit near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines.

• If you record near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines, the recorded pictures and/or sound

may be adversely affected.

Always use the supplied cords and cables.

If you use optional accessories, use the cords and the cables supplied with them.

Do not extend the cords or the cables.

Keep items away from the magnetic parts A that are

easily influenced by magnetism.

• The effects of the magnets may cause items like bank cards,

commuter cards, and clocks to cease functioning correctly.

Do not spray the camera with insecticides or volatile chemicals.

• If the camera is sprayed with such chemicals, the body of the camera may be damaged and the

surface finish may peel off.

Do not keep rubber or plastic products in contact with the camera for a long period

of time.

Optimal use of the camera

12. Others

338

Before cleaning the camera, remove the battery or the DC Coupler (optional) and the

card (optional), and disconnect the power plug from the electrical outlet. Then wipe

the camera with a dry, soft cloth.

• When the camera is soiled badly, it can be cleaned by wiping the dirt off with a wrung wet cloth,

and then with a dry cloth.

• Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, alcohol, kitchen detergents, etc., to clean the

camera, since it may deteriorate the external case or the coating may peel off.

• When using a chemical cloth, be sure to follow the accompanying instructions.

∫ About dirt on the image sensor

If dirt gets inside the mount when changing lenses, depending on the recording conditions,

it may adhere to the image sensor and appear on the recorded picture.

To prevent debris or dust adhering to internal parts of the body, avoid changing the lens in

a dusty environment and always fit the body cap or a lens when storing the camera.

Remove any dirt on the body cap before attaching it.

Dust reduction function

The camera has a dust reduction function that will blow off the dirt and dust that have

affixed to the front of the image sensor.

This function will function automatically when the camera is turned on, but if the dirt is

particularly noticeable, from the [Setup] menu, perform [Sensor Cleaning].

Removing dirt on the image sensor

The image sensor is very precise and delicate, so be sure to observe the following when

you do have to clean it yourself.

• Blow dust off the surface of the image sensor using a commercially available blower.

Do not blow the dust off with excessive power.

• Do not put the blower brush further inside than the lens mount.

• Do not let the blower brush touch the image sensor as the image sensor may get scratched.

• Do not use any objects except a blower brush to clean the image sensor.

• If you cannot remove the dirt or dust with the blower, consult the dealer or Panasonic.

∫ Cleaning the Viewfinder

When the viewfinder becomes dirty, blow dirt off the surface of the viewfinder using a

commercially available blower, then lightly wipe with a dry cloth.

• The eye cup is a built-in component, so be careful not to remove it.

• If you wipe the eye cup too hard and it is removed, consult the dealer or Panasonic.

Cleaning

339

12. Others

• Do not push hard on the monitor.

This may cause irregular colouration or malfunction.

• If the camera is cold when you turn it on, the picture on the Monitor/Viewfinder will be slightly

darker than usual at first. However, the picture will return to normal brightness when the internal

temperature of the camera increases.

• Do not push hard on the lens surface.

• Do not aim the lens at the sun or strong light sources.

The concentrated light may cause fire or damage.

• Soiling on the lens surface (water, oil, fingerprints, etc.) may impact image quality.

Before and after use, lightly wipe the lens surface with a soft, dry cloth.

• When the camera is not being used, attach the lens cap and lens rear cap to prevent dust and

dirt from adhering to or entering the camera.

• To protect the lens contact points A, do not do the following.

These may cause a malfunction.

– Touch the lens contact points.

– Soil the lens contact points.

– Place the lens with its mount surface facing down.

• To improve the dust and splash resistant performance of the

interchangeable lens (H-FS12060/H-FSA14140), a lens mount rubber is

used in the mount.

– The lens mount rubber will leave scuff marks on the digital camera mount, but this does not

impact performance.

– To replace the lens mount rubber, contact Panasonic.

Monitor/Viewfinder

Extremely high precision technology is employed to produce the Monitor/

Viewfinder screen. However there may be some dark or bright spots (red, blue or

green) on the screen. This is not a malfunction. Though the Monitor/Viewfinder

screen parts are produced with highly controlled precision technology, some

pixels may be inactive or always lit. The spots will not be recorded on pictures

on a card.

Lens

12. Others

340

The battery is a rechargeable lithium ion battery.

It is highly sensitive to temperature and humidity, and the effect on performance increases

as the temperature rises or drops.

Always remove the battery after use.

• Place the removed battery in a plastic bag, and store or keep away from metallic objects (clips,

etc.).

If you drop the battery accidentally, check to see if the body of the battery and the

contacts are deformed.

• Damage to the camera will result if a battery with deformed contacts is inserted into the

camera.

Dispose of unusable battery.

• The battery has a limited life.

• Do not throw the battery into fire because it may cause an explosion.

Do not allow battery terminals to come into contact with metal objects (such as

necklaces, hairpins, etc.).

• This can cause short-circuiting or heat generation and you may be badly burned if you touch a

battery.

• The [CHARGE] lamp may blink under the influence of static electricity or electromagnetic wave,

depending on the charging environment. This phenomenon has no effects on charging.

• If you use the battery charger near a radio, the radio reception may be disturbed.

Keep the charger 1 m (3.3 feet) or more away from radio.

• During usage, the AC adaptor may emit an electrical hum; this is not a malfunction.

• After use, be sure to disconnect the power supply device from the electrical outlet.

(A very small amount of current is consumed if it is left connected.)

• Keep the contacts of the charger and battery clean.

Wipe them with a dry cloth if they get dirty.

Battery

Charger, AC Adaptor

341

12. Others

Do not leave the card in areas with high temperatures, direct sunlight, or areas

prone to electromagnetic waves and static.

Do not bend or drop the card.

Do not subject the card to strong vibration.

• Otherwise, the card and recorded data may be damaged.

• Put the card in the card case or the storage bag after use and when storing or carrying the

card.

• Do not allow dirt, water or other foreign objects to get into the contacts on the card.

Additionally, do not touch the contacts with your hands.

Points to remember when disposing of/transferring the memory card

Format or delete using the camera or a PC will only modify the file management

information, so it will not delete the data in the card completely.

We recommend physically destroying the card or using commercially available PC data

deletion software to delete the card data completely when disposing of/transferring the

card.

You are responsible for handling of data on cards.

Personal information is stored within the camera and in recorded images.

We recommend that you enhance security by setting a Wi-Fi password and Wi-Fi function

lock to protect personal information. (P298 , 299)

• Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy, likeness rights, etc. of a subject and take

your own responsibility when you use the [Silent Mode], or use functions such as

writing the location information and changing the shutter noise, etc.

Disclaimer

• Information including personal information may be altered or vanish due to erroneous

operation, effect of static electricity, accident, malfunction, repair, or other handlings.

Please note in advance that Panasonic is not liable in any way for any direct or indirect damage

from the alteration or vanishing of information or personal information.

When requesting a repair or transferring/disposing of the camera

• After making a copy of personal information, be sure to delete information, including personal

information, such as wireless LAN connection settings that you have registered or saved within

the camera with [Reset Network Settings]/[Delete account]. (P237, 291)

• Reset the settings to protect the personal information. (P236)

• Remove the card from the camera.

• Settings may return to factory default when camera is repaired.

• Please contact the dealer where you purchased the camera or Panasonic if above operations

are not possible due to malfunction.

When transferring/disposing of the card, refer to “Points to remember when

disposing of/transferring the memory card” on page 341.

Card

About the personal information

12. Others

342

When uploading images to a web service

• Images may contain information that can be used to identify the user, such as recording dates

and times, and location information.

Confirm details carefully before uploading images to a web service.

• Ensure you remove the battery and card from the camera.

When the battery is left inserted in the camera, a small amount of current will always flow even

if the camera is turned off.

If the battery is left in the camera, it may over-discharge, and be rendered unusable even after

charging.

• Store the battery in a cool and dry place with a relatively stable temperature.

(Recommended temperature: 15 oC to 25 oC (59 oF to 77 oF); recommended humidity: 40%RH

to 60%RH)

• If storing for a long period of time, it is recommended that the battery be charged once per year,

fully drained in the camera, then removed from the camera and then stored again.

• We recommend storing the camera with a desiccant (silica gel) when you keep it in a closet or

a cabinet.

• Check all the parts before recording when you have not used the camera for a long period of

time.

• Recorded data may be damaged or lost if the camera breaks down due to inappropriate

handling.

Panasonic will not be liable for any damage caused due to loss of recorded data.

• Make sure the tripod is stable when the camera is attached to it.

• When using a tripod or unipod, removal of the battery may not be possible.

• Make sure that the screw on the tripod or unipod is not at an angle when attaching or removing

the tripod or unipod.

Using excessive force may damage the camera tripod mount.

Also, care is required because tightening the screw excessively may damage the camera, or

cause the rating label to come off.

• When using this unit with a large-diameter lens, the lens may come into contact with the

pedestal depending on the tripod/unipod. Tightening the screw with the lens and pedestal in

contact with each other may damage this unit or the lens. Therefore it is recommended to

attach the tripod adaptor (DMW-TA1: optional) before mounting on the tripod/unipod.

• Please also refer to the operating instructions for the tripod or unipod.

• If you attach a heavy interchangeable lens (more than about 1 kg/35.3 oz) to the camera body,

do not carry the camera by the shoulder strap.

Hold the camera and the lens when carrying them.

When not using the camera for a long period of time

Image Data

Tripods or unipods

Shoulder Strap

343

12. Others

∫ Use the camera as a wireless LAN device

When using equipment or computer systems that require more reliable security than

wireless LAN devices, ensure that the appropriate measures are taken for safety designs

and defects for the systems used. Panasonic will not take any responsibility for any

damage that arises when using the camera for any purpose other than as a wireless LAN

device.

∫ Use of the Wi-Fi function of this camera is presumed to be in countries where this

camera is sold

There is the risk that the camera violates the radio wave regulations if used in countries

other than those where this camera is sold, and Panasonic takes no responsibility for any

violations.

∫ There is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be intercepted

Please note that there is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be

intercepted by a third party.

We strongly recommend that you set an encryption to maintain information security.

∫ Do not use the camera in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity or

interference

• Do not use the camera in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity or interference, such as

near microwave ovens. These may cause the interruption of the radio waves.

• Using the camera near devices such as microwave ovens or cordless telephones that use the

2.4 GHz radio wave band may cause a decrease in performance in both devices.

∫ Do not connect to the wireless network you are not authorised to use

When the camera utilises its Wi-Fi function, wireless networks will be searched

automatically. When this happens, wireless networks that you are not authorised to use

(SSID

) may be displayed, however do not attempt to connect to the network as it may be

considered as unauthorised access.

¢ SSID refers to the name that is used to identify a network over a wireless LAN connection.

If the SSID matches for both devices, transmission is possible.

Wi-Fi function

344

12. Others

• Micro Four Thirds™ and Micro Four Thirds Logo marks are

trademarks or registered trademarks of Olympus Corporation,

in Japan, the United States, the European Union and other

countries.

• Four Thirds™ and Four Thirds Logo marks are trademarks or

registered trademarks of Olympus Corporation, in Japan, the

United States, the European Union and other countries.

• SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

• The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia

Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered

trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc. in the United

States and other countries.

• “AVCHD”, “AVCHD Progressive” and the “AVCHD Progressive”

logo are trademarks of Panasonic Corporation and Sony

Corporation.

• Dolby, Dolby Audio, and the double-D symbol are trademarks

of Dolby Laboratories.

• HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.

• Adobe is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United

States and/or other countries.

• Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.

• Windows is a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United

States and/or other countries.

• iMovie, Mac, OS X and macOS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other

countries.

• iPad, iPhone, iPod, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and

other countries.

• App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.

• Google, Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google LLC.

345

12. Others

• The Bluetooth

word mark and logos are registered

trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use

of such marks by Panasonic Corporation is under

license. Other trademarks and trade names are those

of their respective owners.

• The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Logo is a certification mark of

Wi-Fi Alliance

• The Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ Logo is a certification

mark of Wi-Fi Alliance

•“Wi-Fi

” is a registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance

• “Wi-Fi Protected Setup™”, “WPA™”, and “WPA2™” are

trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance

• DLNA, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED are

trademarks, service marks, or certification marks of the

Digital Living Network Alliance.

• This product uses “DynaFont” from DynaComware

Corporation. DynaFont is a registered trademark of

DynaComware Taiwan Inc.

• QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED.

• Other names of systems and products mentioned in these instructions are usually the

registered trademarks or trademarks of the manufacturers who developed the system or

product concerned.

This product is licensed under the AVC Patent Portfolio License for the personal use of a

consumer or other uses in which it does not receive remuneration to (i) encode video in

compliance with the AVC Standard (“AVC Video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC Video that was

encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal activity and/or was obtained from a video

provider licensed to provide AVC Video. No license is granted or shall be implied for any other

use. Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA, L.L.C.

See http://www.mpegla.com

Disposal of Old Equipment and Batteries

Only for European Union and countries with recycling systems

These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying

documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and

batteries must not be mixed with general household waste.

For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used

batteries, please take them to applicable collection points in accordance

with your national legislation.

By disposing of them correctly, you will help to save valuable resources

and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the

environment.

For more information about collection and recycling, please contact your

local authority.

Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in

accordance with national legislation.

Note for the battery symbol (bottom symbol):

This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In

this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the

chemical involved.

Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

First, read the manual;
Check if your question has been asked previously;
Try to ask your question as clearly as possible;
Did you already try to solve the problem? Please mention this;
Is your problem solved by a visitor then let him/her know in this forum;
To give a response to a question or answer, do not use this form but click on the button 'reply to this question';
Your question will be posted here and emailed to our subscribers. Therefore, avoid filling in personal details.

new questions and answers
new manuals

You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.

Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Panasonic DC-G91 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 15,16 mb in size.

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Panasonic DC-G91

Panasonic DC-G91 User Manual - German - 346 pages

Panasonic DC-G91 User Manual - Dutch - 346 pages

Panasonic DC-G91 User Manual - French - 346 pages

The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.

Info

Panasonic DC-G91 Manual

Product: